units

faculty-ug-bus

Faculty of Business and Economics

Monash University

Monash University Handbook 2012 Undergraduate - Units

This unit entry is for students who completed this unit in 2012 only. For students planning to study the unit, please refer to the unit indexes in the the current edition of the Handbook. If you have any queries contact the managing faculty for your course or area of study.

print version


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to basic concepts in accounting and finance and the application of these concepts for decision-making by a wide range of potential users (e.g., shareholders, investment analysts, lenders, managers etc.). This unit should benefit students who wish to specialise in accounting and finance, and will also be of value to students whose primary interest lies elsewhere in the field of business. On completion, students should have a clear understanding of the accounting process and the language of accounting to enable communication with an accounting professional, understand the relevance of accounting information for informed decision-making by a wide range of potential users, and have the ability to analyse and interpret accounting information.

Topics covered include the accounting equation, general purpose financial statements, cash and accrual accounting, balance day adjustments, financial statement analysis, interpreting information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control, and an introduction to finance, financial mathematics and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the elements of financial statements, apply double entry recording and prepare basic financial statements
  2. analyse and interpret financial statements and explain their use for decision making
  3. prepare and interpret information (financial and non-financial) for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  4. describe basic finance concepts and apply financial mathematics to investment decisions
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with introductory accounting and finance principles and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFC1000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Gerrand

Contact hours

3.5 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFC1021, AFC1022, AFF1000, AFF1110, AFG1000, AFP1000, AFW1000, AFW1001


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit will provide a conceptual framework for accounting; the definition and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, equity, income and expenses (including leases, inventory valuation, non-current assets, depreciation and impairment); the form and content of financial reports for partnerships and companies; and evaluate alternative measurement systems (historical cost, modified historical cost and fair value accounting).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. account for recording and reporting of inventory applying the periodic and perpetual method as per issues raised in AASB 102. Prepare and complete balance day adjustments, closing entries and internal control systems to allow all final statements and bank reconciliations to be complete
  2. apply the principles of double entry accounting to the reconstruction of accounts
  3. demonstrate how the regulatory environment affects accounting statements in the context of a range of organisational forms
  4. apply the definition and recognition criteria for elements of financial statements as per the framework and specific international financial reporting standards
  5. consider accounting and accountability issues that arise from different measurement methods
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC1030.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination: 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Gerrand

Contact hours

3.5 hours per week

Prerequisites

One of AFC1000, AFC1021 or AFC1022

Prohibitions

AFF1121, AFG1002, AFW1002


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The unit provides a broad overview of the functioning of a developed financial system. Coverage includes retail and wholesale payments systems; the roles of deposit-taking institutions; insurance corporations and funds management within the financial system; and their sources and application of funds. The role and function of the main financial markets including the money market, bond market, share market, foreign exchange market and derivatives market. The role and responsibilities of the central bank and prudential supervisor.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the institutions, instruments and markets that comprise a developed financial system
  2. apply the concepts and techniques used by financial professionals in the debt, equity, foreign exchange and derivative markets
  3. define the specialist terms and language of finance
  4. apply the knowledge of financial mathematics to the pricing and valuation of equity, debt and derivative instruments
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with introductory finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC2000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Minh Do

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFC1100, AFC2100, AFF1300, AFG1300, AFW1300


8 points, SCA Band 3, 0.1666667 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

Over the 12 week period of full-time employment, students will be required to complete one or more specified projects. The projects will be determined by the course co-ordinator in consultation with the sponsor and the student undergoing the industry-based learning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  • work effectively and efficiently, both as an individual and as a team member, in a business
  • apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills through a project report.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Contact hours

12 weeks full-time employment

Prerequisites

Enrolment in Bachelor of Accounting and completion of first year

Co-requisites

Must be enrolled in Bachelor of Accounting


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The unit deals with accounting problems associated with the creation and operation of corporate structures. Topics include financial reporting requirements including an analysis of significant accounting standards; financing company operations; the nature of company groups; the preparation of consolidated financial reports; equity accounting; accounting for interests in joint ventures and liquidation of companies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare group financial reports
  2. demonstrate accounting knowledge in areas such as business combinations, consolidations, equity accounting, joint arrangements, accounting for income tax, cash flow statements and liquidation of companies
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC2120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Kimball Wyatt

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFC1000 and AFC1030 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF2491, AFG2491, AFW2491


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This is the introductory management accounting unit that focuses on the types of cost information that can be produced to assist managers and other employees within organisations in planning and control, and in decision making. The topics include the following: costs and cost behaviour, product costing (including activity-based costing), cost allocation techniques, cost-volume-profit analysis, and the use of cost information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe cost behaviour under different assumptions
  2. compare systems designed to provide relevant and timely information to managers for resource management and allocation decisions
  3. apply conventional and contemporary cost management techniques used in manufacturing and service industries
  4. explain the benefits and limitations of contemporary cost management techniques
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with cost information for decision making and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC2131.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Susan O'Leary

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC1030

Prohibitions

AFC2130, AFF2391, AFG2020, AFW2020


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The impact of financing and investment decisions on business enterprises, with particular focus on public companies. Topics include the goals of the firm and investors, investment evaluation models, valuation of equity and debt instruments, fixed interest securities, sources and types of available finance, issues in risk and return, portfolio theory, asset pricing models, issues in capital structure and dividend policy, and the efficiency of capital markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate investment options and value equity and debt instruments
  2. explain portfolio theory and show how the theory can be extended to price risky assets
  3. estimate the appropriate cost of capital for investment appraisal purposes
  4. analyse issues determining capital structure and dividend policy
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC2140.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hue Hwa Au Yong

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFF2631, AFG2631, AFW2631, AFW3044


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include asset classes and returns, the Australian managed funds industry, superannuation, portfolio theory, asset pricing models and market efficiency, behavioural finance, security valuation techniques, portfolio performance evaluations and the CFA Institute code of ethics and standards of professional conduct.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and select investments from various asset classes with particular emphasis on equities
  2. examine the nature of different asset classes, the ways in which professional managers incorporate and manage asset classes into balanced or specialist funds
  3. describe skills and techniques used by professionals who are involved in investments, funds management, financial planning, superannuation, and wealth creation
  4. understand the importance of professional investment in wealth creation
  5. understand the importance of ethical practices by investment professionals and the CFA Institute code of ethics and standards of professional conduct
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with equities and investment analysis and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC2240.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination: 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Manapon Limkriangkrai

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: AFC2140, AFC1100 (pre 2009) and AFC2100 (pre 2009) before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics covered in this unit include: an introduction to mathematics of finance, rates of interest, rates of discount, present and accumulated value of cash flows under fixed and variable rates of interest, equation of value, applications to debt and retirement income stream markets, in particular the Australian annuity, short-term money market and capital markets; factors affecting accumulation under the Superannuation Guarantee Scheme; economic factors affecting the yield curve, zero coupon bonds, zero coupon bond yield curve, pricing bonds, bond yields, callable bonds, effect of tax on yield, annuity bonds, hybrids, CGB futures and options on futures, interest rate risk management by immunisation, stochastic models for cash flows and stochastic rates of interest, calculation of moments of present values and accumulations, arbitrage-free asset pricing, hedging, optimal conversion of lump sum to a retirement income stream.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe conventions used in short term money and capital markets, and explain the implications for pricing of products in these markets
  2. apply quantitative skills required for pricing and risk management associated with money, capital and retirement income stream markets
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with debt markets and fixed income securities and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC2340.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination: 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrew Sanford

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2000, AFC1100 (pre 2009) or AFC2100 (pre 2009)


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is two-fold. First, the unit provides students with a broad introduction to accounting information systems and the role technology plays in accounting. The focus will be on an introduction to: enterprise systems; database
management; documentation methods; internal controls; and the core business processes found in organisations. Second, the unit focuses on corporate modelling theory; models as decision support tools; types and uses of models; benefits and limitations of models; effective spreadsheet design; auditing spreadsheet models and development of various models using an industry standard spreadsheet.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of accounting information systems in analysing and providing decision support to managers
  2. explain the design of accounting information systems and financial models
  3. develop financial models to assist in decision making
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with accounting information systems and financial modelling and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC2851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kristian Rotaru

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: AFC1000, AFC1021, AFC1022 or AFP1000

Prohibitions

AFF2851, AFG2851, AFP2851, AFW2851, BUS1060, BUS3030


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Over the 14 week period of full-time employment, students will be required to complete one or more specified projects. The projects will be determined by the course coordinator in consultation with the sponsor and the student undergoing the industry-based learning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. perform business tasks effectively and efficiently, both as an individual and as a team member
  2. apply technical and theoretical knowledge and skills to business tasks
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the nuances and practicalities of working within an organisation
  4. communicate perceptively and effectively with subordinates, peers and superiors
  5. apply critical thinking and compose a set of high quality reports for submission to management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in the Bachelor of Accounting and selected students enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce, who have completed 48 credit points, including AFC1030.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The topics covered include the regulatory framework governing financial accounting; a conceptual framework for financial accounting; the form and content of financial statements; off-balance sheet financing including leases; modified historical cost and other measurement bases including consideration of the measurement of employee benefits, financial instruments, extractive industries and foreign currency translation; accounting for corporate social responsibilities.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the institutional framework for the regulation of financial reporting nationally and globally
  2. apply Accounting Standards and the Framework in the preparation and presentation of financial statements
  3. examine from a conceptual and practical dimension some of the more complex financial accounting issues including leasing, intangibles and financial instruments, extractive industries and foreign currency translation (this includes using the Framework and Accounting Standards to arrive at alternative solutions to a range of controversial issues in financial reporting)
  4. apply critical thinking and problem solving skills to individual activities dealing with advanced financial accounting and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Patty McNicholas

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2120

Prohibitions

AFF3491, AFG3040, AFG3050, AFW3040, AFW3050


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The unit aims to provide an in-depth understanding of how performance management systems can be designed to support the strategy of an organisation. It also covers the provision and use of management accounting information for strategy implementation, management planning, and control in organisations. Issues related to the design, implementation and use of contemporary performance management systems and techniques are covered, as are behavioural aspects of management accounting systems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply traditional and contemporary performance measurement and control techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organizational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement and control systems
  3. explain how behavioural implications are crucial for the effective design of performance measurement and control systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with performance measurement and control and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of topics covered by AFC3131.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Ahmad Sujan

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2131

Prohibitions

AFC2130, AFF3431, AFG3021, AFW3021


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit extends studies in financial economics introduced in AFC2140. Topics include risk management, asset pricing, leasing, real options, capital structure, mergers, acquisitions and takeovers, corporate management and equity financing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate investment and financing decisions;
  2. apply analytical techniques to a variety of problems in domestic corporate financial management
  3. describe the institutional environment in which financial decisions are made including identifying the sources of financial risk and their relevance in financial management
  4. critically evaluate finance theories, concepts, assumptions, limitations and arguments
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3140.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 25%
Examination: 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abey Gunasekarage (First Semester)
Dr Philip Gharghori (Second Semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2140


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The provision and use of management accounting information for strategy implementation, management planning, and control in organisations. The unit aims to provide an in-depth understanding of how performance management systems can be designed to support the strategy of an organisation. Issues related to the design, implementation and use of contemporary performance management systems and techniques are covered, as are behavioural aspects of management accounting systems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. illustrate how management accounting systems can be designed to support strategy
  2. apply management accounting techniques to strategic business decisions
  3. critically assess strategic management accounting concepts and techniques
  4. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of strategic management accounting systems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with strategic management accounting issues and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3141.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Aldonio Ferreira

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2130 or AFC2131

Prohibitions

AFC3130, AFF3511


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include an overview of the audit function and assurance framework, and of different types of audit and assurance service; duties of the external auditor; the auditor's liability to third parties; detection and reporting of fraud; the audit process and techniques including planning, business risk assessment, tests of controls, substantive testing, reviewing internal control, gathering audit evidence, using analytical procedures, and audit sampling; the audit of computer information systems; audit reporting; internal auditing; performance auditing; and emerging issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society including the auditor's professional, ethical and legal obligations
  2. explain the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  3. describe the assurance framework, planning process and evidence gathering procedures used by auditors to form an audit opinion
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3160.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Poonam Bir

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2120

Prohibitions

AFF3631, AFG3041, AFW3041


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Major issues involved in the financial management of banks and other deposit-taking financial institutions. Topics include the role and activities of depository financial institutions, performance measurement and evaluation; asset/liability management for liquidity risk, credit risk, interest rate risk; and regulation of depository institutions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. distinguish the various sources of commercial and retail debt financing, and analyse how the current Australian banking system provides access to such funds
  2. identify, in the financial statements of financial institutions, the indicators of financial institutions' performance
  3. describe the regulatory constraints under which Australian authorised deposit-taking institutions operate
  4. describe appropriate procedures for appraising the credit risks inherent in bank loans, and for measuring and managing other key risks in banking such as interest rate risk
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with the management of financial intermediaries and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3170.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kym Brown

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2140

Prohibitions

AFF2401, AFW2401


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics covered include analysis of published financial statements, application and use of financial ratios and forecasting techniques; cash flow-based share valuation, including discounted cash flow and free cash flow approaches to valuation; accounting-based share valuation including earnings multiples, residual income valuation models and economic value added; credit analysis and financial distress prediction, equity security analysis and mergers and takeovers, based on Australian and international case studies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. access and extract financial information from published financial reports and databases
  2. calculate and interpret relevant financial ratios concerned with the profitability, financial structure and solvency of listed public companies
  3. apply and critically assess approaches to valuation including discounted cash flow and residual income methods
  4. apply valuation methods to contexts such as security valuation, mergers and acquisitions and credit analysis
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial analysis and valuation and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3230.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mukesh Garg

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2140


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include the international financial system, institutions and market practices; international finance theorems and their application; Euromarkets; international debt and equity raising; measurement of foreign exchange risk; managing foreign exchange exposure; foreign currency futures, options and swaps, international portfolio investment and capital budgeting and international trade finance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the nature and benefits of globalisation and international markets integration
  2. critically evaluate fundamental theories which underpin international finance;
  3. identify the implications of these theories when firms are engaged in international operations
  4. analyse the role and functioning of international financial markets
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with international finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3240.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination: 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Elaine Hutson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2140

Prohibitions

AFW2341


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include institutional aspects of how financial derivatives markets operate, use of and factors affecting the price of options in equity, currency and interest rate markets, the pricing of and uses of futures, forward contracts and swaps, new financial derivative instruments in Australia.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the characteristics of options, futures, and other derivatives
  2. identify factors that affect option prices
  3. apply option pricing models
  4. explain the operation of futures markets and the link between spot and futures prices
  5. analyse swaps, FRAs, caps, floors and collars in terms of their basic components for pricing purposes
  6. demonstrate how the derivatives can be used for risk management, speculation and arbitrage
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with derivative instruments and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3340.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination: 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Binh Do

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2140

Prohibitions

AFF3751


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics covered include superannuation economics and demographics, industry structure and regulation, products available from fund managers, life offices and superannuation trusts, actuarial mathematics, the mortality table, factors affecting selection, endowments, assurances, single, joint and longest life annuities, application to comparative evaluation of commercial retirement products, financial planners and the financial planning function, accreditation, responsibilities and duties, determination of client objectives and risk profiles, and strategies for superannuation and social security.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe financial planning activities, and legal compliance requirements for financial planners
  2. demonstrate specialist skills required for interaction with financial planning clients
  3. demonstrate generic knowledge of the Australian and global investment environments, together with specialist knowledge in the areas of superannuation, financial planning, securities and managed investments
  4. prepare financial plans for clients with different financial objectives
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with pension and financial planning and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFC3440.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Roger Gay

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2240

Prohibitions

AFF3111


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include the development and application of financial spreadsheets, Excel and Visual Basic programming in financial modelling, modelling company financial statements, fixed income securities analysis, asset allocation and portfolio analysis, optimization using Solver, technical analysis of financial markets, Interest rate models, option pricing models, numerical methods and risk management models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply knowledge and skills in the use of Excel and Visual Basic
  2. develop skills in the design and implementation of efficient and robust financial models such as option pricing, portfolio and interest rate models
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced modelling in finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFC3540.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Lajbcygier

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

One of the following units: AFC2140, AFC2240, AFC2340


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedClayton Summer semester A 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Over the 12 week period of full-time employment, students will be required to complete one or more specified projects. The projects will be determined by the course coordinator in consultation with the sponsor and the student undergoing the industry-based learning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. perform business tasks effectively and efficiently, both as an individual and as a team member
  2. apply technical and theoretical knowledge and skills to business tasks
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the nuances and practicalities of working within an organisation
  4. communicate perceptively and effectively with subordinates, peers and superiors
  5. apply critical thinking and compose a set of high quality reports for submission to management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in the Bachelor of Accounting and selected students enrolled in the Bachelor of Commerce, who have completed 72 credit points, including AFC2120.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to basic concepts in accounting and finance and the application of these concepts for decision-making by a wide range of potential users (e.g., shareholders, investment analysts, lenders, managers etc.). This unit should benefit students who wish to specialise in accounting and finance, and will also be of value to students whose primary interest lies elsewhere in the field of business. On completion, students should have a clear understanding of the accounting process and the language of accounting to enable communication with an accounting professional, understand the relevance of accounting information for informed decision-making by a wide range of potential users, and have the ability to analyse and interpret accounting information.

Topics covered include the accounting equation, general purpose financial statements, cash and accrual accounting, balance day adjustments, financial statement analysis, interpreting information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control, and an introduction to finance, financial mathematics and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  • describe the elements of financial statements, apply double entry recording and prepare basic financial statements
  • analyse and interpret financial statements and explain their use for decision making
  • prepare and interpret information (financial and non-financial) for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  • describe basic finance concepts and apply financial mathematics to investment decisions
  • apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with introductory accounting and finance principles and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFF1000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Ellinor Allen

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFC1000, AFC1021, AFC1022, AFF1110, AFG1000, AFP1000, AFW1000, AFW1001


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is concerned with developing a conceptual and practical accounting framework for financial reporting through the process of collecting, analysing, classifying, measuring, recording, presenting and interpreting financial information and developing financial reports for service and trading entities from both a manual and a computer-based system.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and discuss generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP), measurement systems and the accounting conceptual framework
  2. describe and apply definitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, equities, expenses and income as specified in the conceptual framework
  3. prepare financial statements for accounting entities including service and retail organisations using generally accepted accounting principles
  4. apply principles of selected accounting standards
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and procedures to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting, and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF1121.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Eric Lee

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF1000, AFF1110 or AFP1000

Prohibitions

AFC1030, AFG1002, AFW1002


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should demonstrate an understanding of a financial system, its operation and component parts; yield curve analysis, the term structure of interest rates, and exchange rate interaction; sources and types of business finance, short, medium and long term, domestic and overseas, and associate pricing formulae; the structure and operation of Australian financial institutions and markets; the major types of risk and the derivative products available to manage financial risk; the structure, functions and role of prudential supervision in the financial markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the structure and operation of financial institutions and markets in Australia;
  2. evaluate short and medium to longer term financial instruments
  3. explain government monetary policy and the term structure of interest rates
  4. describe the derivative products available to manage financial risk
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with money and capital markets and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF1300.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Piyadasa Edirisuriya (First Semester)
Dr Huu Dong (Second Semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFC2000, AFC1100 (pre 2009), AFC2100 (pre 2009), AFG1300, AFW1300


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This is the introductory management accounting unit that focuses on the types of cost information that can be produced to assist managers and other employees within organisations in planning and control, and in decision making. The topics include the following: costs and cost behaviour, product costing (including activity-based costing), cost allocation techniques, cost-volume-profit analysis, and the use of cost information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe cost behaviour under different assumptions
  2. compare systems designed to provide relevant and timely information to managers for resource management and allocation decisions
  3. apply conventional and contemporary cost management techniques used in manufacturing and service industries
  4. explain the benefits and limitations of contemporary cost management techniques
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with cost information for decision making and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF2391.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Greg Van Mourik

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF1121

Prohibitions

AFC2130, AFC2131, AFG2020, AFW2020


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

An overview of commercial banking and an introduction to the concepts and issues involved in the decision-making processes of bank management. Topics include the commercial banking environment; banking risks and capital adequacy; liquidity management; lending principles and policies; investment management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the main risks faced by banks and assess alternative approaches to measurement and management of these risks
  2. assess different aspects of bank performance
  3. explain the prudential framework under which Australian banks operate
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with commercial banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF2401.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kym Brown (First Semester)
Dr Abu Zafar Shahria (Second Semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF1300

Co-requisites

Only students in course code 0391 can undertake this unit in DE mode

Prohibitions

AFC3170, AFW2401


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The current Australian reporting and regulatory framework applicable to reporting entities including an analysis of significant accounting standards, professional reporting requirements and legal and stock exchange requirements. Accounting for corporate groups and issues in financial reporting are also explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the content of the reports of publicly listed companies, and regulations of the various regulatory bodies
  2. critically examine current issues and disclosure requirements in financial reporting
  3. prepare financial reports for single and consolidated entities
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with company reporting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF2491.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Janto Haman

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFF1000 and AFF1121 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

AFC2120, AFG2491, AFW2491


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Time value of money, theory of valuation, capital budgeting, portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model, dividend policy, capital structure and the efficient market hypothesis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the concept of the time value of money and other project evaluation techniques
  2. explain and apply portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model
  3. measure a firm's cost of capital
  4. describe dividend policy and its relevance to the value of a firm
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF2631.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr John Watson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF1000, AFF1110 (pre 2009) or AFP1000

Prohibitions

AFC2140, AFG2631, AFP2631, AFW2631, AFW3044


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

An overview of the role of equity markets. Topics cover types of equity instruments; the role of equity finance and the stockbroker; trading conventions and listing requirements of the ASX; the structure and operation of major overseas stock exchanges; an introduction to market micro structure theory; the enterprise market; other markets of the ASX; current issues related to Australia's equity markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the importance of the equity market for the economy and for a corporation
  2. apply different equity valuation techniques
  3. appraise the efficient market hypothesis and evidence of anomalies
  4. undertake a trading simulation exercise and complete a stock report
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with dealing with equity markets and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF2701.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Cameron Truong

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF1300, ETX1100


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is two-fold. First, the unit provides students with a broad introduction to accounting information systems and the role technology plays in accounting. The focus will be on an introduction to: enterprise systems; database management; documentation methods; internal controls; and the core business processes found in organisations. Second, the unit focuses on corporate modelling theory; models as decision support tools; types and uses of models; benefits and limitations of models; effective spreadsheet design; auditing spreadsheet models and development of various models using an industry standard spreadsheet.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of accounting information systems in analysing and providing decision support to managers
  2. explain the design of accounting information systems and financial models
  3. develop financial models to assist in decision making
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF2851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ian Beaman

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF1000, AFP1000 or AFF1110 (pre 2009)

Prohibitions

AFC2160, AFC2851, AFF2051, AFW2051, AFG2851, AFP2851, AFW2851, BUS1060, BUS3030


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

Physical risk includes diverse threats such as accidents, projects not achieving their objectives and sabotage. The unit describes these risks, the large role they play in business and society and how they can be assessed and controlled. The methods of defining systems that are subject to physical risks and identifying the various sequences of events which might lead to undesirable consequences are described. Physical risk treatment is achieved by reducing the frequency of initiating events, developing reliable means of protection and mitigating the consequences. The mathematical methods of determining the frequency of various event sequences and their consequences are introduced.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define physical risk and its treatment
  2. explain the risk treatment requirements needed by business
  3. compare and contrast the risk management process with existing approaches to governance, compliance and control
  4. demonstrate the mathematical methods for determining the frequency of various event sequences and their consequences
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with physical risk treatment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Enrolment in the Bachelor of Business (Risk Management)

Prohibitions

IND2903


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Andrew Child

Quota applies

Enrolment restriction quota of 60 students in Summer A 2011.

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to financial planning. Coverage includes: the legislative and economic environment; the role of financial service advisers; licensing and disclosure; investment strategies, products, and related taxation implications, with particular reference to securities and managed investments; social security; superannuation, pensions and other retirement issues; estate planning; and the financial planning process. This unit meets Australian Securities and Investments Commission registration requirements for Tier 1 in respect of: specific knowledge in financial planning, securities, managed investments and superannuation; generic knowledge; and skills.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe financial planning activities and legal compliance requirements for financial planners
  2. demonstrate specialist skills required for interaction with financial planning clients
  3. demonstrate generic knowledge of the Australian and global investment environments, together with specialist knowledge in the areas of superannuation, financial planning, securities and managed investments
  4. prepare financial plans for clients with different financial objectives
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with personal financial planning and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3111.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Madhu Veeraraghavan

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFC2140 or AFF2631before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3440


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the conceptual foundations of modern portfolio theory, using pricing models and other techniques in the valuation of securities; appreciate the effect of market efficiency on the valuation process; measure portfolio risk and determine performance benchmarks; and be able to take an applied perspective on investment management and analysis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate financial market information to measure risk and return
  2. describe modern portfolio theory
  3. apply asset pricing models and valuation techniques to the valuation of assets
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with investments and portfolio management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3121.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jayasinghe Wickramanayake

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: AFF2631, AFG2631, AFW2631 or AFW3044 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFW3046, AFW3121, AFG3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Quota applies

Enrolment restriction quota of 90 students in Semester 1 and 132 in Semester 2, 2012.

Synopsis

This unit will combine classroom teaching and direct observance experience of the money markets covering background to the money markets, participants, interest rate and exchange rate determination, instruments traded in the money and currency markets, strategies and money and currency market trading operations. The simulated treasury dealing room will be used extensively in this course.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse dealing practices and conventions in the foreign exchange and cash markets
  2. co-ordinate the front office and back office functions of a simulated bank's treasury dealing room
  3. account and settle transactions completed in the treasury dealing room
  4. develop, implement, analyse and manage dealing strategies in the treasury dealing room
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with money market operations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Kevin Tant (First Semester)
Dr Viet Cao (Second Semester)

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students should have passed AFF2401 or equivalent before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The international monetary system, the international parity conditions, the foreign exchange market, international financing strategies and techniques, the Euromarkets, and multinational banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the parity principles and the concept of arbitrage in international financial markets
  2. explain how currency derivative contracts such as forwards, futures, options and swaps can be used to hedge in the foreign exchange markets
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with international banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3331.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mohammad Hoque (First Semester)
Dr Abu Zafar Shahria (Second Semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2401 or AFW2401

Prohibitions

AFW3331, AFX3871


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit will examine the development of investment/merchant banking in Australia and overseas; specialised financial services in project finance, structured finance and infrastructure finance; venture capital; initial public offering activities; financial advisory work including mergers and acquisitions; investment funds management activities; privatisation and corporatisation; and future directions of investment banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key operations of investment banks
  2. apply valuation models to companies
  3. explain regulations related to equity issues, mergers and acquisitions and share buybacks
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with investment banking.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Philip Gray

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2401 and AFF2631


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the provision and use of management accounting information for management planning and control in organisations. Topics include budgeting, standard costing and variance analysis and contemporary approaches to managing costs, time, quality, suppliers, customers, and value.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply traditional and contemporary performance measurement and control techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement and control systems
  3. explain how behavioural implications are crucial for the effective design of performance measurement and control systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with performance measurement and control and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3431.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Joanne Lye

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2391

Prohibitions

AFC3131, AFG3021, AFW3021


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The unit is a blend of advanced and controversial practical accounting issues and underlying theories that support prescribed accounting treatments of these issues. Attention is concentrated on the interaction between the accounting profession and relevant segments of the society, including industry, capital markets, government and other user groups.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically assess standard setting procedures and the theories of regulation
  2. discuss theories to explain accounting policy choices and the relevance of accounting numbers to capital markets
  3. explain the definition and recognition criteria for elements of financial reports and issues associated with their application
  4. examine contemporary financial accounting issues including financial instruments and intangibles
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced reporting issues and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3491.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dot Cochrane (First Semester)
Ms Lorena Mitrione (Second Semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2491

Prohibitions

AFC3120, AFG3040, AFG3050, AFW3040, AFW3050


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Concepts and techniques of business strategy formulation, and how management accounting information systems act as a corporate control system providing information for strategic decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. illustrate how management accounting systems can be designed to support strategy
  2. apply management accounting techniques to strategic business decisions
  3. critically assess strategic management accounting concepts and techniques
  4. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of strategic management accounting systems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with strategic management accounting issues and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3511.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Carly Moulang

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2391

Prohibitions

AFC3141


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Nature and objectives of auditing, auditing standards, auditors' responsibilities, professional ethics and auditor independence, audit objectives, planning the audit, analytical review procedures, understanding the internal control structure and assessing control risk and detection risk, preliminary audit strategies and design of substantive tests, auditing in a CIS environment, auditing the transaction cycles and performing substantive procedures, completing the audit and post audit responsibilities, audit reporting, other reports and services.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society including the auditor's professional, ethical and legal obligations
  2. explain the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  3. describe the assurance framework, planning process and evidence gathering procedures used by auditors to form an audit opinion
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3631.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination: 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robyn Moroney (First Semester)
Ms Christine Contessotto (Second Semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2491

Prohibitions

AFC3160, AFG3041, AFW3041


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The role of treasury, coordination and management of the treasury operation, quantitative and qualitative risk analysis, risk management process and hedging techniques, role and mechanics of derivative products, performance measurement and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role of treasury operations in an international or a local bank
  2. describe how risk management processes work
  3. demonstrate the application of hedging techniques used in banks' treasury operations
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with treasury management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3651.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tram Vu

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2401 or AFW2401

Prohibitions

AFW3651


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit examines the institutional features of futures and options markets, the use of futures, options and other derivatives in arbitraging, trading and hedging, and pricing of these instruments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the operations of derivative markets
  2. explain the use of the options and futures markets for hedging and trading purposes
  3. implement trading strategies and measure positions
  4. demonstrate how to price and value standard futures and option contracts
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with futures and options markets and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3751.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Binh Do

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2401

Prohibitions

AFC3340


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Lending environment; decision making and organisation of lending, lending policies and controls; behavioural aspects of decision making and decision makers; retail, commercial and corporate lending; business expansions; off balance sheet lending; loan management and problem loans.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the major types of lending products and match these products to customer needs
  2. analyse the risk return characteristics and pricing of a loan application
  3. discuss the behavioural aspects associated with lending decisions
  4. apply statistical techniques used in decision making at the approval, monitoring and termination stages of lending
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with lending decisions and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3841.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Jean Fenech

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

One of AFF2401 or AFW2401

Prohibitions

AFW3841


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

Topics covered include contemporary issues in, and the technologies of, integrated information systems for business enterprises; accounting processes and process oriented business information systems; databases for accounting information systems including database theory, design and development where students will develop and implement a practical accounting database design; design and development of sophisticated financial management models using business analytics and the advanced features of a modern spreadsheet package.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the relationship between accounting information systems and processes and enterprise systems
  2. apply database management concepts in the context of accounting systems
  3. use database and spreadsheet modelling software to produce, store and analyse information for business decision making
  4. analyse, communicate, and apply the model-building and model-solving concepts of management science in the context of accounting systems
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFF3851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Stephen Smith

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: AFC2851, AFF2051, AFF2851, AFG2851, AFW2051 or AFW2851 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF3051


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Abdel Halabi

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to basic concepts in accounting and finance and the application of these concepts for decision-making by a wide range of potential users (e.g. shareholders, investment analysts, lenders, managers, etc.). This unit should benefit students who wish to specialise in accounting and finance, and will also be of value to students whose primary interest lies elsewhere in the field of business. On completion, students should have a clear understanding of the accounting process and the language of accounting to enable communication with an accounting professional, understand the relevance of accounting information for informed decision-making by a wide range of potential users, and have the ability to analyse and interpret accounting information.

Topics covered include the accounting equation, general purpose financial statements, cash and accrual accounting, balance day adjustments, financial decision making and control, and an introduction to finance, financial mathematics and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the elements of financial statements, apply double entry recording and prepare basic financial statements
  2. analyse and interpret financial statements and explain their use for decision making
  3. prepare and interpret information (financial and non-financial) for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  4. describe basic finance concepts and apply financial mathematics to investment decisions
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with introductory accounting and finance principles and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFG1000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Lambourn (Semester one)
Dr Abdel Halabi (Semester two)

Prohibitions

AFC1000, AFC1021, AFC1022, AFF1000, AFF1110, AFW1001, AFW1000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

This unit will cover various aspects of financial accounting. A deeper understanding of accounting processes to cover adjusting entries and reconstructions will be presented. Issues relating to financial statement elements will be investigated with reference to both historical cost and fair value accounting. Accounting procedures for partnerships and companies will also be considered.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. Account for the recording and reporting of inventory applying the periodic and perpetual method as per issues raised in AASB 102/IAS 102. Prepare and complete balance day adjustments, closing entries and internal control systems to allow all final statements and bank reconciliations to be completed.
  2. Apply the principles of double entry accounting to the reconstruction of accounts
  3. Demonstrate how the regulatory environment affects accounting statements in the context of a range of organizational forms.
  4. Apply the definition and recognition criteria for elements of the financial statements as per the Framework and specific international financial reporting standards. Consider accounting and accountability issues that arise from different measurement methods.
  5. Apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Les Hardy

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW1000 or AFW1001 (pre 2009) or AFG1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC1030, AFF1121, AFW1002


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

Topics include overview of business environment, accounting reports, capital investment analysis, financial decisions, sources of finance, management of working capital, tools of financial analysis, budgeting and performance measure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare basic financial reports for a small to medium size business
  2. analyse, communicate and present arguments based on accounting information
  3. critically assess the performance of a business through performance evaluation and cost volume profit analysis
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Prohibitions

AFW1004. Not available to Bachelor of Business and Commerce students.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Sisira Colombage

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should demonstrate an understanding of a financial system, its operation and component parts; yield curve analysis, the term structure of interest rates, and exchange rate interaction sources and types of business finance, short, medium and long term, domestic and overseas, and associate pricing formulae; the structure and operation of Australian financial institutions and markets; the major types of risk and the derivative products available to manage financial risk, the structure, functions and role of prudential supervision in the financial markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the structure and operation of financial institutions and markets in Australia
  2. evaluate short and medium to longer term financial instruments
  3. explain government monetary policy and the term structure of interest rates
  4. describe the derivative products available to manage financial risk
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with money and capital markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Prohibitions

AFC2000, AFC1100 (pre 2009), AFC2100 (pre 2009), AFF1300, AFW1300


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

Introduction to management accounting. Topics include: basic terms and concepts, classification and behaviour of costs, recording product cost transactions for manufacturing firms, joint and by-product spoilage and waste, apportioning joint costs for multiple products, activity-based costing and information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain how costing systems and cost behaviour patterns provide information to support operational and strategic decisions.
  2. compare job, process and hybrid costing methods as alternative approaches to support management decisions.
  3. examine the differences between conventional and contemporary approaches to overhead allocation.
  4. Analyse short-run tactical decisions using appropriate costing techniques.
  5. develop capabilities to work effectively in a group; and/or demonstrate effective individual research skills to produce professional quality reports to solve organisational related problems; and/or deliver a professional quality presentation; and/or develop oral communication skills and demonstrate independent thinking through contributions to class discussions; and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFG2020.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Andrew West (Semester one)
Dr Abdel Halabi (Semester two)

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW1002 or AFG1002 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2131, AFF2391, AFW2020


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Janet Jackson

Synopsis

The current Australian reporting and regulatory framework applicable to reporting entities including an analysis of significant accounting standards, professional reporting requirements and legal and stock exchange requirements. Accounting for corporate groups and issues in financial reporting are also explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the nature and regulation of companies in Australia
  2. apply accounting standards and the framework in the preparation and presentation of financial statements for both single and consolidated entities
  3. demonstrate accounting knowledge in areas such as company operations, taxation, property, plant and equipment (acquisition and impairment), and group accounting
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with company reporting and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFG2491.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Kevin Sharp

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW1000 and AFW1002 or AFG1000 and AFG1002 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2120, AFF2491, AFW2491


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Sisira Colombage

Synopsis

Time value of money, Theory of valuation, capital budgeting, portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model, efficient market theory, cost of capital, capital structure and dividend policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the concept of the time value of money and other project evaluation techniques
  2. explain and apply portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model
  3. measure a firm's cost of capital
  4. describe dividend policy and its relevance to the value of a firm
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sisira Colombage

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW1000, AFW1001 (pre 2009) or AFG1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2140, AFF2631, AFW3044, AFW2631


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is two-fold. First, the unit provides students with a broad introduction to accounting information systems and the role technology plays in accounting. The focus will be on an introduction to: enterprise systems; database management; documentation methods; internal controls; and the core business processes found in organisations. Second, the unit focuses on corporate modelling theory; models as decision support tools; types and uses of models; benefits and limitations of models; effective spreadsheet design; auditing spreadsheet models and development of various models using an industry standard spreadsheet.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of accounting information systems in analysing and providing decision support to managers
  2. explain the design of accounting information systems and financial models
  3. develop financial models to assist in decision making
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFG2851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW1000, AFW1001 (pre 2009) or AFG1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2160, AFC2851, AFF2051, AFF2851, AFW2051, BUS1060, BUS3030, AFW2851


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

Topics include the budget planning process including master budget preparation, budgeting standard costs and variance analysis, responsibility accounting, management by objectives and non-financial performance measurement, divisional performance, transfer pricing issues, program budgeting and other approaches, capital budgeting, strategic planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply traditional and contemporary performance measurement and control techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement and control systems
  3. explain how behavioural implications are crucial for the effective design of performance measurement and control systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with performance measurement and control and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFG3021.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Andrew West

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW2020 or AFG2020 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3131, AFF3431, AFW3021


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

Topics include the nature of theory and scientific method by considering two basic methods of enquiry: induction and deduction; the emergence of general descriptive and prescriptive accounting theories; the application of measurement theories; the regulation of financial accounting and the development of international accounting as they relate to the conceptual framework; and summarising and identifying the assumptions underlying accounting concepts by critiquing the financial statements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. outline the development of accounting concepts and international accounting
  2. critically review conventional accounting practice
  3. compare and contrast alternative accounting models
  4. understand ethical principles and their application of these principles in the field of business
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with accounting theory.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Les Hardy

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW2491 or AFG2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, AFF3491, AFW3040


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Janet Jackson

Synopsis

Overview of auditing, the auditor's legal liabilities, audit process and evidence, the concepts of materiality and risks, study and evaluation of internal control, EDP auditing, audit sampling techniques, the test of transactions cycles and the verification of account balances, auditors reports, and internal and operational auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society including the auditor's professional, ethical and legal obligations
  2. explain the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  3. describe the assurance framework, planning process and evidence gathering procedures used by auditors to form an audit opinion
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance matters and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFG3041.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW2491 or AFG2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3160, AFF3631, AFW3041


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

Financial accounting topics covered by this unit include: Australian accounting standards, institutional setting and the conceptual framework; accounting for leases; accounting for employee benefits; accounting for financial instruments; cash flow reporting; segment reporting; accounting for EPS; accounting for extractive industries; accounting for agriculture; financial reporting in the public sector; foreign currency translation; and social and environmental reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire advanced knowledge of the conceptual framework and disclosure requirements in accordance with the accounting standards and the statutory laws
  2. develop an improved understanding of how professional policies are formulated in preparation of accounting for various financial accounting issues with particular reference to current practice
  3. develop critical skills in written communication and problem analysis through the completion of comprehensive assignment exercise and /or essays
  4. develop an ability to work independently and to participate in group discussions with participants from diverse backgrounds.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Les Hardy

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW2491 or AFG2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, AFF3491, AFW3050


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Sisira Colombage

Synopsis

On completion of this subject students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the conceptual foundations of modern portfolio theory, using pricing models and other techniques in the valuation of securities; appreciate the effect of market efficiency on the valuation process; measure portfolio risk and determine performance benchmarks; and be able to take an applied perspective on investment management and analysis in the Australian environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate financial market information to measure risk and return
  2. describe modern portfolio theory
  3. apply asset pricing models and valuation techniques to the valuation of assets
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with investments and portfolio management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Abdel Halabi

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW2631,AFG2631, AFG3044 or AFW3044 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

AFF3121, AFW3046, AFW3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to basic concepts in accounting and finance and the application of these concepts for decision-making by a wide range of potential users (e.g. shareholders, investment analysts, lenders, managers, etc). This unit should benefit students who wish to specialise in accounting and finance and will also be of value to students whose primary interest lies elsewhere in the field of business. On completion, students should have a clear understanding of the accounting process and the language of accounting to enable communication with an accounting professional, understand the relevance of accounting information for informed decision-making by a wide range of potential users, and have the ability to analyse and interpret accounting information.

Topics covered include the accounting equation, general purpose financial statements, cash and accrual accounting, balance day adjustments, financial statement analysis, interpreting information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control, and an introduction to finance, financial mathematics and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the elements of financial statements, apply double entry recording and prepare basic financial statements
  2. analyse and interpret financial statements and explain their use for decision making
  3. prepare and interpret information (financial and non-financial) for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  4. describe basic finance concepts and apply financial mathematics to investment decisions
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with introductory accounting and finance principles and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFP1000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Ellinor Allen

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week.

Prohibitions

AFC1000, AFC1021, AFC1022, AFF1000, AFF1110, AFG1000, AFW1000, AFW1001


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

Time value of money, theory of valuation, capital budgeting, portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model, dividend policy, capital structure and the efficient market hypothesis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the concept of the time value of money and other project evaluation techniques
  2. explain and apply portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model
  3. measure a firm's cost of capital
  4. describe dividend policy and its relevance to the value of a firm
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial management and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFP2631.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prerequisites

AFP1000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3806, Bachelor of Business at Peninsula campus to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2140, AFF2631, AFW2631, AFW3044


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Krueger

Synopsis

This unit focuses on how knowledge workers deploy information systems and technology to generate knowledge that creates business value for organisations. These systems provide the information required for operational, tactical, and strategic decision making, and information flows that cross national and inter-organisational borders, and assist organisations with innovative and strategic initiatives and reporting. Topics covered include: the core business processes found in organisations; transaction processing systems; enterprise systems; database management; systems development and documentation methods; internal controls; e-business; and decision support at the individual knowledge worker and organisational level.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of information technology and business systems in analysing and providing decision support to knowledge workers
  2. examine the core business processes common to most businesses
  3. explain the design of business information systems to enable businesses to execute business processes quickly and efficiently
  4. develop examples of business information and decision support systems to assist knowledge workers in management and decision making activities, using an industry standard database and/or spreadsheet
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with business information and systems and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFP2851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Krueger

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prerequisites

AFP1000

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3806, Bachelor of Business at Peninsula campus to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2160, AFC2851, AFF2051, AFF2851, AFW2051, AFW2851, BUS1060, BUS3030


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Sunway Trimester 3 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is an introduction to basic concepts in accounting and finance and the application of these concepts for decision-making by a wide range of potential users (e.g., shareholders, investment analysts, lenders, managers etc.). This unit should benefit students who wish to specialise in accounting and finance, and will also be of value to students whose primary interest lies elsewhere in the field of business. On completion, students should have a clear understanding of the accounting process and the language of accounting to enable communication with an accounting professional, understand the relevance of accounting information for informed decision-making by a wide range of potential users, and have the ability to analyse and interpret accounting information.

Topics covered include the accounting equation, general purpose financial statements, cash and accrual accounting, balance day adjustments, financial statement analysis, interpreting information for managers to use in planning, decision making and control, and an introduction to finance, financial mathematics and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the elements of financial statements, apply double entry recording and prepare basic financial statements
  2. analyse and interpret financial statements and explain their use for decision making
  3. prepare and interpret information (financial and non-financial) for managers to use in planning, decision making and control
  4. describe basic finance concepts and apply financial mathematics to investment decisions
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with introductory accounting and finance principles and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFW1000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Frances Mary J R Penafort

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFC1000, AFC1021, AFC1022, AFF1000, AFF1110, AFG1000, AFP1000, AFW1001


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit will cover various aspects of financial accounting and builds on the principles introduced in AFW1000. Aspects associated with transaction reporting and the preparation of financial statements investigated include: the recording of inventory in a retail context, the use of control accounts, the role of specialised journals, a range of balance day-adjustments, reversing entries and account reconstruction. The unit also focuses on internal control procedures. The definition, recognition and disclosure criteria of financial statement elements are explored as well as the cost and fair value measurement of various financial statement elements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. account for the recording and reporting of inventory applying the periodic and perpetual method as per issues raised in AASB 102/IAS 102. Prepare and complete balance day adjustments, closing entries and internal control systems to allow all final statements and bank reconciliations to be completed
  2. apply the principles of double entry according to the reconstruction of accounts
  3. demonstrate how the regulatory environment affects accounting statements in the context of a range of organizational forms
  4. apply the definition and recognition criteria for elements of financial statements as per the Framework and specific international financial reporting standards. Consider accounting and accountability issues that arise from different measurement methods
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW1002.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Les Hardy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: AFG1000, AFW1000 or AFW1001 (pre 2009) before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC1030, AFF1121, AFG1002


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

Topics include overview of business environment, accounting reports, capital investment analysis, financial decisions, sources of finance, management of working capital, tools of financial analysis, budgeting and performance measure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare basic financial reports for a small to medium size business
  2. analyse, communicate and present arguments based on accounting information
  3. critically assess the performance of a business through performance evaluation and cost volume profit analysis
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial management
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW1004.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Les Hardy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFG1004


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should demonstrate an understanding of a financial system, its operation and component parts; yield curve analysis, the term structure of interest rates, and exchange rate interaction; sources and types of business finance, short, medium and long term, domestic and overseas, and associate pricing formulae; the structure and operation of Australian financial institutions and markets; the major types of risk and the derivative products available to manage financial risk; the structure, functions and role of prudential supervision in the financial markets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the structure and operation of financial institutions and markets in Australia
  2. evaluate short and medium to longer term financial instruments
  3. explain government monetary policy and the term structure of interest rates
  4. describe the derivative products available to manage financial risk
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with money and capital markets and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW1300.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Nicole Lai

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFC2000, AFC1100 (pre 2009), AFC2100 (pre 2009), AFF1300, AFG1300


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics covered include: Shariah and rationale for Islamic banking; history of Islamic banking; deposit, financing and other banking facilities; Islamic financial markets; Islamic finance in selected countries; and contemporary issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the need, structure and operations of Islamic banking and finance
  2. explain the concept of shariah, its sources and applicability to Islamic banking and finance
  3. identify the types of Islamic banking facilities
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with Islamic banking and finance
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW1310.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mohammed Shaiban

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Introduction to management accounting. Topics include: basic terms and concepts, classification and behaviour of costs, recording product cost transactions for manufacturing firms, joint and by-product spoilage and waste, apportioning joint costs for multiple products, activity-based costing and information for management decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe cost behaviour under different assumptions
  2. compare systems designed to provide relevant and timely information to managers for resource management and allocation decisions
  3. apply conventional and contemporary cost management techniques used in manufacturing and service industries
  4. explain the benefits and limitations of contemporary cost management techniques
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with cost information for decision making and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2020.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ruvendra Nandan (Semester one)
Ms Aniza Zainol (Semester two)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG1000 or AFW1002 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2131, AFF2391, AFG2020


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics covered include multinational firms and globalisation; foreign direct investment; political risk; foreign exchange markets; currency derivatives (currency options and forward contracts); measuring and managing transaction exposure; cost of capital and capital structure for multinational firms; fundamentals of capital budgeting; international capital budgeting and exchange rate effects; international cash management; transfer pricing and international tax strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the international financial environment and the importance of foreign exchange risk management
  2. discuss important financial management issues and their application to financial management of multinational firms
  3. discuss foreign exchange market mechanisms and explain how markets can be used to hedge foreign currency transaction exposure
  4. apply capital budgeting techniques in the context of a multinational firm
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual activities dealing with international financial management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2341.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jothee Sinnakkannu

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

AFC3240, AFW3331


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

An overview of commercial banking and an introduction to the concepts and issues involved in the decision-making processes of bank management. Topics include the commercial banking environment; banking risks and capital adequacy; liquidity management; lending principles and policies; investment management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the main risks faced by banks and assess alternative approaches to measurement and management of these risks
  2. assess different aspects of bank performance
  3. explain the prudential framework under which banks operate
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with commercial banking and finance an demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2401.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mohammed Shaiban

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG1300 or AFW1300 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3170, AFF2401


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The current Australian reporting and regulatory framework applicable to reporting entities including an analysis of significant accounting standards, professional reporting requirements and legal and stock exchange requirements. Accounting for corporate groups and issues in financial reporting are also explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the nature and regulation of companies in Australia
  2. apply accounting standards and the framework in the preparation and presentation of financial statements for both single and consolidated entities
  3. demonstrate accounting knowledge in areas such as company operations, taxation, property, plant and equipment (acquisition and impairment), and group accounting
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with company reporting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2491.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lisa Powell

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: AFW1000 or AFG1000 and AFW1002 or AFG1002 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2120, AFF2491, AFG2491


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Time value of money, Theory of valuation, capital budgeting, portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model, efficient market theory, cost of capital, capital structure and dividend policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the concept of the time value of money and other project evaluation techniques
  2. explain and apply portfolio theory and the capital asset pricing model
  3. measure a firm's cost of capital
  4. describe dividend policy and its relevance to the value of a firm
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2631.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination: 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr balachandher

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of following: AFG1000, AFP1000, AFW1000 or AFW1001 (pre 2009) before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2140, AFF2631, AFG2631, AFP2631, AFW3044


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

As an intermediate financial accounting unit, this provides an overview of the accounting environment through an examination of selected topics in accounting considering the underlying theory, the regulatory environment, and applying the requirements of selected IFRS, including an introduction to group accounting, and the accounting for income taxes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and understand the requirements of the financial reporting and regulatory environment, including the internationalization of accounting practices and the underlying theory supporting these changes
  2. discuss the key aspects of the Framework and IAS1 Presentation of Financial Statements and apply its prescriptions
  3. comment on the theoretical aspects of revenue, provisions, changes in accounting policies, events after balance sheet dates, and apply the requirements of these standards to accounting scenarios
  4. explain the role of cash flow statements and prepare cash flow statements following the prescriptions of IAS7 Cash Flow statements
  5. argue and apply the prescriptions contained in the Income Tax standard (IAS 12)
  6. explain and apply elementary principles of group statements and group accounting and prepare a basic group balance sheet and
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2710.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Adrian Pilley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG1002 or AFW1002 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The unit provides a detailed examination of how certain International Accounting Standards are implemented. The relevant standards focus on accounting for corporate assets under different circumstances, as well as on calculating earnings per share and borrowing costs. Students will be exposed to and learn how to prepare accounting records using commercial accounting software in a manner that comply with the standards applicable to this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. determine the key concepts that are relevant for selected topics (see list of relevant accounting standards below) in financial accounting, the need for accounting standards, and the areas of debate and difficulty that apply to the standards regulating the accounting of corporate assets
  2. apply the accounting principles prescribed in international standards to specific problems, at an advanced level, for the accounting of assets in a manual and computerised accounting system in the development of financial statements;
  3. analyse and evaluate how companies apply the standard in their annual financial reporting
  4. calculate borrowing cost and earnings per share and make recommendations on how best to present and apply the resulting information
  5. analyse and describe how companies disclose borrowing cost and earnings per share in their financial statements
  6. practically make use of a commercial accounting software package to enter and process accounting data according to accounting standards and to analyse and interpret the resulting accounting information and
  7. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2720.

Relevant accounting standards in this unit:
  1. Inventories (IAS 2)
  2. Property, Plant & Equipment (IAS 16)
  3. Impairment of assets (IAS 36)
  4. Intangible assets (IAS 38)
  5. Investment Property (IAS 40)
  6. Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations (IFRS 5)
  7. Borrowing costs (IAS 23)

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Adrian Pilley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFW2710

Prohibitions

AFW2042, AFW3004


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

An introduction to auditing covering the responsibilities, functions and qualities of the auditor and some of the statutory matters. It covers a review of the audit process from planning to the completion of the audit and includes the going concern concept; fraud and error; audit evidence; engagement and planning; internal controls and substantive procedures; completion of the audit and special audit investigations. The tests of control and substantive tests performed on the following business cycles are also included: revenue and receipts; acquisitions and payments; inventory and production; payroll and personnel; finance and investment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and describe the general principles of auditing, the responsibilities, functions and qualities of the auditor and illustrate knowledge of a proper background to auditing
  2. explain and describe the audit process from planning to the completion of the audit, assess audit risk and determine materiality
  3. explain and describe all the relevant issues regarding the going concern concept and reliance on other parties, and to apply these on various simulated practical situations/in various audits
  4. identify, describe and examine internal controls in the context of external auditing, and to plan and apply that knowledge in simulated practical situations and to make recommendations in that regard
  5. apply tests of control and substantive testing to the business cycles
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with auditing and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment ask the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFW2760.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Teresa Calvert

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW1002 or equivalent and BTW1201 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFW2041, AFW3941, AFW3942


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

An introduction to the principles of corporate finance. The unit addresses the following fundamental areas of finance: an introduction to corporate finance and financial management; an introduction to working with financial statements; the principles of time value of money and valuation of future cash flows; interest rates and bond valuations, net present value and investment criteria; an introduction to capital budgeting principles and its relationship with the future cash flow valuation and project analysis and evaluation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the purpose of financial management and corporate finance
  2. apply analysis techniques to financial information and interpret the results
  3. explain and apply the principles of time value of money to rank investment projects and value stocks and bonds
  4. explain and apply, at an introductory level, valuation techniques relating to equity instruments
  5. explain and apply techniques in capital investment decisions and
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2780.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Gladman Moyana

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of following: AFG1000, AFW1000 or AFW1001 (pre 2009) before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFW3005


6 points, SCA Band 2, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is two-fold. First, the unit provides students with a broad introduction to accounting information systems and the role technology plays in accounting. The focus will be on an introduction to: enterprise systems; database management; documentation methods; internal controls; and the core business processes found in organisations. Second, the unit focuses on corporate modelling theory; models as decision support tools; types and uses of models; benefits and limitations of models; effective spreadsheet design; auditing spreadsheet models and development of various models using an industry standard spreadsheet.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of accounting information systems in analysing and providing decision support to managers
  2. explain the design of accounting information systems and financial models
  3. develop financial models to assist in decision making
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW2851.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Krueger

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one unit from the following: AFG1000, AFP1000, AFW1000 or AFW1001 (pre 2009) before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC2160, AFC2851, AFF2051, AFF2851, AFG2851, AFP2851, AFW2051, BUS1060, BUS3030


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include the budget planning process including master budget preparation, budgeting standard costs and variance analysis, responsibility accounting, management by objectives and non-financial performance measurement, divisional performance, transfer pricing issues, program budgeting and other approaches, capital budgeting, strategic planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply traditional and contemporary performance measurement and control techniques to enable managers to measure and enhance organisational performance
  2. analyse and make recommendations regarding the design of performance measurement and control systems
  3. explain how behavioural implications are crucial for the effective design of performance measurement and control systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with performance measurement and control and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3021.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Kalaithasan Kuppusamy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG2020 or AFW2020 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3131, AFF3431, AFG3021


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include the nature of theory and scientific method by considering two basic methods of enquiry: induction and deduction; the emergence of general descriptive and prescriptive accounting theories; the application of measurement theories; the regulation of financial accounting and the development of international accounting as they relate to the conceptual framework; and summarising and identifying the assumptions underlying accounting concepts by critiquing the financial statements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. outline the development of accounting concepts and international accounting
  2. critically review conventional accounting practice
  3. compare and contrast alternative accounting models
  4. understand ethical principles and their application of these principles in the field of business
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with accounting theory and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Ananda Samudhram

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG2491 or AFW2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, AFF3491, AFG3040


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Overview of auditing, the auditor's legal liabilities, audit process and evidence, the concepts of materiality and risks, study and evaluation of internal control, EDP auditing, audit sampling techniques, the test of transactions cycles and the verification of account balances, auditors reports, and internal and operational auditing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role, limitations and demand for audits in modern corporate society including the auditor's professional, ethical and legal obligations
  2. explain the auditor's role in corporate governance with particular emphasis on the detection and reporting of fraud and error
  3. describe the assurance framework, planning process and evidence gathering procedures used by auditors to form an audit opinion
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3041.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lisa Powell

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG2491 or AFW2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3160, AFF3631, AFG3041


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

This unit involves completing a research project identifying a specific problem relating to accounting, auditing or finance and suggestions or systems to meet the problem. In identifying the research question students will complete an extensive literature review.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop analytical, communication and project management skills
  2. discuss various research methodologies appropriate to solving research questions
  3. explain the purpose and function of accounting research
  4. critically evaluate underlying theories, concepts, assumptions, limitations and arguments in accounting
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual activities dealing with current accounting issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Permission required


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Financial accounting topics covered by this unit include: Australian accounting standards, institutional setting and the conceptual framework; accounting for leases; accounting for employee benefits; accounting for financial instruments; cash flow reporting; segment reporting; accounting for EPS; accounting for extractive industries; accounting for agriculture; financial reporting in the public sector; foreign currency translation; and social and environmental reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire advanced knowledge of the conceptual framework and disclosure requirements in accordance with the accounting standards and the statutory laws
  2. develop an improved understanding of how professional policies are formulated in preparation of accounting for various financial accounting issues with particular reference to current practice
  3. develop critical skills in written communication and problem analysis through the completion of comprehensive assignment exercise and /or essays
  4. develop an ability to work independently and to participate in group discussions with participants from diverse backgrounds
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mahendra Goyal

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG2491 or AFW2491 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFC3120, AFF3491, AFG3050


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

On completion of this subject students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of the conceptual foundations of modern portfolio theory, using pricing models and other techniques in the valuation of securities; appreciate the effect of market efficiency on the valuation process; measure portfolio risk and determine performance benchmarks; and be able to take an applied perspective on investment management and analysis in the Australian environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate financial market information to measure risk and return
  2. describe modern portfolio theory
  3. apply asset pricing models and valuation techniques to the valuation of assets
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with investments and portfolio management and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3121.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Robert Terpstra

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: AFG2631, AFW2631 or AFW3044 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF3121, AFG3121, AFW3046


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The international monetary system, debt and country risk, the foreign exchange market, international financing strategies and techniques, the Euro-markets, and multinational banking.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the parity principles and the concept of arbitrage in international financial markets
  2. explain how currency derivative contracts such as forwards, futures, options and swaps can be used to hedge in the foreign exchange markets
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation banking and finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3331.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jothee Sinnakkannu

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFF2401 or AFW2401

Prohibitions

AFF3331, AFX3871


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Treasury functions; risk assessment evaluation; strategy formulation and implementation; liquidity and cash management; audit and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role of treasury operations in an international or a local bank;
  2. describe how risk management processes work
  3. demonstrate the application of hedging techniques used in banks'' treasury operations
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with treasury management and demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3651.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Sockalingam Ramasamy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFW2401

Prohibitions

AFF3651


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Critically analyse and apply selected accounting reporting standards (IFRS) in the accounting of financial information of companies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the objectives of financial statements, the specific information needs of equity investors, the general information needs of other users and describe and assess the meaning of fair presentation
  2. comment on the need for and assess the application of a conceptual framework and the standards for financial reporting
  3. discuss the reporting requirements as it relates to the statutory reporting requirements, and the reporting requirements of Generally Accepted Accounting Practice or financial reporting standards
  4. discuss the underlying assumptions on the basis of which financial statements are prepared
  5. discuss the qualitative characteristics of financial statements and assess their applicability to fair presentation and measurement issues to enhance the decision-usefulness of financial reporting
  6. assess the appropriate elements of financial statements and the presentation of the elements in the financial statements
  7. discuss recognition criteria and assess their application in financial statements
  8. criticise the measurement criteria, models and their incorporation and disclosure in the financial statements
  9. criticise the concepts of fair value accounting
  10. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with financial according and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3730.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Karen Odendaal

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFW2720

Prohibitions

AFW2042, AFW3004


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Familiarise students with the preparation and presentation of group annual financial statements of companies in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act, 1973, and the financial reporting standards.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the theory and background to group structures and preparing group financial statements
  2. prepare and assess group financial statements for wholly-owned and partly-owned subsidiaries, taking into account the effects of intercompany transactions, dividends, preferences shares, interim acquisitions and insolvent subsidiaries
  3. discuss and apply alternative forms of group reporting
  4. discuss the basic principles of equity accounting and joint ventures
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with group statements and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3740.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Karen Odendaal

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFW2720


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Theory and background to managerial decision making in respect of the following different types decision making techniques: cost volume profit analysis, learning curve theory, relevance approach to non-routine profit related decisions, decision making under circumstances of risk and uncertainty, cost planning of network projects, inventory models, standard costing, budgeting techniques, cost estimation and behaviour and linear programming.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and discuss the role that management accounting information plays in organisations
  2. explain and apply advanced quantification techniques to provide information for management decision-making and give advice
  3. demonstrate proficiency in applying the instruments, techniques and procedures covered to theoretical and practical applications interpret the results and advice accordingly
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with management information and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3750.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Magda Odendaal

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFG2020 or AFW2020 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit starts with a brief introduction to the management of computer information systems (CIS). All the important internal controls that should be present in a CIS and advanced CIS environment and that are important for the external auditor, as well as the important concepts and procedures in order to use and audit financial databases and CIS are covered in this unit. The download of financial data and its manipulation in order to verify and audit it, as well as the performance of computer assisted auditing techniques (CAATs) on this data form an important part of this unit. The influence of the Internet and E-commerce on the business and auditing environments, as well as applicable legislation are dealt with. In addition, this unit contains a strong practical element of using database software, spreadsheets and selected audit software often used by accountants and auditors in practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the most important aspects of management of a computer information system (CIS)
  2. describe and explain computer security and controls, and apply that knowledge in order to assess the relevant audit risks and to make recommendations, as an external auditor, for the improvement of security and controls in simulated simple and advanced CIS environments and networks
  3. describe and discuss the procedures and problematic areas surrounding the download of client's data to the external auditor's computer environment for audit purposes
  4. plan, based on proper risk assessment, the external audit of financial CIS systems, selecting techniques such as CAATs (computer-assisted auditing techniques)
  5. explain, interpret and illustrate the influence of the internet and E-commerce on the business and auditing environments, including relevant legislation
  6. explain and describe database technology and apply the knowledge practically in database software on computer, and
  7. use the computer practically as a business, accounting and auditing tool with spreadsheet analysis software, CAATs software and automated audit working papers in selected case studies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 45%
Examination: 55%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Anton Du Toit

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFW2760 and FIT1003 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The application of South African regulations on the audit profession and the external auditor including corporate governance is dealt with extensively in this unit. In addition to all the regulations applicable to external auditors the unit covers audit risk, controls, using a specialist, developing audit procedures on all business processes including the use of computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) and reporting on the results in the audit of groups.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate compliance with the regulations applicable to external auditors to identify violations and to make relevant recommendations
  2. assess corporate governance and recommend improvements towards best practices
  3. assess audit risk, controls and recommend improvements for all business processes in the group in various simulated practical scenarios
  4. design audit procedures including the use of computerised assisted audit techniques (CAATs) in response to the risk assessment in simulated practical scenarios for all business processes
  5. write an appropriate report to communicate the results in simulated practical scenarios
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with auditing and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3770.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Blanche Steyn

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFW2760

Prohibitions

AFW2041, AFW3941, AFW3942


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit provides a detailed examination of selected topics in corporate finance. These topics include: capital market history, risk and return, cost of capital, raising capital, financial leverage and capital structure, dividend policy, short-term finance and planning, mergers and acquisitions, international corporate finance, leasing and valuations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain and apply the key concepts that are relevant for each topic (capital market history, risk and return, cost of capital, raising capital, financial leverage and capital structure, dividend policy, short-term finance and planning, mergers and acquisitions, international corporate finance, leasing and valuations) and interpret results
  2. apply complex quantitative techniques to practical examples and case studies in corporate finance and give advice
  3. demonstrate an understanding of how these topics relate to contemporary corporate activity
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and / or group activities dealing with corporate finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in AFW3790.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Gladman Moyana

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFW2780

Prohibitions

AFW3005


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Lending environment; decision making and organisation of lending, lending policies and controls; behavioural aspects of decision making and decision-makers; retail, commercial and corporate lending; business expansions; off balance sheet lending; loan management and problem loans.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply appropriate analysis techniques to particular loan facilities
  2. analyse the risk return characteristics (and pricing) of a loan application
  3. examine the major types of lending products and gain the ability to match these products to customer needs
  4. investigate the behavioural aspects of decision making and decision makers
  5. describe statistical techniques used in decision making at the approval, monitoring and termination stages of lending
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with lending decisions and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFW3841.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Sockalingam Ramasamy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: AFW2401 and AFG2631 or AFW2631 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFF3841


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

This unit is designed to introduce the concept of risk as a business philosophy and to introduce the students to the Australian Risk Management Standard, AS/NZS 4360:1999.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the scope, application and definition of risk
  2. explain the risk treatment requirements needed by business
  3. compare and contrast the risk management process with existing approaches to governance, compliance and control
  4. apply the risk approach to effective business control, by reference to AUS/NZ 4360:2004
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with risk.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

This unit is designed to introduce the concept of risk transfer as an outcome of risk management decision-making. It introduces the concept and application of insurance and the principals underlying the insurance purchase. It will look at risk and its treatment, the insurance mechanism and further develop risk as a business philosophy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the risk transfer decision-making process and explain the concept of risk within an insurance framework
  2. explain the principles of risk allocation in non-insurance contracts
  3. analyse the core concepts underlying the main insurance industry sectors of life, accident, health, property and liability
  4. discuss and comment on the implications of the growing convergence of the broader financial services industry
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with risk transfer.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Prerequisites

AFX2021 or AFX3141


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit considers characteristics of property investment, valuation of real estate assets, real estate market analysis, the role of equilibrium asset pricing models, real estate and portfolio theory, measurement of risk and return, indices and pricing models, the effect of leverage and taxation, real estate in mixed asset portfolios, listed and unlisted property trusts, property management and development projects.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse investments in asset classes with particular emphasis on property
  2. critically examine the different types of property, characteristics of property markets, the role of professional investors and managers and the nature of investment vehicles employed
  3. explain property cycles and the role of property in investment portfolios
  4. evaluate property based on risk of cash flows
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with property investment and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX3355.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Flaherty

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2140 or AFF2631


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternational Short Field Experience (Explore Program)
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2012 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

This unit centres on both a conceptual and practical approach to International Accounting Issues with emphasis on international standard setting and compliance as viewed by regulatory and private sector preparers of accounts. Students gain a practical understanding of these issues in an international context through the overseas visitation program which forms an integral part of this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast accounting standard setting in various countries and discuss the convergence of accounting standards through an international study program
  2. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of culture in the development of national accounting regulations
  3. evaluate academic and professional papers in international accounting
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with international accounting.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Jacqueline Birt

Contact hours

Four 3-hour seminars and up to twelve 2 hour-formal visits to professional bodies and companies during the international component of the programs over approximately 4 weeks.

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: AFC2120, AFF2491, AFG2491 or AFW2491 before undertaking this unit otherwise permission required.

Prohibitions

AFX3871


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternational Short Field Experience (Explore Program)
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2012 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

The unit is designed to provide students with the conceptual foundations of the functions and institutions of the international financial system. To impart an understanding and appreciation of the current issues underlying the international area of finance, and to develop a practical understanding of the markets and financial techniques used by international banks and multinational organisations. To develop a practical understanding and appreciation of cultural differences within the area of international banking and finance through an overseas visitation program.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast the structure of banking and financial markets internationally through an international study program
  2. explain parity theories and their application to foreign exchange markets
  3. develop a practical understanding and appreciation of culture in the development of national banking and finance activities
  4. evaluate academic and professional papers in international banking and finance
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with international banking and finance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Nigel Morkel-Kingsbury

Contact hours

Four 3-hour seminars and up to twelve 2 hour-formal visits to professional bodies and companies during the international component of the programs over approximately 4 weeks.

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: AFC2140, AFF2401, AFF2631, AFG2631, AFW2401 or AFW2631 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

AFX3551


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Introduction to a broad range of research methodology and testing procedures used in accounting and finance. The primary focus is on the undertaking of research. The unit comprises an analysis of the science of research, an examination of the key elements of research in accounting and finance, data issues, ethical issues, hypothesis development, causal models, the use of parametric and non-parametric statistical tests, survey-based research and general research methodology.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the major steps in the development of a research project in accounting or finance
  2. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses in accounting and finance research designs and methods
  3. apply qualitative and quantitative data analysis techniques and interpret the output
  4. critically evaluate empirical research in accounting and finance
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with research methods and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4000.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Philip Gray

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

AFC4100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Students will prepare a research proposal in an area of accounting and/or finance. Students will, with the assistance of a research mentor, select a research topic and prepare a proposal consisting of a literature review, theory and hypothesis development, an outline of the research methods to be applied and the data requirements

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. prepare a research proposal in accounting or finance
  2. write a literature review related to a selected topic in accounting or finance
  3. develop testable hypotheses
  4. identify the appropriate method and identify data requirements to test the hypotheses
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research proposal.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Philip Gray

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0171 or 0181 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Students should learn how to conduct a literature review; develop both research questions and hypotheses; formulate a research decision; gather and analyse data using appropriate procedures; write up research; and draw appropriate conclusions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. write a comprehensive research paper
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr David Smith

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Students conduct a critical review of the literature relevant to their study; derive appropriate hypotheses for testing; devise an empirical test of the hypotheses showing regard to practical problems of conducting research, ethical considerations, and principles of scientific method; conduct a planned study and manage any problems arising in the date collection; select and conduct an appropriate analysis of the data; and write a report on the project, showing due regard to relevant stylistic conventions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. implement a research proposal
  2. recognise practical problems of conducting scientific research and propose solutions
  3. complete a research dissertation
  4. develop the ability to conduct and manage a planned study
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with a research dissertation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr David Smith

Contact hours

24 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFX4000 and AFX4010 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics include consumption-based asset pricing models , two beta ICAPM, intertemporal asset pricing models, modelling for mutual and hedging funds, credit risk models, modelling correlated defaults, term structure of default probability, credit derivatives, credit default swaps, collateralised debt obligations, asset value models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply advanced knowledge and skills in the use of Excel and Visual Basic
  2. develop advanced skills in the design and implementation of efficient and robust financial models such as option pricing, portfolio and interest rate models
  3. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced modelling in finance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4030.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Francis In

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to provide students with a broad introduction to the contemporary themes in research into Accounting Information Systems. The unit covers issues of research and practice in the following areas: frameworks and ontologies in information systems; decision making; process modelling; behavioural aspects concerned with the design and implementation of systems; and data management issues. Upon completion of this unit, students are expected to be able to evaluate critically the design and conduct of research, and to design their own research into issues of relevance to the accounting information systems field.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of key philosophical issues in Accounting Information Systems research, particularly the ontological foundations of the discipline
  2. articulate solutions to significant research problems using key paradigms in the Accounting Information Systems discipline
  3. critique research relating to the design and use of accounting and business information systems
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in accounting information systems and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4040.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Smith

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various participants to the audit process. The unit provides students with an overview of the nature of assurance and regulation of the audit profession, the economics of auditing, and the behavioural dimensions of auditing. Topics also include future directions for assurance services, fraud, internal control and corporate governance issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss research paradigms in auditing and assurance research
  2. describe the range of methods of decision making in auditing
  3. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in auditing and assurance including audit quality, internal control, fraud and corporate governance
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in auditing and assurance and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4050.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robyn Moroney

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The objective of this course is to develop critical economic reasoning and understanding of important empirical regularities in corporate finance. This unit builds on introductory corporate finance studies and analyses a variety of issues by introducing a study of recent empirical literature. There is a strong focus on research with a selective and critical examination of theoretical and empirical research in corporate finance. The advanced topics covered include market efficiency and event studies, security offerings, corporate takeovers, and capital structure, dividend policy, corporate governance and financial tunnelling.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire knowledge of empirical findings in corporate finance
  2. develop an ability to conceptualise and analyse issues in corporate finance at a sound level of understanding and be in a position to make a significant contribution in setting firm financial policy
  3. critically evaluate underlying theories, concepts, assumptions, limitations and arguments in corporate financial theory
  4. develop analytical skills via understanding the intuition and logic behind recent academic research and the possible extension to the recent research
  5. demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4060.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christine Brown

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics are selected from the development of financial accounting theory, contracting theory and accounting policy choice (including debt contracts, political costs, management compensation and efficient contracting), corporate governance, behavioural research, the returns-earnings relation, the explanatory power of earnings, post-earnings announcement drift and other anomalies, information content of cash flows and accruals, earnings quality, market reaction to accounting regulation and value relevance of accounting information.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss research paradigms in financial accounting
  2. discuss the economic consequences of accounting regulation
  3. distinguish between alternative perspectives of corporate governance and appreciate its interaction with contracting theory and financial accounting
  4. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in financial accounting
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in financial accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4070.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Navissi

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit draws on the academic literature to provide a study of a range of topics relating to banking and finance. It presents a basis for students intending to undertake research into banking and related finance questions. Topics covered include theory of financial intermediation, risk management, efficiency assessment, competition modelling and bank regulation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss existing theory in the field of banking and its evolution
  2. critically assess the usefulness and limitations of this theory in the field of banking
  3. apply this theory to relevant current policy issues
  4. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in banking
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in banking and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4080.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tram Vu

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The major theoretical foundations of the management accounting discipline including the economics (agency), psychology (behavioural, etc.) and organisational (contingency) approaches are introduced. The unit shows how these disciplines have influenced the view of managers. Management accounting is presented as a professional discipline primarily concerned with influencing and facilitating decisions, and several accounting technologies are critically assessed. This unit focuses on technologies which are useful in the short and medium term including budgeting and incentive plans as well as those that take a long-term or strategic viewpoint.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss research paradigms and core concepts related to organizational, economic, behavioural and sociological theories as they relate to management accounting research
  2. critically evaluate recent developments in strategic thinking and implications for management accounting
  3. critically evaluate empirical research to identify recent developments in management accounting practices from perspectives of both content and processes
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in management accounting and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4090.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr David Smith

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0171 or 0181 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an advanced applied perspective to a broad range of research methodology and testing procedures used in accounting and finance research. Students who have completed this unit should, at an advanced level, be able to collect qualitative and quantitative data using a variety of research techniques; to apply advanced statistical techniques to the analysis of quantitative data; to design non-probability and probability samples; to deal with advanced issues in cross-sectional, panel and time series data and to conduct research ethically.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain advanced research methods used in accounting and finance research
  2. perform advanced statistical and econometrics tests and procedures for data analysis
  3. identify topical research issues, research designs and advanced methods used in accounting and finance research
  4. develop critical skills of summarizing, analysing, reporting and presenting quantitative and/or qualitative data and research results
  5. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with advanced research methods.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keryn Chalmers

Contact hours

Two 3-hour lectures per week for 6 weeks

Prerequisites

AFX4000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Philip Gray

Synopsis

This unit will examine empirical research in asset pricing and investments. It will develop students knowledge and ability to apply empirical techniques to conduct research in asset pricing and investments.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse research papers examining current issues in asset pricing and investments
  2. critically evaluate research methodologies applicable to empirical finance research
  3. demonstrate an ability to conduct research in asset pricing and investments
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in investment and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4120.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Philip Gharghori

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

Synopsis

Topics likely to be covered will be selected from theory and evidence on asset pricing models, capital structure, dividend policy, efficient markets, agency theory, takeovers and corporate restructuring, option pricing theory and applications, international finance and investment appraisal.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe current theories and models in corporate finance
  2. develop and apply requisite mathematics skills
  3. critically evaluate empirical research to identify recent developments in corporate finance
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate financial theory.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Philip Gray

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit and must have passed AFX4060


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

Topics selected from accounting-based valuation models, financial ratio analysis from a valuation perspective, empirical research based on accounting-based valuation, fundamental analysis research, risk and financial information, empirical research into share returns and financial information, analysts earnings forecasts and analysts investment recommendations and share returns, management earnings forecasts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe accounting-based valuation methods and apply these methods to listed companies
  2. critically evaluate empirical research that utilises accounting-based valuation
  3. critically evaluate empirical research that investigates the role of analysts as information intermediaries in securities markets
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with the analysis of financial statements.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Farshid Navissi

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0171 or 4416 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor David Smith and Associate Professor Robyn Moroney

Synopsis

This unit considers both theoretical and professional issues relevant to the various subdisciplines of accounting and finance. The unit provides students with an overview of behavioural research in each of the following areas: management accounting (MA) and accounting information systems (AIS), financial accounting (FA) and auditing (A), and finance. Students are also provided with an appreciation of some of the issues involved in the most commonly applied research methods in behavioural accounting and finance research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate empirical research and identify major research questions in behavioural research in accounting and finance
  2. critically evaluate recent developments in behavioural research and implications for accounting and finance researchers/practitioners
  3. illustrate the key strengths and weaknesses in commonly applied research methods in behavioural research
  4. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills in individual and/or group activities dealing with issues in behavioural accounting and finance and demonstrate in individual assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by AFX4190.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ralph Kober

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours), Postgraduate Diploma in Economics and Commerce or equivalent.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Andrew West

Synopsis

This unit requires students to examine a broad range of social and cultural issues that impact upon global business. Rather than prescribing "how" these issues are to be managed, it encourages an awareness and appreciation of the arguments surrounding these issues. Through the use of case studies, students are confronted with some specific challenges of doing business in a global context. The unit provides some preparation for BBusCom(Global) students prior to their semester at an overseas campus.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and explain global and national issues affecting business, including cultural relativism, globalisation and nationalism/patriotism;
  2. discuss and explain issues of global corporate citizenship, including codes of conduct, sustainable development, stakeholder relationships and sustainability reporting;
  3. discuss and explain topical issues affecting global business, such as the impact of international crime, terrorism and environmental concerns;
  4. apply critical thinking to case studies of issues affecting business in the global context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Andrew West

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in the BBusCom(Global)

Prohibitions

BEW2622


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Professor Val Clulow

Synopsis

This unit is designed to enable students undertaking the BBCom Global degree program to complete an individual project while studying abroad in one of Monash University's designated offshore campuses. The unit is therefore necessarily flexible in scope and nature but there are also some guidelines to assist students and staff in the development and delivery of unit outcomes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. investigate, describe, conceptualise, evaluate and consider a broad issue of international business related to their chosen foreign country and the topic in question
  2. develop higher level business conceptualisations and understandings about the country vis a vis their home country.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Val Clulow

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in the BBusCom(Global)

Prohibitions

BEW3350


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Full year 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedOverseas First semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)
Overseas Second semester 2012 (Off-campus Day)

Synopsis

This unit is used by the Faculty to enrol students undertaking outbound exchange studies at a host institution. Students will not be able to enrol in this unit via WES. The faculty will manage the enrolment of students undertaking an outbound exchange program to ensure fees and credit are processed accurately.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr David Watson

Synopsis

The objective of the internship is to give students first-hand experience in working in a business setting in a context relevant to their likely graduate employment, and to integrate theory with practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within Semester assessment 100%

Contact hours

Business Internships will be undertaken under academic and organizational supervision in a business environment and do not require class attendance.

Off-campus attendance requirements

Not offered to off campus students

Prerequisites

Students are normally expected to have completed at least 72 credit points before enrolling in this unit.

Co-requisites

NIL

Prohibitions

NIL


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Andrew West

Synopsis

This unit requires students to examine a broad range of social and cultural issues that impact upon global business. Rather than prescribing "how" these issues are to be managed, it encourages an awareness and appreciation of the arguments surrounding these issues. Through the use of case studies, students are confronted with some specific challenges of doing business in a global context. The unit provides some preparation for BBusCom(Global) students prior to their semester at an overseas campus.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss and explain global and national issues affecting business, including cultural relativism, globalisation and nationalism/patriotism;
  2. discuss and explain issues of global corporate citizenship, including codes of conduct, sustainable development, stakeholder relationships and sustainability reporting;
  3. discuss and explain topical issues affecting global business, such as the impact of international crime, terrorism and environmental concerns;
  4. apply critical thinking to case studies of issues affecting business in the global context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Andrew West

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in the BBusCom(Global)

Prohibitions

BEG2622


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

Students will undertake approved projects for an employer, which will contribute to the organisation and facilitate the development of work place skills and application of knowledge to a practical situation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply conceptual and theoretical knowledge to practical work situations
  2. communicate effectively and appropriately with peers and superiors both verbally and in writing
  3. work effectively as part of a team
  4. undertake applied research projects in the areas of accounting, economics, management, marketing, or any area of business.

Assessment

Employer assessment: 30%, Work placement / Project report: 70%.

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

To be negotiated with the campus coordinator. Some projects will be conducted in an industry and therefore do not require class contact, while other projects may be conducted on-campus under the coordination of the unit coordinator.

Prerequisites

Enrolment in this unit is not available via WES. Course director approval is required prior to enrolment and approval will be dependent upon completion of 96 credit points (including appropriate units for the area of work placement) with an overall average of 65% for all units undertaken.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Maxine Bradshaw

Synopsis

This unit provides students with an opportunity to undertake work in an organisational environment broadly related to their field of academic study. Students will undertake approved projects for an employer, which will contribute to the overall goals of the organisation. The unit will require students to apply theoretical and conceptual knowledge to practical workplace situations as well as develop self-awareness, personal and professional competencies necessary for a high level of employability.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply conceptual and theoretical knowledge to practical work situations
  2. communicate effectively and appropriately with peers and superiors both verbally and in writing
  3. work effectively as part of a team
  4. undertake applied research projects in the areas of accounting, economics, management, marketing, or any area of business.

Assessment

Completion of workplace objectives: 30%
assignment on placement (7000 words): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

The project will be conducted in an industry and does not require class contact

Prerequisites

Enrolment in this unit is not available via WES. Course Director approval is required prior to enrolment and approval will be dependent upon completion of 96 credit points (including appropriate units for the area of work placement) with an overall average of 65% for all units undertaken.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

A capstone major project, demonstrating the skills and knowledge acquired by the student during the course. It can be a practical on-the-job study or an in-depth study of a sports event management issue through research. It will involve the submission of a major written report and a class presentation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply conceptual and theoretical knowledge to practical work situations in the field of managing sporting events.
  2. communicate effectively and appropriately with peers and superiors both verbally and in writing.
  3. work effectively as part of a team
  4. undertake an applied research project in the field of managing sporting events.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

To be negotiated with the campus coordinator. Some projects will be conducted in an industry and therefore do not require class contact, while other projects may be conducted on-campus under the coordination of the unit coordinator.

Prerequisites

Students require permission before undertaking this unit

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3926 to undertake this unit


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Full year 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Andrea McCall

Synopsis

A capstone major project, demonstrating the skills and knowledge acquired by the student during the course. It can be a practical on-the-job study or an in-depth study of a business related issue through research. It will involve the submission of a major written report and a class presentation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire skills in written and oral communication negotiation, teamwork and change management
  2. develop the capacity for critical thought and analysis, problem solving, inquiry and research, taking into account professional ethics and moral and social responsibility
  3. develop the capacity for leadership, entrepreneurship, creativity and innovation
  4. develop the capacity to integrate and synthesise knowledge from different disciplines to achieve innovative solutions to business problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Andrea McCall

Contact hours

To be negotiated with the campus coordinator and project supervisor. Some projects will be conducted in an industry and therefore do not require class contact, while other projects may be conducted on-campus under the coordination of the supervisor.

Prerequisites

Completion of 96 credit points of study

Prohibitions

BEW3100, BEW3200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Val Clulow

Synopsis

This unit is designed to enable students undertaking the BBCom Global degree program to complete an individual project while studying abroad in one of Monash University's designated offshore campuses. The unit is therefore necessarily flexible in scope and nature but there are also some guidelines to assist students and staff in the development and delivery of unit outcomes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. investigate, describe, conceptualise, evaluate and consider a broad issue of international business related to their chosen foreign country and the topic in question
  2. develop higher level business conceptualisations and understandings about the country vis a vis their home country.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Val Clulow

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in BBusCom(Global)

Prohibitions

BEG3350


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Melanie Bryant

Synopsis

This unit aims to develop students' understanding of qualitative research, with specific focus on qualitative research philosophy, qualitative research design and qualitative research methods. This unit explores topics such as: paradigmatic approaches to research; research design; negotiation of access to research sites/participants; researcher ethics; methods of qualitative data collection such as observation, interviews, focus groups and non-intrusive data collection; methods of data analysis; issues of qualitative research validity; and qualitative writing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr David Watson

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Joanne Larkins

Synopsis

An in-depth introduction to quantitative research methods. This subject is one of two that together supply the research methodology skills and knowledge necessary for students to complete an independent research project at the honours level. It provides a comprehensive coverage of quantitative research methodologies. Topics include: survey studies/correlational field studies; forms of regression; analysis of variances; discriminant analysis; factor analysis; non-parametric statistics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Jo-Ann Larkins

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ETW2111, ETX2111, ETX2121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Val Clulow

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Assessment

Assessment will be through a combination of assignments, examinations, and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities.

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Alan Lawton

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Val Clulow

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business and commerce as a foundation to the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Assessment

Assignments, examinations and written reports appropriate to the selected area of study and associated activities

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Alan Lawton

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3169 to undertake this unit


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Full year 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Full year 2012 (Day)
Sunway Full year 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Full year 2012 (Day)
South Africa Full year 2012 (Day)
South Africa Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Val Clulow

Synopsis

Students work under the guidance of a supervisor to plan, carry out, and report on an original research project that addresses a significant issues in business; this research project is likely to have substantial practical outcomes or implications; as well, it is hoped that students and supervisors will publish the work in an appropriate journal.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Alan Lawton

Prerequisites

BEW4000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr David Watson

Contact hours

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

Prerequisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr David Watson

Contact hours

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

Prerequisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr David Watson

Contact hours

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

Prerequisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedBerwick Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment 100%

Contact hours

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

Prerequisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedBerwick Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment 100%

Contact hours

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

Prerequisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternship (Act Program)
OfferedBerwick Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Berwick Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Clayton Summer semester B 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Summer semester B 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with the opportunity to put theory into practice in a business environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. compare and contrast theory and practice
  2. apply theory to practice in a supervised environment
  3. evaluate personal learning and personal development in a complex business environment
  4. analyse complex business problems and to prepare and present innovative solutions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment 100%

Contact hours

The contact hours will be spent engaged in supervised industry-based learning activities as part of their placement. This includes time required to attend regular meetings on campus with their academic supervisor.

Prerequisites

Permission required. Students must be participating in an approved program of advanced study.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Roger Gamble. Dr Aashish Srivastava. (Semester 2)

Synopsis

An introduction to legal studies and to the legal system of Australia with special emphasis on commercial aspects. The laws of negligence as it affects business and the professional is introduced, and aspects of the law of contract, consumer law, agency, partnership, trusts and an introduction to companies of relevance to commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the essential features of the Australian legal and political system and compare and contrast the two principal law-making institutions--the courts and the parliaments--and the laws they make
  2. describe and analyse some of the legal concepts that underpin commercial activity in Australia and describe the different conceptual bases of legal liability
  3. describe and analyse key areas of normative commercial law such as contract law, tort law, agency law and business organisations
  4. conduct basic legal research using basic primary and secondary sources
  5. critically analyse a hypothetical legal problem and clearly and coherently advise a hypothetical client on the relevant legal issues that are raised in that problem and support the advice by reference to primary sources.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Roger Gamble (semester 1)
Dr Aashish Srivastava (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTF1010, BTG1200, BTW1200, LAW2100, LAW2102


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Nicola Charwat

Synopsis

The law affecting Australian enterprises engaged in international business. Topics include international trade conventions; import and export procedures; carriage of goods by sea and air; bills of lading and the Hague-Visby rules; finance of international trade; payment and documentary credits; the use of negotiable instruments in international trade; international commercial arbitration and marine insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine international trade law scenarios
  2. identify legal problems and risks which arise in those scenarios in relation to the global trading system, contracts, carriage of goods, payments and dispute resolution
  3. describe the relevant law which may apply to those problems
  4. analyse and apply the law to those problems and predict possible legal outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Nicola Charwat

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTC1110 or BTC2110 or equivalent

Prohibitions

BTF3201, BTG3201, BTW3201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Anne O'Rourke. Mr. Abe Herzberg. (Semester 2)

Synopsis

Topics include the Corporations Act 2001 scheme; the role and functions of the Australian Securities and Investments Commission; the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution; the company's relationship with outsiders; share and loan capital; regulation of public fund raising; duties of directors; rights of shareholders and minority shareholder protection; forms of corporate insolvency administrations, particularly as they affect creditors, officers and shareholders.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in the internal and external regulation of companies and how they may be used
  2. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  3. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of corporate law in the context of the changing needs of the community.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3.5 hours -- includes 0.5 hours for reading and note taking): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke (semester 1)
Mr Abe Herzberg (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTC1110 or BTC2110 or equivalent

Prohibitions

BTW2220, BTF2220, BTG2200, LAW4171


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Anne O'Rourke

Synopsis

The unit introduces students to contemporary developments in labour law, employment law, discrimination law and occupational health and safety law. It aims to develop knowledge and skills and understanding of the practical application of these areas of the law in Australian workplaces.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and analyse a wide range of legal issues affecting the workplace (outlined below)
  2. apply legal principles to a range of hypothetical scenarios, in order to demonstrate practical understanding of legal issues at the workplace (building on strategic problem solving skills from business law)
  3. evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of the principles underpinning workplace law
  4. critically assess the law's role and impact on the employment relationship
  5. critically evaluate current issues in the media involving legal regulation of the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTC1110


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Wayne Gumley

Synopsis

This unit examines the evolution of regulatory strategies for environmental protection in response to systemic crises such as climate change and natural resource depletion, from traditional 'command and control' approaches to more recent behavioural and market based strategies, with particular focus upon the increasing recognition of the principles of ecologically sustainable development by courts and legislators.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and explain the international law principles of ecologically sustainable development
  2. understand and explain the extent of integration of those principles into Australian environmental regulation, at both national and state government levels, and their recognition in Australian common law
  3. identify and analyse emerging trends in regulation for sustainability with particular focus upon the risks and opportunities those trends may present for Australian business enterprises
  4. use appropriate industry based case studies to demonstrate a sound understanding of the risks and opportunities presented by sustainability regulation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Latimer

Synopsis

This unit involves a study of the legal framework regulating the securities and futures industries, which derives from the interaction of statute law, case law, ASIC releases, ASX and SFE rules. It focuses on the regulation of financial services intermediaries by statute, case law and administration by ASIC, the ASX and the SFE. Topics include market regulation by ASIC, the ASX and the SFE, liability for misstatements and non-disclosure about financial products, licensing of dealers and investment advisers, the relationship of broker and client, conduct of securities and futures business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of the regulation of financial markets
  2. analyse the co-regulatory roles of ASIC and ASX
  3. describe the effect of misleading or deceptive conduct in financial markets
  4. evaluate the impact of co-regulation on the financial services industry
  5. critically analyse the regulation of market manipulation and insider trading.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Latimer

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTF3091


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Ken Devos

Synopsis

An introduction to Australian taxation. Topics include residence and source; assessable income; capital gains; GST; FBT; allowable deductions including repairs, deductions and substantiation; and individual offsets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and apply the appropriate taxation law for various income and capital receipts in given fact situations
  2. analyse and apply the appropriate taxation law for both general and specific deductions in given fact situations
  3. calculate the taxable value of various fringe benefits
  4. describe the major elements of both the GST and CGT

To practice as a tax agent in Australia, an accountant is expected to be registered with the Commonwealth Government's Tax Practioner's Board. This unit has been designed to satisfy the requirements of one of two courses required for registration as a tax agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Ken Devos

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTC1110

Prohibitions

BTF3931, BTG3221, BTW3221


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Latimer

Synopsis

Aspects of the legal environment that affect financial decisions, transactions and relationships. Topics covered are chosen from the laws regulating the financing implications of different forms of business organisation; financial institutions and the financial institutions/customer relationship; cheques; electronic transactions; other negotiable instruments; the laws regulating business finance and security; consumer credit; guarantees and bankruptcy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the legal and regulatory framework applicable to the banking and finance sector
  2. analyse and apply the legal concepts underlying banking and financial transactions
  3. analyse and apply the legal principles relating to the rights and obligations of those involved in banking and finance
  4. have developed a legal perspective to assist in decision-making in areas involving banking and finance
  5. to provide the legal background for the resolution of business problems involving banking and finance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 25%
Examination (3 hours plus 30 minutes reading and noting, open-book): 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Latimer

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTC1110 or equivalent before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Mark Bender

Synopsis

The legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. The impact of common law, legislation and self-regulating codes of practice in the market place. Particular topics include intellectual property rights, product development and promotion, product safety and quality, the regulation of unfair and anti-competitive conduct, franchising and electronic marketing and the law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the consumer protection laws and apply those laws to a range of marketing and advertising strategies
  2. identify and analyse the laws protecting intellectual property and apply those laws to the development and marketing of new products and ideas
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of competition practices including pricing and distribution
  4. develop an ability to research and critically evaluate developments in marketing law.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3.5 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mark Bender

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTC1110

Prohibitions

BTF3181, BTW3281, MKC3300


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Mark Bender

Synopsis

Liability for defective products; liability for misleading advice or information; contract law; agency law; partnership law; introduction to company law; company officers' duties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine common commercial law scenarios relating to: the supply of defective goods and services; contract disputes; misrepresentations; agency relationships; partnership law; and company law
  2. identify legal problems and risks which arise in those scenarios
  3. describe the laws relevant to those scenarios
  4. analyse and apply the laws to predict possible legal outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mark Bender

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students enrolled in course code 0816 must be granted permission to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC1110, BTG1200, BTW1200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Michelle Welsh [semester 1]. Mr. Michael Duffy [semester 2].

Synopsis

Topics include the separate legal entity status of companies and the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution; the company's relationship with outsiders; corporate management incorporating extensive consideration of directors' duties; share capital; regulation of public fund raising; members' remedies incorporating statutory remedies and common law rights of action; members' meetings; forms of corporate insolvency administrations; trusts, incorporating the role of trustees and the rights of beneficiaries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the significance and functions of corporations, and trusts, as legal structures that facilitate the carrying on of business
  2. identify, explain and apply legislation and case law to the internal and external regulation of corporations, and the operations of trusts
  3. develop skills in legal problem solving and analyse legal problems relating to corporations and trusts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michelle Welsh (semester 1)
Mr Michael Duffy (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF1010

Prohibitions

BTC2210, BTG2220, BTW2220


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Andrew Serpell

Synopsis

An overview of conduct that constitutes criminality in the business world. It draws together from the various areas of business law and taxation provisions governing inappropriate conduct within corporate entities which have the potential to attract criminal and/or other serious sanctions. It discusses the mechanisms for detecting and penalising such offences and the possible penalties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the nature and causes of corporate crime
  2. identify various types of corporate criminality
  3. identify the laws that govern corporate criminality
  4. describe the penalties for the various types of corporate criminality
  5. formulate and implement a compliance program to minimise criminal and/or other misconduct in a given corporation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Andrew Serpell

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF1010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

BTW2223, BTG2223


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Matt Nichol

Synopsis

Banking Law examines aspects of the legal environment affecting the bank-customer relationship and financial decisions, including: types of accounts; consumer banking and the bank-customer relationship; negotiable instruments including cheques and bills of exchange; EFT and electronic banking; current issues in banking law; the laws regulating business finance, security and consumer credit, mortgages, company charges, personal property security, guarantees; bankruptcy, and insolvency law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and examine the key elements of the banker customer relationship, including consumer banking and responsible lending practices
  2. critically analyse the main features and uses of negotiable instruments such as cheques, Bills of Exchange and letters of credit
  3. examine electronic banking, EFT's and the EFT code, the use of credit cards and describe the structure of the payments system in Australia;
  4. define the legal issues in taking security for a loan with reference to mortgages, and personal property security
  5. examine key aspects of corporate and personal insolvency and its consequences,
  6. evaluate key current developments within the banking system in Australia based on knowledge gained within the course, and evaluate and apply this knowledge to real world, practical examples.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Matt Nichol

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Christopher Arup

Synopsis

Legal implications of staff-management decisions. Individual employer-employee relationship; contract of employment; wages-work bargain; recruitment law; discrimination law; termination law including unfair dismissals; mutuality of legal rights and obligations; health and safety law in the workplace; vicarious liability; industrial action and constitutional considerations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. extend their knowledge and comprehension of the legal framework governing workplace relations in Australia
  2. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship
  3. demonstrate a working knowledge of employment law issues through the application of legal principles to a range of hypothetical scenarios
  4. identify and analyse current issues involving legal regulation of the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christopher Arup

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF1010

Prohibitions

BTW2241, BTG3241, BTW3241


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Latimer

Synopsis

This unit involves a study of the legal framework regulating the securities and futures industries which derives from the interaction of statute law, case law, ASIC releases, ASX and SFE rules. It focuses on the regulation of financial services, intermediaries by statute, case law and administration by ASIC, ASX and SFE. Topics include market regulation by ASIC, the ASX and the SFE, liability for misstatements and non-disclosure about financial products, licensing of dealers and investment advisers, the relationship of broker and client, conduct of securities and futures business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of the regulation of financial markets
  2. analyse the co-regulatory roles of ASIC and ASX
  3. describe the effect of misleading or deceptive conduct in financial market
  4. evaluate the impact of co-regulation on the financial services industry
  5. critically analyse the regulation of market manipulation and insider trading.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Paul Latimer

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed 24 points to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Wayne Gumley

Synopsis

An introduction to environmental law in Australia with special emphasis on its application to business and development projects. Covering

  1. sources of environmental law including property rights, common law liability, government responsibilities, international obligations;
  2. specific regulatory schemes for management of land, water, air pollution, industrial waste, product standards and taxation concessions;
  3. non-coercive strategies and other recent developments, green taxes, emission trading and voluntary agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and apply the various sources of environmental and planning law in Australia and to explain the role of various government agencies
  2. analyse the impact of selected environmental laws upon various types of business enterprises and development projects
  3. recommend and explain appropriate strategies to enable businesses and developers to minimise penalties for violation of environmental laws
  4. analyse emerging trends in environmental law.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Wayne Gumley

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Synopsis

The legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. Topics discussed include unfair trading practices, intellectual property rights (patents, trade marks, copyright and designs), anti-competitive conduct and new marketing practices. The unit places the laws controlling unfair and anti-competitive practices within the wider economic context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the consumer protection laws and apply those laws to a range of marketing and advertising strategies
  2. identify and analyse the laws protecting intellectual property and apply those laws to the development and marketing of new products and ideas
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of competition practices including pricing and distribution
  4. critically evaluate a contemporary marketing law development and write a research paper on the topic.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF1010 or BTP1010

Prohibitions

BTC3300, BTW3281, MKC3300


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Toan Le

Synopsis

The law affecting Australian enterprises engaged in international business. Topics include international trade conventions; import and export procedures; carriage of goods by sea and air; bills of lading and the Hague-Visby rules; finance of international trade; payment and documentary credits; the use of negotiable instruments in international trade; international commercial arbitration and marine insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and scope of the international legal framework in which trade between nations takes place
  2. be able to recognise and understand the form and nature of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange, documentary collections and letters of credit
  3. be able to identify and understand legal issues in an international trade context
  4. be able to apply the laws relating to international contracts of sale, international carriage of goods and finance of international trade in a variety of situations
  5. be able to write a coherent piece of advice discussing the legal issues arising in an international trade dispute.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Nicola Charwat

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF1010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

BTC2190, BTG3201, BTW3201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Diane Kraal

Synopsis

Assessable income and exempt income; deductions; capital gains tax; fringe benefits tax; goods and services tax; residence and source; individual offsets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the administrative framework within which the federal taxation system operates
  2. calculate income tax and goods and services tax liabilities
  3. identify and analyse fundamental tax concepts such as the distinction between income and capital
  4. apply legislative provisions and judicial principles to practical taxation problems and provide supporting evaluations through the application of statutory and case law principles.

To practice as a tax agent in Australia an accountant is expected to be registered with the Commonwealth Government's Tax Practioner's Board. This unit has been designed to satisfy the requirements of one of two courses required for registration as a tax agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, closed-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Diane Kraal

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF1010

Prohibitions

BTC3150, BTG3221, BTW3221


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Tony van der Westhuysen

Synopsis

Taxation of business income and abnormal receipts. Business tax reform including the Goods and Service Tax and Ralph Committee reforms. Tax planning issues on acquisition and disposal of a business. Remuneration planning, retirement and estate planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation issues associated with specific regimes including the Alienation of Personal Services Income Regime, the Simplified Tax System and the PAYG Systems
  2. analyse the tax frameworks that apply when conducting a business through Companies, Trusts Partnerships or Sole Proprietors
  3. analyse business transactions in the context of the Goods and Services Tax
  4. apply the appropriate taxation rules that govern purchases and sales of a business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Tony van der Westhuysen

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTF2931 or BTF3931

Prohibitions

BTC3350, BTG3242, BTW3242


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr. James Roffee

Synopsis

An introduction to legal studies and to the legal system of Australia with special emphasis on business aspects. The topics covered include: introduction to the Australian legal system; the tort of negligence with an emphasis on negligent misstatement; the law of contract; business structures, with particular emphasis on partnerships and corporations and the law of agency

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and describe the structure of the Australian legal system
  2. examine and apply the law of negligence, with particular emphasis on the law of negligent misstatement
  3. examine and apply the law of contract, with particular emphasis on the formation and contents of contracts, matters affecting the validity of a contract, and remedies for breach of contract
  4. examine and apply the law of agency, with particular emphasis on its application to partnerships and corporations
  5. examine and analyse common business structures, with particular emphasis on partnerships and corporations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (open book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ashraf Kazi

Prohibitions

BTC1110, BTF1010, BTW1201, BTW1200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ashraf Kazi

Synopsis

Topics include the Corporations Law scheme; the role and functions of the Australian Securities and Investments Commission; the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution; the company's relationship with outsiders; share and loan capital; regulation of public fund raising; duties of directors, officers and promoters; rights of members and minority shareholder protection; forms of corporate insolvency administrations, particularly as they affect creditors, officers and shareholders; trusts, trustees, beneficiaries and third parties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in the internal and external regulation of companies and how they may be used
  2. explain the nature of trusts, the way they operate, and the rights and obligations of people involved in or dealing with trusts
  3. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  4. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of corporate law in the context of the changing needs of the community.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ashraf Kazi

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW1200 or BTG1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC2210, BTC2213, BTW2213, BTF2220, LAW4171, BTW2220


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Michelle Welsh

Synopsis

An overview of conduct that constitutes criminality in the business world. It draws together from the various areas of business law and taxation provisions governing inappropriate conduct within corporate entities, which have the potential to attract criminal and/or other serious sanctions. It discusses the mechanisms for detecting and penalising such offences and the possible penalties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the nature and causes of corporate crime
  2. identify various types of corporate criminality
  3. identify the laws that govern corporate criminality
  4. describe the penalties for the various types of corporate criminality
  5. formulate and implement a compliance program to minimise criminal and/or other misconduct in a given corporation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michelle Welsh

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW1200 or BTG1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTF2223, BTW2223


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

The law affecting Australian enterprises engaged in international business. Topics include international trade conventions; import and export procedures; the sale of goods; carriage of goods by sea and air; bills of lading and the Hague-Visby rules; finance of international trade; payment and documentary credits; the use of negotiable instruments in international trade; international commercial arbitration and marine insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and analyse the international legal framework in which trade between nations take place
  2. identify and analyse the legal issues in an international trade context,
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws to solve legal problems that arise from international commercial transactions
  4. identify and analyse the laws relating to international contracts of sale, finance of international trading transactions, international carriage of goods, insurance in international trade and dispute resolution in international trade
  5. identify and analyse the form and nature of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange, documentary collections and letter of credits.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Nicola Charwat

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW1200 or BTG1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC2190, BTF3201, BTW3201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Ashraf Kazi

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to Australian income tax law and practice. Topics include: Australian tax jurisdictional issues, assessable income from personal exertion, property and business, capital gains tax and fringe benefits tax, exempt income, deductions, both general and specific, accounting for trading stock, taxation of partnership, company and trust income, GST, tax avoidance and evasion.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the constitutional and administrative framework in which the federal taxation system operates
  2. describe fundamental tax concepts, such as the concepts of income, capital, deductible expenses, residence of the taxpayer, source of income and derivation of income
  3. critically analyse the fundamental distinctions between
    1. receipts of income and capital and
    2. deductible and non-deductible outgoings
  4. describe the special treatment given to different types of taxpayers, such as companies, trusts, partnerships and non-residents
  5. analyse, and apply, legislative provisions and court decisions relating to taxation matters.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ashraf Kazi

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW1200 or BTG1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3150, BTF3931, BTW3221


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr. James Roffee

Synopsis

Aspects of ultra vires, natural justice, jurisdictional error, delegated legislation, Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act, administrative appeals tribunal, freedom of information legislation, remedies and orders relevant to business and commerce, ASIC and ATO examples where possible.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in Administrative Law and how they may be used
  2. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  3. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of Administrative law in the context of the changing needs of the community.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr James Roffee

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW1200 or BTG1200 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

BTW3240


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr James Roffee

Synopsis

Legal implications of staff management decisions, individual employer-employee relationship, contract of employment, termination law including unfair dismissals, health and safety law in the workplace, vicarious liability agreements, awards and industrial action, constitutional considerations and discrimination law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. extend their knowledge and comprehension of the legal framework governing workplace relations in Australia
  2. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship
  3. demonstrate a working knowledge of employment law issues through the application of legal principles to a range of hypothetical scenarios
  4. identify and analyse current issues involving legal regulation of the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr James Roffee

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW1200 or BTG1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTF2991, BTW2241, BTW3241


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)

Synopsis

Topics covered include taxation of business entities, tax planning issues on acquisition and disposal of a business, retirement (superannuation) and estate planning, tax administration and anti-avoidance and tax agent ethics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation issues associated with specific business regimes including the Small Tax System
  2. analyse the tax frameworks that apply when conducting a business through Companies, Trusts, Partnerships or Sole Proprietors
  3. analyse business transactions in the context of the tax administration and anti-avoidance rules
  4. apply the appropriate taxation rules that govern purchases and sales of a business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Ken Devos

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW3221 or BTG3221 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

BTC3350, BTF3951, BTW3242


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Asraf Kazi

Synopsis

The ease and manner in which information can now be transmitted, accessed and transacted around the world instantaneously by the interconnection of computers (the Internet); legal methods by which the law has attempted to regulate this 'flow' of information and its use in business and commerce will be explored. Contract law (in particular international and computer contracts), intellectual property (including copyright law) and privacy issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the international agreements establishing the internet
  2. analyse and apply the laws affecting Internet business transactions to a range of commercial situations
  3. compare and contrast the forms of regulation used by governments to regulate conduct on the internet
  4. identify, analyse and apply the laws providing protection to the Internet itself as a computer program.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ashraf Kazi

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW1200 or BTG1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3640, BTF3641, LAW7213, BTW3641


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Andrew Coleman/Ms Tabatha Pettitt

Synopsis

Students will examine the role of commercial law in shaping business structures, transactions and conduct.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine common commercial law scenarios relating to the supply of goods and services, and the operations of commercial entities
  2. identify legal problems and risks which arise in those scenarios
  3. describe the laws relevant to those scenarios
  4. consider role of extra-legal factors such as transaction costs and commercial relationships
  5. analyse, discuss and apply the laws to predict legal outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination (2 hours): 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrew Coleman

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTF1010, BTC1110, BTW 1200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vanitha Karean

Synopsis

This unit introduces the student to the salient features of the Malaysian legal system, the various dispute resolution techniques and examines the main areas of law that regulate the business environment in Malaysia. The focus of learning is on the law of contract, the law of misrepresentation, agency law, partnership law and aspects of company law. Comparative aspects of Australian laws will be highlighted where relevant.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the salient features of the Malaysian legal system, with a focus on its law making institutions, the interpretation of statutes and the various dispute resolution techniques
  2. examine and apply the principles of contract law, misrepresentation and agency law to hypothetical legal problems
  3. examine the legal differences between partnerships and corporations
  4. conduct basic legal research using primary and secondary sources
  5. describe Australian comparative aspects of the above topics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
examination 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Haemala Thanasegaran

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTC1110, BTF1010, BTW1200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr. Les Haberfield

Synopsis

An introduction to legal studies and to the legal system of Australia with special emphasis on business aspects. The topics covered include: introduction to the Australian legal system; the tort of negligence with an emphasis on negligent misstatement; the law of contract; business structures, with particular emphasis on partnerships and corporations and the law of agency.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and describe the structure of the Australian legal system
  2. examine and apply the law of negligence, with particular emphasis on the law of negligent misstatement
  3. examine and apply the law of contract, with particular emphasis on the formation and contents of contracts, matters affecting the validity of a contract, and remedies for breach of contract
  4. examine and apply the law of agency, with particular emphasis on its application to partnerships and corporations
  5. examine and analyse common business structures, with particular emphasis on partnerships and corporations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Leslie Haberfield

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTC1110, BTF1010, BTG1200, BTW1201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Michel Koekemoer

Synopsis

An introduction to the South African legal system, its history, structure, sources of law and interpretation of statutes. Particular emphasis is placed on the law as it affects business. This includes the banking law on paying instruments and modes of payment. The laws of delict, contract and agency as they affect business are examined. The basic principles of the law of partnerships, companies and other bodies corporate are also introduced. Specific contracts, such as purchases and sales, leases, insurance and credit agreements are dealt with. This unit includes an introduction to various specific aspects of commercial law, including labour law, the law of unjust enrichment, the laws of trust, insolvency and administration of estates.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and define the South African Legal system, its history, structure and sources of law
  2. explain the basic rules of statutory interpretation
  3. identify, discuss and analyse the application of the law of delict, contract, agency and unjustified enrichment to a range of situations in business
  4. identify, discuss and analyse the application of the law relating to modes of payment to a range of situations in business
  5. distinguish and interpret particular nominated contracts, and analyse and discuss the application of the rules of these nominated contracts to a range of situations in business and
  6. list, describe and explain various sundry aspects of commercial law that provide the necessary background for accountants and auditors in the business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Michel Koekemoer

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Keith Jordaan

Synopsis

An introduction to the principles of the taxation of individuals, including an examination of: the basic calculation of income tax; the calculation of gross income; exempt income; allowable deductions; the calculation of net normal tax payable; salaried persons - receipts; fringe benefits; salaried persons -- specific deductions; Standard Income Tax on Employees (SITE); retirement benefits and investment income and royalties; capital gains tax. The basic principles relating to the taxation of farmers is also examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the South African taxation system as it impacts on individuals
  2. develop the capacity to calculate the tax payable by individuals.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Adrian Pilley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTW1201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Keith Jordaan

Synopsis

An introduction to the principles of the taxation of businesses, including an examination of: value-added tax (VAT); capital allowances; business income and expenses; sole traders; partnerships; companies and close corporations; credit agreements and township developers; trust income; capital gains tax; donations tax and administrative procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the South African taxation system as it impacts on businesses
  2. develop the capacity to calculate the tax payable by businesses
  3. develop an understanding of how the tax system differentiates between categories of businesses, such as sole traders, partnerships, companies, close corporations and trusts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTW1201 and BTW2121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Sugden

Synopsis

An examination is made of the basic principles of contract law which will then be applied to typical contracts found in the tourism industry. Other areas examined include booking conditions and tour brochures, misleading advertising and deceptive conduct, consumer complaints, the Travel Compensation Fund, travel and business insurance, responsibilities of travel agents and tour operators under the Travel Agents Act and the European Union Directive, employment law, and business practices.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and apply the formation and contents of contracts within tourism operations
  2. analyse and apply liability for negligence within tourism operations
  3. analyse and apply laws about consumer protection, insurance and employment, within tourism operations
  4. analyse and apply laws about tour and travel agency within tourism operations
  5. analyse and apply laws about planning and environmental issues to the development of tourism businesses
  6. critically evaluate the legal issues for the development and operation of a tourism business, and write a research paper on the topic.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Michel Koekemoer

Synopsis

An examination of business entities law at an advanced level, with emphasis on the law of partnership, company law, the law of close corporations and the law of business trusts. An examination will also be made of the law relating to specific contracts, eg: contracts of purchase, sale and lease, property transactions and credit agreements. The law pertaining to suretyship, mortgage and pledge will be examined as will the law of agency.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and describe various forms of business enterprises in South Africa
  2. provide basic legal advice regarding the choice of business form
  3. discuss, analyse and give advice on the legal structure of the partnership, company, close corporation and business trust
  4. explain and give advice on the rights and duties of the different roleplayers in the partnership, company, close corporation and business trust
  5. describe the basic common law doctrines/principles governing the various forms of business enterprises
  6. analyse and explain the interaction between the statutory law and common law in terms of the various business forms
  7. explain the effect of recent court decisions regarding the various business forms
  8. analyse a given practical situation in terms of the statutes and common law regarding the various business forms
  9. relate and interpret various sections of the statutes that affect each other.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30 %
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Michel Koekemoer

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTW1201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Shanthy Rachagan

Synopsis

The unit will focus on the law relating to corporate governance in Malaysia. It will begin with the need for good corporate governance in Malaysia and the factors that are involved in ensuring good corporate governance. It will focus on directors' duties and the need for the board to be independent of majority shareholders and their nominated directors and on the role that auditors and shareholders play in ensuring good corporate governance practices. The unit will also include the disclosure obligations of companies and how these rules are currently enforced. In all instances the essential elements of the law is examined, as are the implications of each law on business practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of companies as legal entities
  2. explain the significance of companies as entities for carrying on business in Malaysia
  3. identify and critically evaluate how Malaysian legislation and relevant case law affects the internal and external regulation of companies
  4. demonstrate an awareness of corporate legal theory and law reform.
  5. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of corporate law in the context of the changing needs of the community
  6. apply critical thinking, problem solving and presentation skills to individual and/or group activities dealing with corporate law and demonstrate in an individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered by BTW2213.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination (3 hours): 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Shanthy Rachagan

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC2213, BTC2210, BTW2220, BTF2220, BTG2220, LAW4171


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr. Chenxia Shi

Synopsis

Topics include the Corporations Law scheme; the role and functions of the Australian Securities and Investments Commission; the concept of limited liability; the effect of registration; the corporate constitution; the company's relationship with outsiders; share and loan capital; regulation of public fund raising; duties of directors, officers and promoters; rights of members and minority shareholder protection; forms of corporate insolvency administrations, particularly as they affect creditors, officers and shareholders; trusts, trustees, beneficiaries and third parties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in the internal and external regulation of companies and how they may be used
  2. explain the nature of trusts, the way they operate, and the rights and obligations of people involved in or dealing with trusts
  3. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  4. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of corporate law in the context of the changing needs of the community.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Chenxia Shi

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC2210, BTC2213, BTW2213, BTF2220, BTG2220, LAW4171


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Gerald Acquaah-Gaisie

Synopsis

An overview of conduct that constitutes criminality in the business world. It draws together from the various areas of business law and taxation provisions governing inappropriate conduct within corporate entities, which have the potential to attract criminal and/or other serious sanctions. It discusses the mechanisms for detecting and penalising such offences and the possible penalties.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the nature and causes of corporate crime
  2. identify various types of corporate criminality
  3. identify the laws that govern corporate criminality
  4. describe the penalties for the various types of corporate criminality
  5. formulate and implement a compliance program to minimise criminal and/or other misconduct in a given corporation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Gerald Acquaah-Gaisie

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTF2223, BTG2223


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vanitha Karean

Synopsis

The unit introduces students to the legal framework within which individual employment relations operate in Malaysia and Australia. Topics include important workplace relations issues like the rights and duties underpinning the contract of employment, unfair dismissal, constructive dismissal, discrimination and occupational health and safety law. Selected International Labour Organisation Conventions are analysed in relation to aspects of current employment protection law and policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the legal framework that regulates the relationship between employer and employee in Malaysia and Australia
  2. define and analyse the scope of the contract of employment
  3. evaluate the nature of rights and duties within the employment relationship
  4. discuss the various types of workplace dismissals
  5. explain the role and influence of the International Labour Organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Haemala Thanasegaran

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC2720, BTF2991, BTG2241, BTW3241


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Adrian Pilley

Synopsis

An introduction to the principles of the taxation, including an examination of: gross income, special inclusions, exempt income, allowable deductions, special deductions, fringe benefits, retirement benefits and the taxation of individuals, focusing on the South African tax law. This unit is a requirement for those students following the route to the qualification of a Chartered Accountant (South Africa).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and explain various aspects of the South African taxation system
  2. determine what is included in taxable income
  3. evaluate and determine what is exempt from taxable income
  4. identify and calculate the special and general deductions that are allowed against taxable income
  5. identify and describe fringe benefits and calculate how they are taxed
  6. identify and describe retirement benefits and calculate how they are taxed
  7. calculate the tax payable for individuals and other entities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Adrian Pilley

Prerequisites

BTW1201 and AFW1002


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Ms Elsa Satkunasingam

Synopsis

The Unit will focus on the law relating to corporate governance in Malaysia. It will begin with the need for good corporate governance in Malaysia and the factors that are involved in ensuring good corporate governance. It will focus on directors duties and the need for the board to be independent of majority shareholders and their nominated directors and on the role that auditors and shareholders play in ensuring good corporate governance practices. The Unit will also include the disclosure obligations of companies and how these rules are currently enforced. In all instances the essential elements of the law is examined, as are the implications of each law on business practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the political, economic and social factors that contribute towards corporate governance in public listed and government linked companies in Malaysia
  2. describe and analyse the role that directors, auditors, creditors and shareholders as well as the public play in achieving high corporate governance standards
  3. demonstrate awareness of latest developments upholding good corporate governance in foreign jurisdictions
  4. critically analyse the impact if these latest developments are implemented in Malaysia.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book) 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Elsa Satkunasingam

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)

Synopsis

The Unit will explore current corporate governance issues in Malaysia and selected Asian developing countries and will involve a comparative study of how developed jurisdictions (Australia, UK,US and Singapore) have resolved these issues. The focus is on issues the role of the board of directors, auditors, shareholders and whistleblowers. The unit will highlight problems and resolutions to improve corporate governance in Malaysia.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce the role of the various stakeholders in upholding good corporate governance
  2. study the impact of regulations and codes in Corporate Governance and the viability of self-regulation in various jurisdictions
  3. address current issues faced by these stakeholders and the resolution to these issues
  4. propose checks and balances to improve corporate governance in developing countries

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Elsa Satkunasingam

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Haemala Thanasegaran

Synopsis

The topics are similar to those covered by the equivalent Australian income tax law unit BTC3150, but lectures and tutorials will concentrate on the legislation and case law which applies in Malaysia. Topics include background to the Malaysian legal and taxation systems; income for businesses, individuals, companies, partnerships and trusts; deductions; capital allowances (the Malaysian equivalent of depreciation); personal reliefs; tax incentives; the limited capital gains tax; tax administration and tax avoidance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation concept of income
  2. critically assess the major income and deduction components comprising taxable income
  3. identify the main taxable entitles and calculate how they are taxed
  4. analyse and apply the main administrative aspects of income tax law
  5. demonstrate an awareness of current income tax developments in Malaysia.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Haemala Thanasegaran

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTC3153


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Nicola Charwat

Synopsis

The law affecting Australian enterprises engaged in international business. Topics include international trade conventions; import and export procedures; the sale of goods; carriage of goods by sea and air; bills of lading and the Hague-Visby rules; finance of international trade; payment and documentary credits; the use of negotiable instruments in international trade; international commercial arbitration and marine insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and analyse the international legal framework in which trade between nations take place
  2. identify and analyse the legal issues in an international trade context
  3. identify, analyse and apply the laws to solve legal problems that arise from international commercial transactions
  4. identify and analyse the laws relating to international contracts of sale, finance of international trading transactions, international carriage of goods, insurance in international trade and dispute resolution in international trade
  5. identify and analyse the form and nature of documents used in international trade including contracts of sale, shipping documentation, invoices, insurance policies, bills of exchange, documentary collections and letter of credits.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Nicola Charwat

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 or BTW1201 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC2190, BTF3201, BTG3201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Ken Devos (Berwick), Dr Ashraf Kazi (Gippsland), Mr Jonathan Teoh (Peninsula).

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to Australian income tax law and practice. Topics include: Australian tax jurisdictional issues, assessable income from personal exertion, property and business, capital gains tax and fringe benefits tax, exempt income, deductions, both general and specific, GST, individual offsets.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the constitutional and administrative framework in which the federal taxation system operates
  2. describe fundamental tax concepts, such as the concepts of income, capital, deductible expenses, residence of the taxpayer, source of income and derivation of income
  3. critically analyse the fundamental distinctions between
    1. receipts of income and capital and
    2. deductible and non-deductible outgoings
  4. describe the special treatment given to different types of taxpayers, such as companies, trusts, partnerships and non-residents
  5. analyse, and apply, legislative provisions and court decisions relating to taxation matters.

To practice as a tax agent in Australia, an accountant is expected to be registered with the Commonwealth Government's Tax Practitioner's Board. This unit has been designed to satisfy the requirements of one of two courses required for registration as a tax agent.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ken Devos (First semester)
Mr Jonathan Teoh (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3150, BTF3931, BTG3221


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Ashraf Kazi

Synopsis

Aspects of ultra vires, natural justice, jurisdictional error, delegated legislation, Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act, administrative appeals tribunal, freedom of information legislation, remedies and orders relevant to business and commerce, ASIC and ATO examples where possible.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the important elements in Administrative Law and how they may be used
  2. analyse hypothetical case studies and formulate a legal argument by the application of statute and case law
  3. critically evaluate the effectiveness of aspects of Administrative law in the context of the changing needs of the community.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ashraf Kazi

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTG3240


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Anne O'Rourke

Synopsis

Legal implications of staff management decisions, individual employer-employee relationship, contract of employment, termination law including unfair dismissals, health and safety law in the workplace, vicarious liability agreements, awards and industrial action, constitutional considerations and discrimination law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. extend their knowledge and comprehension of the legal framework governing workplace relations in Australia
  2. evaluate the principles underlying employment laws and assess the law's impact on the employment relationship
  3. demonstrate a working knowledge of employment law issues through the application of legal principles to a range of hypothetical scenarios
  4. identify and analyse current issues involving legal regulation of the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Anne O'Rourke

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTF2991, BTG3241, BTW2241


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Anthony van der Westhuysen

Synopsis

Taxation of business income and abnormal receipts. Business tax reform including the Goods and Service Tax and Ralph Committee reforms. Tax planning issues on acquisition and disposal of a business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation issues associated with specific regimes including the Alienation of Personal Services Income Regime, the Simplified Tax System and the PAYG Systems
  2. analyse the tax frameworks that apply when conducting a business through companies, trusts, partnerships or sole proprietors
  3. analyse business transactions in the context of the Goods and Services Tax
  4. apply the appropriate taxation rules that govern purchases and sales of a business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Anthony van der Westhuysen

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG3221 or BTW3221 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3350, BTF3951, BTG3241


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Shanthy Rachagan (Malaysia)

Synopsis

Aspects of the legal environment that affects financial decisions, transactions and relationships. Topics covered are chosen from the laws regulating the financing implications of different forms of business organisation; financial institutions; cheques, banking and the banker-customer relationship; electronic funds transfer; other negotiable instruments; the laws regulating business finance and security; hire-purchase and consumer credit; guarantees; bankruptcy and insolvency law, and debt recovery.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the core legal principles underlying the banker customer contract
  2. discuss the legal nature and uses of cheques
  3. define the legal issues in taking security for a loan with reference to mortgages and company charges
  4. examine key aspects of corporate and personal insolvency and its consequences
  5. evaluate and apply this knowledge to real world, practical examples.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Shanthy Rachagan

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3200, BTC4320


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Sugden

Synopsis

This unit involves a study of the legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. It examines the impact of common law, legislation and self-regulating codes of practice in the market place. Particular topics covered include intellectual property rights, product development and promotion, product safety and quality, the regulation of unfair and anti-competitive conduct and electronic marketing and the law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse, and apply the laws protecting intellectual property to the development and marketing of a range of new products and ideas
  2. analyse and apply the consumer protection laws to a range of marketing and advertising strategies
  3. analyse and apply the laws regulating a range of marketing practices including pricing and distribution
  4. formulate the legal protection of a product or idea using the intellectual property, marketing and consumer protection laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3.5 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Paul Sugden

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTC3300, BTF3181, MKC3300


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Ms Jeanne Nel and Ms Nazreen Shaik-Peremanov

Synopsis

An introduction to the principles of estate duty and planning. An examination of the administration of deceased estates and insolvent estates including the following: Principles of testate and intestate succession, role of the Master of the High Court, executor's role and the executor's account, application for sequestration and acts of insolvency, consequences of sequestration, role of the trustee, trustee's accounts, preferential creditors, encumbered assets, contribution, claim withdrawal, composition, insolvent deceased estates and partnerships, grounds for and methods of winding-up companies and close corporations, judicial management and rehabilitation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply principles of testate and intestate succession
  2. develop an understanding of the role of the Master of the High Court and the executors role over the executors account
  3. examine the laws applicable to encumbered assets, claim withdrawal and grounds for and methods of winding-up companies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTW1201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Michel Koekemoer

Synopsis

An examination of the Law of Negotiable Instruments, which will include an analysis of the concept of negotiability and the law relating to cheques and bills of exchange. Then will follow an examination of the Law of Insurance; the Law of Insolvency; Labour Law, including that which pertains to individual contracts of employment and collective bargaining; Alternative Dispute Resolution available to businesses seeking to settle disputes by means other than litigation; and the Law pertaining to money laundering and asset forfeiture. In all instances the essential elements of the law is examined, as are the implications of each law on business practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the law of negotiable instruments
  2. analyse the Laws governing insolvency and labour law, including that which pertains to individual or collective contracts of employment
  3. examine alternative dispute resolution available to businesses by means other than litigation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, closed-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Michel Koekemoer

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTW1201


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Adrian Pilley

Synopsis

This unit introduces value added tax (VAT) and includes an examination of the taxation of non-residents, farmers, sole traders and partnerships, close corporations and companies. It also includes an examination of capital allowances and trading stock. This unit is a requirement for those students following the route to the qualification of a Chartered Accountant (South Africa).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the rules and sections of the act regarding value added tax (VAT) and to apply them to calculate VAT in a variety of business transactions and practical scenarios
  2. calculate the tax payable on businesses
  3. differentiate between categories of business for tax purposes, such as sole traders, partnerships, companies and close corporations
  4. explain and describe how farmers are taxed and calculate the tax payable by farmers
  5. identify and explain capital allowances available and calculate these allowances and
  6. explain and describe how non-residents are taxed in South Africa and calculate the relevant taxes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTW2301 before undertaking this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Adrian Pilley

Synopsis

This unit introduces the accounts of executors, liquidators and trustees and examines how estates and trusts are taxed. It also includes an examination of: capital gains tax, donations tax, employees' and provisional tax, tax avoidance and administrative procedures, including objection and appeals. This unit is a requirement for those students following the route to the qualification of a Chartered Accountant (South Africa).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and explain the South African executors' accounts and prepare such accounts
  2. calculate the tax payable on estates and trusts
  3. describe and interpret the provisions regarding employees' tax and provisional tax
  4. describe and explain how the tax system is administered and the process of objection and appeal
  5. explain the difference between tax avoidance and tax evasion and apply the relevant
principles in a particular given set of circumstances
  1. explain the provisions regarding donations tax and calculate donations tax
  2. identify transactions that will be subject to capital gains tax and calculate the taxable amount in terms of the relevant provisions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Adrian Pilley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Student must have passed BTW3302 before undertaking this unit.

Co-requisites

One 2-hour lecture and one 1-hour tutorial per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Paul Sugden; Ms Vanitha Karean (Malaysia)

Synopsis

The ease and manner in which information can now be transmitted, accessed and transacted around the world instantaneously by the interconnection of computers (the Internet); legal methods by which the law has attempted to regulate this 'flow' of information and its use in business and commerce will be explored. Contract law (in particular international and computer contracts), intellectual property (including copyright law) and privacy issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the international agreements establishing the internet
  2. analyse and apply the laws affecting Internet business transactions to a range of commercial situations
  3. compare and contrast the forms of regulation used by governments to regulate conduct on the internet
  4. identify, analyse and apply the laws providing protection to the Internet itself as a computer program.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Gerald Acquaah-Gaisie

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed BTG1200 or BTW1200 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTC3640, BTF3641, BTG3641, LAW7213


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Latimer

Synopsis

This unit involves a study of the legal framework regulating the securities and futures industries, which derives from the interaction of statute law, case law, ASIC releases, ASX and SFE rules. It focuses on the regulation of financial services intermediaries by statute, case law and administration by ASIC, the ASX and the SFE. Topics include market regulation by ASIC, the ASX and the SFE, liability for misstatements and non-disclosure about financial products, licensing of dealers and investment advisers, the relationship of broker and client, conduct of securities and futures business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of the regulation of financial markets
  2. analyse the co-regulatory roles of ASIC and ASX
  3. describe the effect of misleading or deceptive conduct in financial markets
  4. evaluate the impact of co-regulation on the financial services industry
  5. critically analyse the regulation of market manipulation and insider trading.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Latimer

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BTF3091


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Anthony van der Westhuysen

Synopsis

Topics covered include taxation of business entities, tax planning issues on acquisition and disposal of a business, retirement (superannuation) and estate planning, tax administration and anti-avoidance and tax agent ethics.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the taxation issues associated with specific business regimes including the Small Business Tax System
  2. analyse the tax frameworks that apply when conducting a business through Companies, Trusts, Partnerships or Sole Proprietors
  3. analyse business transactions in the tax administration and anti- avoidance rules
  4. apply the appropriate taxation rules that govern purchases and sales of a business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours, open-book): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Ken Devos

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: BTC3150, BTG3221 or BTW3221before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

BTF3951, BTG3242, BTW3242, BTC3350


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Synopsis

This unit offers students an option to complete a unit by way of a research project. The project requires a student to undertake guided research on a topic taken from a business law and taxation unit. Students must complete a paper of between 5000 to 8000 words.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a development in the contemporary commercial environment that presents business law or taxation issues
  2. research, analyse and evaluate those issues
  3. construct a framework to discuss the results
  4. prepare a research paper.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Contact hours

12 hours per week private research

Prerequisites

Students must receive permission before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this unit allows a student independently to gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business law and/or taxation as a foundation for the completion of an honours project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Contact hours

Research based

Off-campus attendance requirements

On campus only

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business law and/or taxation as a foundation to the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the Honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the student's research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Contact hours

Research based

Off-campus attendance requirements

On campus only

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in Bachelor of Commerce (Honours) to undertake this unit.


18 points, SCA Band 3, 0.375 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Brendan Sweeney

Synopsis

Under the guidance of an academic supervisor, this subject allows a student to independently gain in-depth discipline knowledge in a selected area of business law and/or taxation as a foundation to the completion of an honours research project. The student will complete a prescribed list of readings, undertake further independent literature studies, and complete other learning activities and assessments considered appropriate for the selected field of study.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the literature in order to develop subject matter expertise beyond the specific focus of the honours project
  2. synthesise the literature to inform the students research topic of choice
  3. critically evaluate academic literature and present in written and oral form key arguments related to the research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Contact hours

Research based.

Off-campus attendance requirements

On campus only.

Prerequisites

Must be enrolled in course 0181 - Honours degree of Bachelor of Commerce.


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Brendan Sweeney

Synopsis

This unit discusses the fundamental theoretical premises that can frame legal and regulatory research. It explores ways of formulating research question(s) and hypotheses, and identifies assumptions and theories that are relevant in the development of a conceptual framework for research. The topics discussed will cover principles of legal and social scientific methods, such as relational theory, comparative law, regulatory theory, social constructivism, systems theory and critical legal theory). Stress will be placed on developing argument analysis (e.g. avoiding fallacies in reasoning, evaluating and constructing sound arguments). These discussions will clarify the theoretical and practical underpinnings of research design, inform subsequent analyses of how to select different research methods (qualitative, quantitative, mixed), and illustrate key issues associated with the main arguments development in research work. The unit will also examine ways of presenting a compelling theoretical and practical case for legal and regulatory research. Finally, students will prepare a research proposal and report.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. enhance students' awareness of the core theoretical and methodological perspectives that underpin research about law and regulation at the honours level
  2. increase students' understanding of the principles involved in producing sound complex arguments as required in writing an approved research project
  3. consider and evaluate material presented in the research and methodology seminar series
  4. apply theoretical and methodological knowledge in the preparation of a research proposal for a research project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Brendan Sweeney

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course BBus(Hons) (Taxation) to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

BTF4900


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Booth (First semester)

Synopsis

The nature and scope of economics; different economic systems; economic policy analysis and evaluation; main bodies of economic thought; examples of household, business and government economic decision problems; consumer choice, product demand and factor supply; enterprise choice, product supply and factor demand; market analyses of contemporary issues; competitive market long run equilibrium; market power; market failure and concerns for efficiency and equity; government involvement in the Australian economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the 'economic way of thinking' about a broad range of individual, business and government choices and decisions
  2. apply economic principles to explain and analyse Australian economic institutions, economic decisions and performance
  3. make informed and critical assessment and criticism of the public debate on many economic policy issues
  4. proceed to the study of other economics units which have an introduction to microeconomics as a prerequisite.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ross Booth (Semester 1)
Dr Dinusha Dharmaratna (Semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stephen Miller

Synopsis

The scope of macroeconomics and its microeconomic underpinnings; aggregation problems; partial equilibrium and general equilibrium analysis; the circular flow of income as a general equilibrium model; the mutual dependence of financial flows and flows of goods and services; sectoral composition of aggregate demand; business and investment behaviour; government spending and taxation; external balance and determination of current and capital accounts; labour market and aggregate supply; money, credit, and the conduct of monetary policy; inflation and unemployment; macroeconomic effects of deregulation in Australia.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret recent movements in key economic indicators of the Australian and other economies and appreciate some of the definitional and measurement problems associated with the available data
  2. understand the importance of distinguishing between the short-run and long-run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  3. apply economic analysis appropriate to achieving an understanding of the working of the macroeconomy
  4. recognise the significance of Australia's economy in relation to the rest of the world and the implications of this interdependence for the balance of payments and exchange rate.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Miller

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000 is recommended

Prohibitions

ECF1200, ECG1102, ECW1102


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Klaus Abbink (First semester)

Synopsis

Theory of consumer choice, including applications to income-leisure choice and intertemporal consumption; isoquant theory of production; allocative efficiency and competition and monopoly; models of monopolistic competition and oligopoly; input pricing; microeconomic policies to address problems of market failure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse decision-making by individual consumers and producers
  2. understand decision making in game-theoretic set ups
  3. analyse price determination in product and input markets under various conditions
  4. analyse and critically evaluate policies designed to affect individual behaviour and market outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Klaus Abbink (First semester)
Professor Nicholas Feltovich (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or permission


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yew Siew Ling (Semester 1)

Synopsis

Keynesian macroeconomics; the open-economy, IS-LM framework and the aggregate demand-aggregate supply framework as a basis for more advanced macroeconomic analysis; principles of monetary and fiscal policy and problems of implementation; alternative theories of aggregate supply; new classical macroeconomics and the implications of imperfect information; new Keynesian macroeconomics and the implications of labour market rigidities; explaining and correcting inflation and unemployment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse systematically the forces that determine changes in macroeconomic performance and living standards in Australia
  2. understand the relationship between the domestic economy and the international economic environment, as reflected in the behaviour of the balance of payments and exchange rates
  3. appraise critically the issues underlying important contemporary policy debates in Australia and elsewhere
  4. appreciate the nature and relevance of some significant recent developments in macroeconomics
  5. engage in rigorous economic analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination (2 hours): 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Siew Ling Yew (Semester 1)
Michael White (Semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1100

Prohibitions

ECC9010, ETC2110


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Australia (Other) Second semester 2012 (Off-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael White

Synopsis

Issues include economic growth and inflation in a global context; international comparisons of policy and performance; objectives of monetary policy and central bank independence; forecasting and practical problems in policy making; financial markets and economic indicators.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the way in which economists apply economic theory and institutional knowledge of relevant parts of the economy to analyse government macroeconomic policy options, and to make recommendations on policy actions
  2. understand and critically evaluate current policy debate on issues of macroeconomic policy
  3. evaluate the contributions and limitations of economic analysis for helping to understand and to evaluate macroeconomic policy options.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 25%
Examination (2 hours): 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Michael White

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000 and ECC1100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Edwyna Harris

Synopsis

Application of microeconomic theory to environmental problems; the relationship between the economy and the environment; markets and governments as alternative signalling and incentive mechanisms; limitations of market and government coordination of natural resource use. Policy options for solid wastes and recycling, local and global pollution problems, protection of biodiversity, management of stocks of fish and other 'commons' resources. Valuation of unpriced environmental goods and cost-benefit analysis of environmental changes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain how the economy and the environment interact
  2. understand the economic concepts of property rights, externalities and non-excludability, and how they are linked to environmental problems
  3. appreciate that deficiencies in both market and government coordination of resource use contribute to environmental problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Edwyna Harris

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Synopsis

Issues include the microeconomics of firm, the microeconomics of the welfare state, and the microeconomics of transitional economies such as China. Microeconomic difficulties in the public sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the way in which economists apply economic theory to analyse how institutions and government microeconomic policies affect economic performance, as well as how such analysis informs their policy recommendations
  2. understand and critically evaluate current policy debates on issues of microeconomic policy and institutions
  3. evaluate the contributions and limitations of economic analysis for helping to understand and evaluate microeconomic policy options.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000 or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Booth

Synopsis

This unit will cover: demand for sport, sports revenues, the economics of sports broadcasting, the pricing of sports events; why professional team sports leagues form, whether clubs are profit-maximisers or win-maximisers, remedies for competitive imbalance such as player drafts, salary caps and revenue sharing, the role of player associations in professional sport; government subsidies in sport, the economic impact of sports events, stadium financing; case studies of professional team sports leagues in Australia, North America and Europe; globalisation in professional sport, future directions in sport.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the so-called 'peculiar' characteristics of sports markets and the policy conclusions that follow
  2. analyse the role economic incentives play in determining the behaviour of controlling bodies, leagues, clubs, players, fans, sponsors, the media and government
  3. compare and contrast the key features of various sports markets in Australia and overseas
  4. use the economic analysis learnt to develop appropriate policies to address economic problems in the sports industry.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Booth

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000

Prohibitions

ECF2450, ECW2450


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Edwyna Harris

Synopsis

The unit surveys the source of economic development during the nineteenth and twentieth century with an emphasis on fluctuations in growth rates. Topics include analysis of climate, geography, institutions, human capital and technology on long-run growth. These topics are intended to enhance students' understanding of why some countries are rich whilst others are poor.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the general outline of economic development
  2. critically examine the major explanations of the dynamics of growth and change in the economy over the last two centuries
  3. develop analytical, written and oral skills by writing long essays
  4. acquire an historical understanding of current economic circumstances.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Edwyna Harris

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECC3510, ECC4351


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Synopsis

A basic pillar of economic theory is that behaviour is governed by the response to incentives (what psychologists term 'extrinsic motivation'). But 'intrinsic motivation' plays a great role. People conceive incentives differently depending on the context. The unit elaborates on the interface of incentives and psychological factors such as bounded rationality, self-deception, weakness of will, and regret, to understand the complexity of human motivation. The unit also focuses on how organisations harness human motivation in the face of asymmetry of information (which usually undermines cooperation) and bounded rationality.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. investigate the interplay of psychological variables with economic incentives
  2. investigate the different meaning of rationality
  3. investigate how rationality, and its multi-level meaning, relate to the emotions
  4. investigate why the rational choice approach is useful even when people behave
irrationally
  1. investigate how could self-deception and self-rationalisation be possible if people are basically rational.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000

Prohibitions

MGC2600


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Jennifer Watts

Synopsis

This unit will examine the market for health care. Health care expenditure is rising in all countries so increasingly governments, as the largest funders of health care, have to make difficult decisions concerning the allocation and distribution of health services. The unit will examine the causes of market failure including the role of information, agency and supplier induced demand. The behaviour of health care providers including doctors, hospitals and the pharmaceutical industry, and the role of private health insurance will be explored. Lastly the unit will examine the main issues confronting all nations, particularly equity and social justice and the consumption of "bads".

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an understanding of the nature of health as a produced commodity and the implications for resource allocation in health care
  2. identify the sources of market failure in health and health insurance and the issues involved in health system design
  3. apply the concepts of agency and incomplete contracts for the analysis of problems in the demand and supply of health care and the organisation of health care funding
  4. apply the concepts of efficiency and equity in health and to design and negotiate ways in which the funding of health care can impact on these objectives
  5. use the concept of net benefits to evaluate a health care intervention and present the results in both oral and written form.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination (2 hours): 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jennifer Watts

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Simon Angus

Synopsis

This unit examines the process of economic development and its effects on prosperity, poverty and sustainability. The unit begins by studying the sources of prosperity via economic growth in the modern era, with particular reference to the Great Divergence in incomes that started during the 1800s. Second, the unit asks why some economic systems have prospered, whilst others have declined by turning its attention to disparate experiences of world-wide economic growth such as poverty and starvation. Finally we study the effects and prospects for future economic development in the context of environmental sustainability and climate change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to introduce economic analysis as a key tool in understanding global movements of capital, labour and goods and services
  2. to use this analysis to identify the underlying causes of economic prosperity, poverty and environmental degradation in the modern global economy
  3. to critically analyse the sources of globalisation at the beginning of the 20th century and in the modern era
  4. to equip students with the economic tools to assess current ideas that aim to alleviate global poverty and secure environmental sustainability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2.5 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Simon Angus

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 1, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael White

Synopsis

The role of economic institutions and the process of institutional change, including the role of interest groups in promoting such change. An overview of Australian economic development sketches the changing environment within which such institutions operate. Key institutions, and changes in institutional structures over time, in selected sectors of the Australian economy, including the agricultural and manufacturing sectors, the labour market and the financial sector, as well as the institutions central to competition and trade policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000 and ECC1100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anke Leroux

Synopsis

This unit gives students an understanding of the economic dimensions of climate change. It does this by examining how climate change directly will impact on economies, and by examining how climate change mitigation policies, such as emissions trading schemes will impact on economies. It discusses and evaluates Australia's approaches to climate change mitigation. Finally, the subject explores the problems in securing international agreement for action to address climate change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide students with an understanding of the possible impacts of climate change on economies
  2. analyse the economic costs of climate change, and how industries can adapt to climate change at minimum cost
  3. provide students with an understanding of how economic instruments such as carbon taxes and emissions trading schemes can mitigate climate change
  4. analyse how key industries such as electricity and transport can respond to climate
change policies and lessen emissions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anke Leroux

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC1000
It is recommended that students complete ECC1100

Co-requisites

It is recommended that students complete ECC1100

Prohibitions

ECC4364


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Janine Dixon

Synopsis

The theory and applications of applied general equilibrium modelling. Introduction to associated issues in data compilation and computing. The study uses elementary calculus and matrix algebra.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an introductory understanding of all aspects of applied general equilibrium (AGE) economics - theory, data, computing and application
  2. understand how AGE models represent linkages in the economy between industries, households, the government and foreigners
  3. explain, using an AGE model, the structural and aggregate effects on the economy of shocks such as change in protection, real wage rates, tax rates, environmental policies, and capital inflow.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination (3 hours): 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Janine Dixon

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent; or permission

Prohibitions

ECC4365


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Larry Cook

Synopsis

Economics of financial assets, markets, intermediaries, regulation and innovation; money aggregates; behaviour of interest rates; loan funds analysis; risk and term structure of interest rates; adverse selection and moral hazard; independence of central banks; determinants of the money supply and the conduct of monetary policy in Australia; theories of money demand; money supply and economic activity; Keynesian-monetarist debate; transmission mechanisms of monetary policy; money and inflation; monetary implications of budget deficits; volatility in foreign exchange markets; the international financial system; capital controls; role of the IMF; international monetary policy strategy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. principal issues in contemporary monetary theory and policy
  2. nature and functions of the monetary system in a developed economy
  3. factors governing the relationship between monetary forces and economic activity
  4. principles, techniques and problems of implementing monetary policies;
  5. current controversies in monetary policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 25%
Examination (2 hours): 75%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Larry Cook

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC4366


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Ranjan Ray

Synopsis

This unit provides an analytical framework for studying economic problems of developing countries. We will examine how standard economic theories apply in the presence of market failures and weak formal institutions that characterise developing countries. The key focus is on general problems facing developing countries rather than any specific country or region. It examines specific issues and policy problems that are currently faced by developing nations, including issues such as inequality, poverty, population growth, rural-urban migration, human capital accumulation, gender bias, markets in developing countries, credit constraints and risk and insurance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply basic microeconomic principles and analytical tools to understand, interpret and assess the transport sector and government transport policies
  2. appreciate the special characteristics of the transport sector and the operation of transport markets
  3. recognise the presence and influence of economies of scale and scope, joint costs, price discrimination, peak and off-peak pricing and factors which shape the derived nature of transport demand and the inner-relationships between transport markets and other markets, including land markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ranjan Ray

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000

Prohibitions

ECC4367


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paola Labrecciosa

Synopsis

Investigation of economic interaction between countries in the context of international exchanges of commodities and assets. Topics include the balance of payments, nominal and real exchange rate determination, international capital movements, foreign debt, structural reform and adjustment policies in the open economy, the gains from international trade, inter-industry trade, tariff policies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. essential features of international trade and asset exchanges
  2. effects of international commodity and capital flows, and of protectionist policies, on domestic economic welfare and other objectives; the foreign exchange market and the specific roles of exchange rates in asset markets and commodity markets
  3. implications of international interdependence for the conduct of national stabilisation policies and thus be able to form factual assessments and constructive criticism of public policy and debate concerning open economy issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 20%
Examination (2 hours): 80%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paola Labrecciosa

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC4369


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Youjin Hahn

Synopsis

Contrasting theoretical models of the labour market, with emphasis on the neo-classical model, wage efficiency model and internal labour markets; analysis of the role of trade unions in the labour market; theory of discrimination in the labour market; contrasting theoretical views of the Phillips curve; application of this analysis to a discussion of issues with an emphasis on contemporary issues such as labour market flexibility, discrimination and unemployment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. employers' incentives and behaviour that determine the labour demand curve, implications of minimum wage laws, and effects of technological change on labour demand
  2. various aspects of workers' labour supply behaviour such as whether to work for pay as opposed to consuming leisure or working at home without pay, the choice of occupations with different characteristics, workers' decision to invest in human capital and other investments designed to improve their earning capabilities, and various policy applications that affect workers' choice between work and leisure
  3. how the compensation of workers can be structured to create incentives for greater productivity.
  4. labour market effects of unions and the contemporary issue of growing income inequality.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination (2 hours): 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Youjin Hahn

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC4371


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Synopsis

The work of Richard Cantillon, David Hume, Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Thomas Malthus and Karl Marx with special reference to the economics of value, distribution and accumulation. The work of W S Jevons, Alfred Marshall and J M Keynes with special reference to economic policies proposed by those writers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss critically how different economists in the past understood and analysed the economic problem
  2. compare the work on founders of economics such as Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Thomas Malthus, Stanley Jevons, Karl Marx, Alfred Marshall, and others
  3. discuss critically diverse theories of value, growth, rent, and decline of economic society
  4. be familiar with primary sources relating to the major writings that shaped the evolution of economic analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Elias Khalil

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000 and ECC2010

Prohibitions

ECC4380


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Ranjan Ray

Synopsis

The relationship between the public and private sectors is explored from the perspective of both public finance and political economy. Theories of public expenditure and revenue generation are introduced to assess the proper scope of the public sector. Additionally, theories of public choice are presented to examine the effectiveness and decision-making process of the public sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the basic economic concepts and principles applied in the public finance area
  2. analyse specific policy issues in the area of public expenditure and taxation from the perspectives of both traditional public finance and public choice
  3. critically evaluate contemporary public debate on topics in public finance;
  4. understand the usefulness and limitations of economic analysis in the public finance area
  5. identify both market failure and government failure and understand the causes of each.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ranjan Ray

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000

Prohibitions

ECC4381


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paola Labrecciosa

Synopsis

Economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers, and with emphasis on Australian industry and regulation; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, corporatisation, privatisation and deregulation; criteria for efficient industry and efficient industry policy; methods for the practical analysis of the performance of industries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the basis for competition and rationale for regulation, and the basis of different theories of regulation
  2. explain the arguments for and against privatisation
  3. understand the main features of National Competition Policy in Australia, including its impact on segments of society such as rural Australia
  4. understand the variety of approaches to competition policies from the international perspective
  5. critically evaluate attempts to increase competition in particular industries, such as aviation, electricity, telecommunications and other relevant industries, where there are ongoing reforms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paola Labrecciosa

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECC1000, ECC1100 and ECC2000 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

ECC4383, ECX3900


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Synopsis

The unit will cover, in mathematical terms, many of the areas treated more intuitively in first-year microeconomics, eg: consumer demand, the theory of the firm, equilibrium and Pareto optimum. However, a significant portion of the lectures will deal with topics not covered earlier, such as non-linear programming, game theory, and dynamic optimisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse mathematically many of the basic economic problems introduced in earlier years
  2. apply optimisation analysis to a range of other economic topics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2000 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC4384


0 points, SCA Band 3, 0.000 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Synopsis

This is an unweighted unit. An honours grade qualifies a student to proceed to fourth-year honours.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:
1. convey an assessment of prospective honours students' overall performance during the third year of their undergraduate course.

Assessment

Based on the student's performance in all third-year subjects

Prerequisites

Available only to students eligible to take honours in the Department of Economics (economics stream)

Co-requisites

ECC3855 and normally five other third-year economics units


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Simon Angus and Dr Brett Parris

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to enable students to understand some of the complexities of interdisciplinary policy problems, particularly in the areas of sustainable development, and to enable them to design and undertake integrated modelling exercises for themselves. A complex systems science perspective will be adopted, introducing Agent-Based Modelling (ABM) as a flexible and powerful tool for exploring solutions to complex real-world problems. The ABM approach will be demonstrated and critically assessed through several interdisciplinary, integrated economy/sustainability models. Additionally, a flexible ABM modelling platform (NetLogo) will be introduced and demonstrated.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are for students to:

  1. understand some of the complexities of interdisciplinary policy problems, particularly in the areas of sustainable development
  2. comprehend and critically assess the complex systems perspective
  3. critically evaluate agent-based models and their outputs
  4. develop and analyse an agent-based model of an integrated modelling problem
  5. undertake verification, validation, evaluation and assessment of integrated modelling outputs
  6. apply integrated modelling approaches to real-world interdisciplinary economic problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Simon Angus

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC1000 before undertaking this unit

Co-requisites

It is recommended that students study ECC2800 Prosperity, poverty and sustainability in a globalised world


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Hee-Seung Yang

Synopsis

Topics include consumer preference theory; choice; demand; technology; profit maximisation and duality; competitive general equilibrium in the context of decreasing, increasing and constant returns; two-part tariffs; expected utility; adverse selection; and moral hazard.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. upgrade their analytical skill for intermediate microeconomics
  2. appreciate and have a basic understanding of the key ideas of advanced microeconomic theory
  3. gain first hand experience in the application of microeconomic principles to the analysis of a range of economic issues
  4. gain the microeconomic techniques to undertake successfully other fourth year units and some fifth year units taught by the Department.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Hee-Seung Yang

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECX5465


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Pedro Gomis

Synopsis

Contemporary macroeconomics and recent policy debates, including market clearing and long-run equilibrium; classical dichotomy; money in the global economy; aggregate demand and price rigidity, microfoundations of macroeconomics, disequilibrium models; stock-flow interactions; wealth effects; rational expectations; policy ineffectiveness and Ricardian equivalence; money and credit; exchange rate regimes; new Keynesian macroeconomics; comovements of macro variables and macroeconomic forecasting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be aware of major recent developments in the field of macroeconomics
  2. have a basic understanding of the concepts and techniques of macroeconomic forecasting using an applied general equilibrium (AGE) model
  3. be aware of the major developments in the field of macroeconomics in the last ten years
  4. be familiar with different macroeconomic models used for policy making and their points of emphasis
  5. be able to make judicious policy predictions and undertake independent research studies in the unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Pedro Gomis

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECX5466


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paulo Santos

Synopsis

Characteristics and experience of developing countries; theories of economic growth and development; domestic and external sources of financial and human resources for development; the roles of international trade, investment, technology manufacturing and government in the development process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the distinctive environmental, technical and social characteristics of developing countries
  2. understand the processes of structural change and social change which occur during development
  3. recognise the importance of institutions, technological change, and international trade, aid, and investment for the development process
  4. have skills necessary for the critical appraisal of theories of economic development.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paulo Santos

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC3670


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Synopsis

Topics include the gains and costs of trading internationally; static and dynamic welfare effects of protection; the political economy of international trade policy; optimum policies in the presence of market power, uncertainty, and other market imperfections; trade policy instruments; strategies for trade liberalisation including regional trade agreements.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be able to analyse the effects of international trade on real income and its distribution in various market structures
  2. have a sound understanding of the allocation and welfare effects of commercial policies
  3. possess the skills necessary to evaluate critically contemporary innovations in Australia's trade policies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Christis Tombazos

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC4650 and ECC3690


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Professor Peter Forsyth

Synopsis

Outline of the Australian and overseas approaches to competition policy; the economic background to the Trade Practices Act; market definition issues; evaluation of restrictive trade practices and mergers or alliances; structural reform of industries, access and monopoly regulation.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. be able to understand and analyse critically the economic reasons for government intervention to reduce the adverse effects of restrictive trade practices;
  2. have an understanding of the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (and its predecessor, the Trade Practices Commission);
  3. be able to evaluate recent decisions from the perspectives of an economist, lawyer, policy-maker and business manager.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECX5470


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Mike White

Synopsis

Topics include Keynes' aggregate demand and supply analysis and critique of automatic adjustment in the economy; the significance of an endogenous money supply for inflation; credit, speculation and financial instability; the national saving debate; investment and income distribution; the Phillips Curve and hysteresis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the Post Keynesian framework of the economy, which draws on the work of J M Keynes and M Kalecki
  2. have a clear understanding of how the framework can be used to analyse a number of policy issues in Australia, including monetary policy, the roles of investment and saving, government budgetary strategies and income policies
  3. be able to critically analyse the framework through written work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Michael White

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Professor Russell Smyth

Synopsis

The unit applies the method of economics to the analysis of the law itself - to the structure of the common law, legal processes, legal institutions and statutory regulation, and to the impact of law on the behaviour of individuals and groups and the functioning of the economy. Topics include: is there a role for law and economics in studying the law, economics of crime and capital punishment, punitive damages, interest group theories of judicial independence and the determinants of judicial influence and prestige.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the two-way interrelationships between law and economics
  2. evaluate the key role of laws in setting the institutional framework in which economic decisions are taken and to critically evaluate current and proposed laws as determinants of economic performance
  3. critically assess the responses of households and business enterprises to current and alternative laws.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Forsyth (First semester)
Professor Russell Smyth (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course code 0181, 0024 or 0171 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

ECX5472


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Steph Miller

Synopsis

Theories of hedging and speculation; determination of spot and futures prices, and intertemporal allocation; market efficiency; expectations, including adaptive expectations and rational expectations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have an understanding of how to think about the trade-off between risk and return
  2. have the ability to read literature in financial economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Miller

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or ECX5465

Prohibitions

ECX5475


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Peter Forsyth

Synopsis

Topics include development and application of microeconomic theory for the economic evaluation of (public) sector investment projects and policies; investment analysis and criteria, discounting techniques; Pareto potential improvement criterion, shadow pricing, social discount rates, distribution issues, secondary benefits, risk and uncertainty, cost-effectiveness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply the analytical framework, economic principles and techniques required for the economic evaluation of investment projects, policies and regulations, especially those involving the public sector
  2. appreciate the welfare economic foundations upon which economic evaluation is based
  3. design studies to estimate benefits and costs, in the presence of market distortions (eg controls, taxes and externalities), and for non-marketed goods (for example, time, noise, safety).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Peter Forsyth

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC4650 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECX5479


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Synopsis

Models of decision making in the collective setting, utilising a number of tools, some of which will be familiar microeconomic ones. Economic approaches to collective decision environments, including 'new welfare economics', the 'Chicago' and 'Virginia' schools. Whenever possible, Australian policies will be examined in light of theory.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the issues and analysis of collective decisions
  2. become more discriminating observers of the political and policy environment
  3. be able to review market failures and consider the potential for solving these failures in the collective or political setting
  4. be able to examine problems of free-riding, incentives to vote, interest group influence, bureaucratic behaviour and constitutional frameworks
  5. understand the economist's role in the process of formulating public policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Vai-Lam Mui

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC3810


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Yew-Kwang Ng

Synopsis

A study of theories in welfare economics, including conditions for Pareto optimality, welfare criteria, social choice, consumer surpluses, second versus third best, externalities and public goods as well as problems of applying these theories to such areas as public utility pricing, optimal taxation, road congestion, environmental protection, and public spending.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the welfare economic foundation of public policies
  2. analyse the pros and cons, costs and benefits of economic measures and changes from the perspective of social welfare.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Yew-Kwang Ng

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Synopsis

Theories of the firm, contract, property rights structure, market structure, hierarchy, bargaining, principal-agent relationship, research and development, advertising, and entry, exit, and pricing strategy. The equilibrium implications of the internal organisation of a firm and the organisational structure of the market in relation to strategic interactions between agents, information problems and related incentive mechanisms. Basic game theory and concepts of game equilibrium applied to the analysis of opportunistic behaviour and related transactions costs.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. be familiar with the modern developments of the theory of industrial organisation
  2. enhance their knowledge of intermediate microeconomics by incorporating information and endogenous transaction costs into analysis
  3. undertake theoretical and empirical research in the field of industrial organisation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dyuti Banerjee

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC2830

Prohibitions

ECC5484


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Full year 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Liang Choon Wang

Synopsis

Topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the coordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based in their own discipline. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain experience in presenting issues of policy importance, based in their own disciplines, to non-specialist audiences in written and oral forms
  2. gain experience in analysing and discussing such issues in a seminar context
  3. become aware of the major issues involved in a range of related policy questions.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Liang Wang

Contact hours

One 1.5-hour seminar per week

Prerequisites

Admission to fourth year honours, Graduate Diploma in Economics or preliminary masters in the Departments of Economics, Econometrics or Accounting and Finance


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Professor Jeff Richardson and Ms Jenny Watts

Synopsis

A survey of theoretical issues in the economics of health systems and the major health policy issues confronting Australia. Emphasis is given to theories which differ from economic orthodoxy. Topics include market characteristics; market failure and regulation; equity and issues of social justice; demand analysis and human capital; the production of health and health care; theories of price formation; hospital models and hospital payment; optimal health insurance; and alternatives to Medicare.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have a clear understanding of the theoretical debate over the 'special' characteristics of health and the health care and health insurance markets
  2. have a clear understanding of the major theories of the demand for health care
  3. have a clear understanding of the use of economic incentives to achieve allocative and technical efficiency in the production of both health and health care services
  4. be familiar with the social and institutional characteristics of the Australian health care market and the various proposals for its reform.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Jennifer Watts

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Anthony Harris

Synopsis

Principles and techniques used in the economic evaluation of health services. Topics include effectiveness, efficiency and economic evaluation; cost benefit analysis; cost effectiveness and cost utility analysis; multi-attribute utility analysis; measuring utility; psychometric measurement theory; ethical issues in resource allocation; decision criteria; time discounting; costing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. techniques applied to the evaluation of health services and programs
  2. theoretical debates over discounting, decision criteria, and the measurement of both costs and the quality of life.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Tony Harris

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECC4650


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr George Rivers (First semester); Professor Gary Magee (Second semester)

Synopsis

Economics as an area of knowledge. Economics in a business degree. Understanding economic policy. An analysis of markets: supply and demand; consumer behaviour; firm behaviour; cost of production and profit maximisation; behaviour of firms in different market structures; evaluation of market capitalist economic systems, economic efficiency, market failure, government failure; current economic policies, competition policy, privatisation and the funding of education.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the economic behaviour of individual consumers and producers
  2. understand concepts relating to the cost of production in both the short and long run
  3. explain the determinants of price and output outcomes under different market structures in both the short and long run and the welfare implications of these outcomes
  4. describe the virtues and shortcomings of free markets
  5. have knowledge of remedies to overcome market failure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%, Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr George Rivers

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECC1000, ECG1101, ECP1100, ECW1101, PMM2020


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yi Jin

Synopsis

This unit uses aggregate demand and supply analysis as a tool for identifying and explaining the business cycle, output growth employment, inflation and the current account deficit. The investigation will illustrate the impact of the macroeconomy on decisions by firms and other economic agents in the economy and the effect of fiscal and monetary policies on business outcomes. Key strategic variables affecting decision making in the macro business environment are interest rates, inflation and the Australian dollar.

Outcomes

The learning goals associate with this unit are to:

  1. understand and evaluate the importance of factors that determine aggregate output, employment, interest rates, the average price level and the exchange rate
  2. appreciate the influence of these factors on decision making in government, business and international trade
  3. enable students to demonstrate in individual summative assessments tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70% +

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yi Jin

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECC1100, ECG1102, ECW1102


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Siang Ng

Synopsis

This unit examines the scope for policy to improve macroeconomic performance. It will cover: the cyclical behaviour of the economy; the role of monetary, fiscal and exchange rate policies in influencing economic acitivities; the implementation and operation of monetary policy; the relationship of exchange rates to monetary policy; major factors determining movements in interest rates and exchange rates in both the intermediate and long terms.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the importance of distinguishing between the short-run and long-run impacts of macroeconomic policy
  2. understand the importance of and the differences between monetary, fiscal, and exchange rate policies.
  3. be able to critically assess macroeconomic policy
  4. understand the implementation and operation of monetary policy
  5. be familiar with economic factors which are of major interest to bankers and others operating in the finance industry.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%.

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Siang Ng

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECF1200

Prohibitions

ECW2730


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Schuwalow

Synopsis

This unit will cover: demand for sport, sports revenues, the economics of sports broadcasting, the pricing of sports events; why professional team sports leagues form, whether clubs are profit maximisers or win-maximisers, remedies for competitive imbalance such as player drafts, salary caps and revenue sharing, the role of player associations in professional sport; government subsidies in sport, the economic impact of sports events, stadium financing; case studies of professional team sports leagues in Australia, North America and Europe; globalisation in professional sport, future directions in sport.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the so-called 'peculiar' characteristics of sports markets and the policy conclusions that follow
  2. analyse the role economic incentives play in determining the behaviour of controlling bodies, leagues, clubs, players, fans, sponsors, the media and government
  3. compare and contrast the key features of various sports markets in Australia and overseas
  4. apply the skills learnt to solve problems faced by sports businesses

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECF1100

Prohibitions

ECC2450, ECW2450


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Horag Choi

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international finance and trade. This includes: the importance of international finance; the balance of payments accounts; the effect of macroeconomic policies on trade balance; foreign exchange markets-spot; forward; futures and options markets; the determination of exchange rates; parity conditions; hedging and speculation in foreign exchange markets; foreign investment; trade barriers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concept of payments among nations and macroeconomic policies
  2. understand the operation of foreign exchange markets and alternative exchange rate systems
  3. understand the multinational corporations in international trade
  4. understand trade barriers: tariffs and nontariff trade barriers

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Horag Choi

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECF1100

Prohibitions

ECW2721, ECG2721


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Paul Raschky

Synopsis

Students will deepen their knowledge of the differing views of the firm. Topics include: the firm within a capitalist economic system; the macroeconomic constraints on the firm; the market structural constraints on the firm; differing perspectives of the firm - the conventional economic, technological view, the accounting, management and marketing views, the recent transaction costs and new classical view; how these different areas explain current issues such as downsizing and electronic commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and recognise the various processes involved in investment decision making;
  2. understand and explain the relevant factors behind risk analysis and risk management;
  3. understand and analyse firm pricing strategies;
  4. recognize and evaluate the various theories of the organisation known as the firm and the role of managers in such organisations; and develop an understanding of strategic games in the use of business applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paul Raschky

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECF1100

Prohibitions

PMM2020, ECW2731


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rebecca Valenzuela

Synopsis

This unit introduces economic principles underlying consumer choice and market demand; describing consumer preferences, indifference curves and budget constraints, with particular emphasis on the role of prices as conveyors of information. It introduces economic tools and concepts for the analyses of consumption choices over time, under uncertainty and/or with risk, and in markets with asymmetric information. Other topics include work-leisure choice, wage changes and the supply of labour, and the provision of public goods and environmental goods. An examination of observed economic and social outcomes from the point of view of various normative criteria completes the coverage.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand economic models of household consumption which explain the allocation of resources over a variety of goods
  2. understand the allocation of income between savings and consumption, and the allocation of expenditures over the life cycle
  3. analyse data on household expenditure patterns
  4. understand the role of government over consumer protection
  5. analyse the role and impact of e-commerce on the way consumers choose in the marketplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Rebecca Valenzuela

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECF1100 and ECF2731


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Laura Puzzello

Synopsis

The pure theory of international trade. Trade and income distribution, economic growth and changes in trade, bases for trade and gains from trade. Trade policy. Tariffs, quotas, subsidies, import discrimination and other national policies affecting trade. Trade policies in developing nations. The foreign exchange market and its impact on international trade. Models of currency crisis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an introduction to the microeconomic and macroeconomic theory underlying the discipline of international economics
  2. provide an awareness of the "open" economy
  3. provide a broad knowledge of foreign exchange markets and their role in international trade
  4. understand contemporary policy debates in the area of international trade.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Laura Puzzello

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECF1100 and ECF2731

Prohibitions

ECC3690, ECF9121 and ECW3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Judith Tennant

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics; consumer behaviour; demand and supply and the operation of markets; market efficiency and welfare; welfare effects of international trade; public sector economics; the behaviour of firms and the organisation of an industry; market structures -- perfect competition and monopoly; economies of the labour market.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theoretical foundations of economics
  2. understand generic skills essential for progression to upper level units by applying rigorous thinking and understanding to analytical geometric models
  3. appreciate economics as an evolutionary science and its ability to address, in a microeconomic framework, the persistent social and economic problems confronted by society
  4. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Judith Tennant

Prohibitions

ECW1101


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Judith Tennant

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics from a macroeconomic perspective including the following areas of study: trade in a global village, GDP as National Income and Aggregate Expenditure, savings and investment, unemployment, money and the Australian monetary system, aggregate demand and supply in the short and long run, monetary and fiscal policy including the related debates and in particular Australia as an open economy

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an insight into the product, money, labour and foreign exchange markets
  2. develop skills in the application of economic principles to wider social issues
  3. gain knowledge and understanding of the Australian economy and its operation in an international environment
  4. acquire the basis for more advanced studies in economics.
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Judith Tennant

Prohibitions

ECW1102


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Svetlana Masliuk

Synopsis

Topics include the supply of and the demand for labour, education and training, the operation of labour markets, including the role of institutions in the labour market, wage relativities, disadvantaged groups in the labour market, and the role of trade unions. Also included is a study of the macroeconomic implications of wage changes and a consideration of wages policy. Special attention is given to the current labour market conditions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the operation of labour markets by drawing on basic economic principle
  2. think critically about the implications of labour market activity for society
  3. recognise the issues involved in labour market activities through a consideration of issues such as unemployment and labour market disadvantage
  4. apply analytical skills developed through an analysis of continuing change in the labour market and labour market policy.
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Miss Svetlana Maslyuk

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECW1101 or ECG1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG9170, ECW2141


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Svetlana Masliuk

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international finance and trade. This includes the importance of international finance; the balance of payments accounts; the mechanisms for financing international trade; the effect of macroeconomic policies on trade balance; the determination of exchange rates; the operation of foreign exchange
markets and alternative exchange rate systems; foreign investment; foreign exchange risk and operating exposure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand payments among nations and macroeconomic policies to adjust balance of payments disequilibrium
  2. study the operation of foreign exchange markets and alternative exchange rate systems
  3. acquire essential skills for managing foreign exchange risk and operating exposure
  4. explain multinational corporations in international trade and the mechanisms for financing international trade, and
  5. demonstrate in the individual assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Svetlana Maslyuk

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECW1101 or ECG1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECF2721, ECW2721


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ernesto Valenzuela

Synopsis

Macroeconomic policy as it affects the open economy; policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions; analysis of policies with respect to the real exchange rate and trade balance; policy responses to assets price movements; policy goals under different international monetary systems; the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas; how policy-makers in Australia try to stabilise the economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the impact of monetary and government policies on an open economy;
  2. explain the policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions and
  3. explain how policies affect the trade balance and income;
  4. analyse policy responses to assets price movements;
  5. evaluate the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas.
  6. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ernesto Valenzuela

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECW1102 or ECG1102 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECW2120, ECW2730


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Svetlana Maslyuk

Synopsis

This subject reviews the contemporary microeconomic principles in the context most relevant to business people. Market processes, demand patterns, cost structures, market conditions, pricing policies, and the impact of regulation on business decisions are discussed. Cases and problems from the prescribed text, Australian media, and online resources illustrate how economic concepts can be applied to specific industries. Analytical techniques and quantitative tools link the concepts to measurement and managerial decision-making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how do markets work
  2. understand how do customers value products
  3. understand which production and cost measures are relevant for decision making
  4. understand how does competition affect business decisions on investment, production, and pricing in different market structures
  5. understand how important to managerial and marketing decisions are changes in foreign exchange rates, technology, incomes, government regulations, sources of energy, the balance of payments
  6. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Svetlana Maslyuk

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECW1101 or ECG1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECW2731


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ernesto Valenzuela

Synopsis

This unit is designed to analyse the effect of money on key economic variables such as interest rates, inflation, output, and on the workings of the banking sector. In addition, the unit examines the roles played by commercial banks and the Central Bank in the process of money creation and the implementation of monetary policy. The unit uses an economic approach to allow analysis of policy decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a knowledge of the theoretical structure of an open economy with particular emphasis on monetary policy formulation and implementation
  2. develop skills in analysis and prediction for the key economic variables when the economy is faced with internal and external market shocks
  3. be able to use an economic model that allows for competitive international capital markets and floating exchange rates to analyse policy measures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ernesto Valenzuela

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of ECW1101 or ECG1101 and one of ECW2120 or ECW2730 or ECG2730 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECW3143


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Svetlana Maslyuk

Synopsis

This unit considers market structures, conduct and performance from the business perspective; economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers; the variety of approaches to competition and regulation policies from the international perspective; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, deregulation and privatisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise differences in market structures and understand how those differences affect firms' competitive behaviour and performance
  2. understand how and why competition causes changes in market structures by way of mergers, acquisitions, vertical integration and diversification
  3. explain the economic rationale for competitive weapons utilised by business in contemporary competitive environment, such as barriers to entry, pricing and advertising strategies, product differentiation, and innovation
  4. explain the rationale for regulation and merits of different theories of regulation.
  5. explain the arguments for and against privatisation
  6. understand the main features of national competition policies in the countries of particular interest to Monash University in Australia and overseas
  7. critically evaluate attempts to increase competition in particular industries, e.g. aviation, electricity and telecommunications, where there are ongoing reforms.
  8. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Miss Svetlana Maslyuk

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECW2120, ECW2731 or ECG2731 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC3830, ECW3830


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anmol Ratan

Synopsis

Economics as an area of knowledge. Economics in a business degree. Understanding economic policy. An analysis of markets: supply and demand; consumer behaviour; firm behaviour; cost of production and profit maximisation; behaviour of firms in different market structures; evaluation of market capitalist economic systems, economic efficiency, market failure, government failure; current economic policies, competition policy, privatisation and the funding of education.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand theoretical concepts, analytical techniques as well as practical decision-making mechanisms and policy debates as they relate to economics issues
  2. understand the economic behaviour of individual consumers and producers and the cost of production in both the short and long runs
  3. understand the determinants of price and output outcomes under different market structures in both the short and long runs and the welfare implications of these outcomes
  4. understand virtues and shortcomings of free markets
  5. understand remedies to overcome market failure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anmol Ratan

Contact hours

6.5 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECC1000, ECW1101, PMM2020, ECF1100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Judith Tennant

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics; consumer behaviour; demand and supply and the operation of markets; market efficiency and welfare; welfare effects of international trade; public sector economics; the behaviour of firms and the organisation of an industry; market structures -- perfect competition and monopoly; economies of the labour market.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the theoretical foundations of economics
  2. understand generic skills essential for progression to upper level units by applying rigorous thinking and understanding to analytical geometric models
  3. appreciate economics as an evolutionary science and its ability to address, in a microeconomic framework, the persistent social and economic problems confronted by society
  4. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Judith Tennant

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECG1101


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Judith Tennant

Synopsis

An introduction to the study of economics from a macroeconomic perspective including the following areas of study: trade in a global village, GDP as National Income and Aggregate Expenditure, savings and investment, unemployment, money and the Australian monetary system, aggregate demand and supply in the short and long run, monetary and fiscal policy including the related debates and in particular Australia as an open economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. gain an insight into the product, money, labour and foreign exchange markets
  2. develop skills in the application of economic principles to wider social issues
  3. gain knowledge and understanding of the Australian economy and its operation in an international environment
  4. acquire the basis for more advanced studies in economics
  5. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in ECW1102.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Judith Tennant

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ECG1102


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lionel Frost (Berwick), Dr Svetlana Maslyuk (Gippsland), Professor Gareth Leeves (Malaysia)

Synopsis

Topics include the supply of and the demand for labour, education and training, the operation of labour markets, including the role of institutions in the labour market, wage relativities, disadvantaged groups in the labour market, and the role of trade unions. Also included is a study of the macroeconomic implications of wage changes and a consideration of wages policy. Special attention is given to the current labour market conditions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the operation of labour markets by drawing on basic economic principle
  2. think critically about the implications of labour market activity for society
  3. recognise the issues involved in labour market activities through a consideration of issues such as unemployment and labour market disadvantage
  4. apply analytical skills developed through an analysis of continuing change in the labour market and labour market policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gareth David Leeves

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG2141, ECG9170


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Schuwalow

Synopsis

This unit will cover: the demand, supply and pricing in the sport industry, sports revenues; whether clubs are profit-maximisers or win-maximisers, competitive imbalance in sport such as player drafts, salary caps and revenue sharing, the sport industry, including government subsidies, private delivery of sport and sport participation, the economic impact of sports, stadium financing; labour markets and sport, regulation of sports, international issues, future directions of the sport industry.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the 'peculiar' characteristics of sports markets and the relevant policy prescriptions that follow
  2. gain an understanding of the role of economic incentives in determining the behaviour of the various stakeholders -- controlling bodies and leagues, clubs/teams, players, fans, sponsors, the media and the government -- in determining outcomes in different sports markets
  3. acquire knowledge of the nature of several specific sports markets in Australia and overseas, and of the relative merits of different approaches to solving contemporary problems in those sports markets.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC2450, ECF2450


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Schuwalow

Synopsis

Sport is a major industry in Australia and overseas. The unit will use a mixture of economic theory, economic history and the study of institutions to explore the business issues faced by the sport industry. Throughout the unit, case studies of several sports, notably Major League Baseball, professional boxing, the English Premier League (soccer), and the Australian Football League, will be used to explore these issues in depth.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the constraints and opportunities that affect the ability of sports to survive in an increasingly global marketplace
  2. identify the characteristics and problems of labour markets in professional sports
  3. identify the market for various sports, and how sports have been affected by rising costs and competing uses for consumer income
  4. develop a high level of research, analytical, written and oral skills by writing an essay and participating in tutorials.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Schuwalow

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Ms Neelu Seetaram

Synopsis

The components of the tourism industry (accommodation, travel companies, air transport etc.) and their significance in the economy. Tourism enterprises and the supply conditions of the industry, including aspects of finance and investment. The demand for tourism and tourism forecasting. The impacts of the growth of tourism demand on the economy. Tourism's impact on the environment. Tourism policy issues, including taxation of tourism, promotion, foreign investment and international aviation policy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how markets in tourism industries work
  2. understand the factors behind the demand for tourism services and patterns of demand growth
  3. appreciate how provision of tourism services affects the natural and built environment, and how economic instruments can be used to control adverse impacts
  4. comprehend a range of tourism policies, and how economic analysis can be brought to contribute to the resolutions
  5. analyse economic issues in tourism, and have developed skills in discussing these in written and oral form through writing an essay and in tutorial presentations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Neelu Seetaram

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Siang Ng (First semester)

Synopsis

This unit focuses on the topics of international finance and trade. This includes the importance of international finance; the balance of payments accounts; the mechanisms for financing international trade; the effect of macroeconomic policies on trade balance; the determination of exchange rates; the operation of foreign exchange
markets and alternative exchange rate systems; foreign investment; foreign exchange risk and operating exposure.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand payments among nations and macroeconomic policies to adjust balance of payments disequilibrium
  2. study the operation of foreign exchange markets and alternative exchange rate systems
  3. acquire essential skills for managing foreign exchange risk and operating exposure
  4. explain multinational corporations in international trade and the mechanisms for financing international trade, and
  5. demonstrate in the individual assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Grace Lee

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECF2721, ECG2721


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anupama Sethi (Berwick), Mrs Judith Tennant (Gippsland), Professor Eduard Bomhoff (Malaysia)

Synopsis

Macroeconomic policy as it affects the open economy; policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions; analysis of policies with respect to the real exchange rate and trade balance; policy responses to assets price movements; policy goals under different international monetary systems; the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas; how policy-makers in Australia try to stabilise the economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the impact of monetary and government policies on an open economy;
  2. explain the policy consequences of consumption and investment decisions and
  3. explain how policies affect the trade balance and income;
  4. analyse policy responses to assets price movements;
  5. evaluate the economic benefits and costs of optimum currency areas.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Eduard Bomhoff

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG1102 or ECW1102 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG2730, ECW2120, ECF2331


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor He-Ling Shi

Synopsis

This subject reviews the contemporary microeconomic principles in the context most relevant to business people. Market processes, demand patterns, cost structures, market conditions, pricing policies, and the impact of regulation on business decisions are discussed. Cases and problems from the prescribed text, Australian media, and online resources illustrate how economic concepts can be applied to specific industries. Analytical techniques and quantitative tools link the concepts to measurement and managerial decision-making.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how do markets work
  2. understand how do customers value products
  3. understand which production and cost measures are relevant for decision making
  4. understand how does competition affect business decisions on investment, production, and pricing in different market structures
  5. understand how important to managerial and marketing decisions are changes in foreign exchange rates, technology, incomes, government regulations, sources of energy, the balance of payments.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor He-Ling Shi

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG1101 or ECW1101 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG2731, ECF2731


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vinod Mishra

Synopsis

The pure theory of international trade. Trade and income distribution, economic growth and changes in trade, bases for trade and gains from trade. Trade policy. Tariffs, quotas, subsidies, import discrimination and other national policies affecting trade. The foreign exchange market. Determination of exchange rates, the balance of payments, modern foreign exchange policies and the threat of unstable exchange rates.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. draw upon skills developed in micro and macroeconomics to enable them to understand and critically evaluate contemporary policy debates in international trade and finance
  2. develop the ability to use powerful analytical tools to predict the impact of global economic, political and social policies on Australia as a small open economy
  3. recognise the positive welfare effects of worldwide unrestricted trade.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vinod Mishra

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG2730 or ECW2730 and ECG2731 or ECW2731 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC3690, ECF3121, ECG9121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ratbek Dzhumashev

Synopsis

This unit is designed to analyse the effect of money on key economic variables such as interest rates, inflation, output, and on the workings of the banking sector. In addition, the unit examines the roles played by Commercial Banks and the Central Bank in the process of money creation and the implementation of monetary policy. The unit uses an economic approach to allow analysis of policy decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a knowledge of the theoretical structure of an open economy with particular emphasis on monetary policy formulation and implementation
  2. develop skills in analysis and prediction for the key economic variables when the economy is faced with internal and external market shocks
  3. be able to use an economic model that allows for competitive international capital markets and floating exchange rates to analyse policy measures.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Eduard Bomhoff

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: ECG1101 or ECW1101 and ECW2120 or ECG2730 or ECW2730 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG3143 and ECF3143


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Synopsis

The study of processes shaping the economic growth and development of regions, especially policy issues from Australian and international perspectives. Factors determining the structure of a regional economy; reasons for regional disparities in growth and development; factors explaining regional employment and wage differentials; aims and instruments of regional policy; limitations of governments' involvement in regional development; how a specific of regional development affects business strategies; international experience in regional development and policies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. cultivate the ability to apply micro- and macroeconomic principles to contemporary regional policy issues
  2. develop skills to cortically evaluate regional policy debates
  3. develop skills to judge the usefulness and limitations of existing regional development theory

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Lionel Frost

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: ECG1102 or ECW1102 and ECG2731 or ECW2731 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECG9146


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Lionel Frost

Synopsis

Economic systems and environmental problems. Suitability of the market system to deal with environmental problems. The need for government intervention. Microeconomic principles and decision making in the management of privately and publicly owned renewable and non-renewable natural resources. International, national and regional policies addressing natural resources and environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the problem of global resource scarcity within an international, national and regional context
  2. understand how intermediate economic principles can be extended to address advanced and specialised problems of natural resources and environment
  3. develop strong analytical and research skills within an economic framework
  4. apply economic analysis to contemporary environmental and natural resource issues
  5. use economic tools to assist decision making in the use of environmental and natural resources and to critically evaluate environmental and natural resources policy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60 %

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECW1102, ECW2120 or ECW2731 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECG9150


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Michael Yap

Synopsis

Multinational corporations and their role in the international economy; theories of international trade and the characteristics of Australia's role in the international economy; theories of internationalisation of firms; forms of international business; the impact on trade patterns of foreign direct investment; locational choice for multinational corporations; regional trade groups and their impact on trade and investment; the institutional environment of international business including the World Bank and World Trade Organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand welfare gains that accrue from international trade and the losses associated with barriers to trade
  2. understand characteristics of Australia's participation in the international economy
  3. understand the role of international institutions like the IMF, WTO and World Bank
  4. understand motives and operation of regional trade groups
  5. understand various modes of entry available to multinational corporations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ECW1102


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Grace Lee (Malaysia), Dr Dinusha Dharmaratna (Peninsula)

Synopsis

Students will deepen their knowledge of Australia's traditional and emerging trading partners through lectures and contact with business people who have successful records in this field; case studies of particular countries covering economic, legal and financial aspects, will be undertaken in depth; successful Australian exporters will be examined; practical visits to operating entities to bring the topic to life.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand Australia's traditional and emerging trading partners
  2. understand the process of international trade, the parties involved and their functions
  3. be able to argue a point of view in a structured setting and to question and participate in a team environment
  4. develop a professional attitude whilst interfacing with industry practitioners
  5. acquire knowledge of the application of the case study method of study.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Grace Lee

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECG2721 or ECW2721 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECF3301


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Synopsis

This unit considers market structures, conduct and performance from the business perspective; economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers; the variety of approaches to competition and regulation policies from the international perspective; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, deregulation and privatisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise differences in market structures and understand how those differences affect firms' competitive behaviour and performance
  2. understand how and why competition causes changes in market structures by way of mergers, acquisitions, vertical integration and diversification
  3. explain the economic rationale for competitive weapons utilised by business in
contemporary competitive environment, such as barriers to entry, pricing and advertising strategies, product differentiation, and innovation
  1. explain the rationale for regulation and merits of different theories of regulation.
  2. explain the arguments for and against privatisation
  3. understand the main features of national competition policies in the countries of
particular interest to Monash University in Australia and overseas
  1. critically evaluate attempts to increase competition in particular industries, e.g.
aviation, electricity and telecommunications, where there are ongoing reforms.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECW2120, ECG2731 or ECW2731 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC3830, ECG3830, ECX3900


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Gennadi Kazakevitch

Synopsis

This unit examines the contribution of information and electronic commerce technologies and products in a range of organisational contexts and the means of assessing the impact of these technologies and products using both qualitative and quantitative measures. Topics to be covered include: IT and EC products, costs, pricing and impact; frameworks for decision making; impact on monetary and payment systems; risk analysis; project justification; cost management; financial guidelines; system evaluation measures and estimates of benefits.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the application of economic analysis to the markets of information technology and electronic commerce infrastructure
  2. identify, quantify and evaluate the costs and benefits of existing and proposed IT and EC systems
  3. critically assess methods for evaluating the return on investments in IT and EC
  4. employ appropriate economic qualitative and quantitative measures of the impact of IT and EC in various business contexts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Gennadi Kazakevitch

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECG1101, ECW1101 or ECF1100 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wenli Cheng

Synopsis

This unit studies recent economic developments of selected Asian countries. Topics include: theories of economic growth; economic freedom and economic development; entrepreneurship and economic transformation in Hong Kong; the role of industrial policy in Japanese post-war economic performance; economic reforms in China and India; and the 1997 Asian financial crisis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have critically examined the major hypothesis advanced to explain the dynamics of growth and change in selected Asian economies
  2. appreciate the main characteristics of the business environment in the selected countries, including business institutions and business practices
  3. understand the role of government and the market as allocators of resources and engines of development
  4. develop their analytical, written and oral skills by writing a long essay and delivering a tutorial paper.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wenli Cheng

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECF1100, ECG1101, ECW1101, or ECC1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC2550, ECC3550, ECF3550


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wenli Cheng

Synopsis

This unit studies recent economic developments of selected Asian countries. Topics include: theories of economic growth; economic freedom and economic development; entrepreneurship and economic transformation in Hong Kong; the role of industrial policy in Japanese post-war economic performance; economic reforms in China and India; and the 1997 Asian financial crisis.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. have critically examined the major hypothesis advanced to explain the dynamics of growth and change in selected Asian economies
  2. appreciate the main characteristics of the business environment in the selected countries, including business institutions and business practices
  3. understand the role of government and the market as allocators of resources and engines of development
  4. develop their analytical, written and oral skills by writing a long essay and delivering a tutorial paper.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wenli Cheng

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ECF1100, ECG1101, ECW1101, or ECC1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ECC2550, ECC3550, ECF3550, ECW3550


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mita Bhattacharya

Synopsis

This unit considers market structures, conduct and performance from the business perspective; economic policy as it affects business, particularly in relation to its dealings with consumers; the variety of approaches to competition and regulation policies from the international perspective; analysis of policies with respect to prices, monopolies, oligopolies and mergers, exclusive dealing, consumer protection and licensing, deregulation and privatisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concepts used in the economic analysis of business and the policy framework within which business operates
  2. understand performance, structure and behaviour of different businesses in any market
  3. apply models of behaviour to specific cases
  4. analyse different structure of businesses in details identifying major policies which might affect their performance and conduct.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mita Bhattacharya

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of ECC1000, ECF1100, ECW1101 or ECG1101 and either ECF2731, ECW2731 or ECG2731.

Prohibitions

ECW3830, ECC3830, ECG3830


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Brett Inder; Dr Kathryn Cornwell, Professor Lisa Cameron

Synopsis

Presentation and analysis of grouped and ungrouped data using tables, charts and measures of location and dispersion; standardisation techniques, including index numbers, with application to share price indices and the CPI; analysis of relationships between variables using simple and multiple regression; extensions to multiple regression, including nonlinear and categorical explanatory variables and time series data with applications to forecasting; main ideas of probability theory as a foundation for statistical inference; concept of sampling as a way of capturing uncertainty about data; estimators and their properties; constructing and interpreting confidence intervals; fundamentals of hypothesis testing, testing hypotheses about the mean, difference between means and the slope, including analysis of variance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business and economic data using tables, charts and descriptive statistics techniques, applying standardisation techniques where appropriate
  2. describe the concept of a sampling distribution, estimators and their properties
  3. make inference on single and multiple population means, difference between means and the slope for business and economic decision-making
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business and economic decision-making using simple and multiple linear regression
  5. apply the main ideas of probability theory to business and economic decision-making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

ETG1102, ETW1000, ETW1102, ETX1100, ETX9000, FIT1006, STA1010, SCI1020


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Lee Gordon-Brown; Mr.Graham Forbes, Professor Farshid Vahid (S1 2012)

Synopsis

Introduction to principles and techniques for modelling business and economic data. Modelling in business and finance using computers, spreadsheet modelling of business problems, organising and accessing data efficiently. Modelling in economics and finance, multiple regression as a tool for modelling macroeconomic and microeconomic decisions, elasticities and statistical evaluation of policy, time series modelling with application to finance. Introduction to Actuarial Studies as an approach to building quantitative models of risk.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply principles and techniques of data management with computers and spreadsheet modelling to business and economic decision-making
  2. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables using simple and multiple linear regression
  3. apply statistical techniques for making decisions with quantitative and categorical data in business and economics.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lee Gordon-Brown

Contact hours

3.5 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

ETW1010, ETC9010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Brett Inder, Dr Kathryn Cornwell, Mr Jason Ng

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Katy Cornwell

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

ETC2400, ETC3440, ECC2410


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Graham Forbes, Dr Andrew Leung

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to some of the techniques used in actuarial work, and will give an overview of some of the areas in which actuaries are currently involved. The student is introduced to the basic concepts involved in assessing risk and pricing insurance products, and to this end will gain experience in using past data to model survival and in using a simple model of compound interest to value financial transactions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concepts and techniques used in actuarial work
  2. construct demographic statistics, life tables and exposed to risk tables
  3. model mortality rates
  4. price insurance products and determine reserves.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Graham Forbes

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed the following two units: ETC1000 and ETC1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ralph Snyder and Mr John Stapleton

Synopsis

This unit introduces mathematical techniques that are invaluable tools for econometrics, economics, finance, and business. Topics covered include: matrix algebra; linear simultaneous systems; Eigen values, random vectors; optimisation, including the Lagrange multiplier method; partial differentiation; multiple integration; difference and differential equations. Some emphasis will be given to the use of computer programs for performing matrix calculations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a practical training in basic mathematics needed for the study of econometrics
  2. examine the calculus of many variables and its application in econometrics and business statistics
  3. introduce matrix algebra
  4. provide a training in the use of mathematical software.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

ECC2440, ETF2700


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Rob Hyndman and Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Synopsis

Reliable forecasts of business and economic variables must often be obtained against a backdrop of structural change in markets and the economy. This unit provides a practical introduction to methods suitable for forecasting in these circumstances including the classical decomposition of time series, exponential smoothing, Box-Jenkins ARIMA modelling, and regression with auto-correlated disturbances. It also provides an introduction to applied multiple regression analysis. Students can expect to enhance their computer skills with exercises using advanced features of Microsoft Excel and an econometrics package.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of common statistical methods used in business and economic forecasting
  2. develop computer skills for forecasting from business and economics time series data
  3. provide insights into the problems of implementing and operating large scale forecasting systems for use in production and services management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examinations (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Rob Hyndman

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Synopsis

Computer business models in decision making are the primary focus of this unit. Their potential application in controlling operations and supply chains is explored. Mathematical and statistical methods needed in the construction of business models are examined. An introduction is provided to decision making under risk, Monte Carlo simulation, inventory control, replacement theory, multi-level production systems and supply chains. Computing is undertaken with Microsoft Excel. Training is provided in the programming language Visual Basic for Applications to extend the capacities of Microsoft Excel.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of the quantitative way of thinking about business problems
  2. enhance analytical skills for problem solving
  3. increase computing skills for business modelling with spreadsheets
  4. provide tools for decision making under risk
  5. examine the quantitative dimensions of logistics and supply chain management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

ETC3480


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Lee Gordon-Brown

Synopsis

Topics include business modelling with spreadsheets; the methodology of business modelling; linear programming; transportation and assignment problems; integer programming; network models and project scheduling problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describing business models using concept diagrams and mathematical programming formulations
  2. formulating, solving and interpreting business problems with linear programming using graphical methods, Excel Solver, duality, sensitivity, and Simplex method
  3. formulating, solving and interpreting business problems with integer programming using branch and bound and Excel Solver
  4. analysing simple problems using transportation simplex, assignment method, project management networks, and network flow techniques.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lee Gordon-Brown

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

BUS2020, ETF2480, ETW2480


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Gary Deng / Marketing

Synopsis

This unit introduces sample survey methods, statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and also introduces qualitative research techniques. It provides students with the knowledge and skills required to understand the role research methods play in problem identification, decision making, strategy development, marketing planning and the evaluation of marketing performance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the nature and scope of marketing research, and its role in business decision making
  2. understand the difference between qualitative, quantitative, descriptive and causal research
  3. design, undertake and analyse sample surveys, report and present their results
  4. use various data analysis techniques
  5. develop competence in using a statistical package (SPSS).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Neil Diamond

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000 or MKC1200

Prohibitions

MKC2500, MKF2121, MKG2420, MKW2420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Davide LaVecchia

Synopsis

An introduction to probability and statistical inference for use in economics and business. Topics covered include random variables, moments and cumulants generating function, discrete and continuous distributions, independence, jointly distributed random variables, conditional random variables, the central limit theorem, sampling distribution, properties of estimators, confidence intervals, tests of hypotheses.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand concepts of probability, statistical inference, generating functions and cumulants
  2. derive and use generating functions to evaluate moments and establish the distribution of linear combinations of independent random variables
  3. understand and apply the main methods of estimation and the main properties of estimators
  4. construct confidence intervals for unknown parameters and test hypotheses
  5. develop written, presentational and group work skills through a series of assessed essays, assignments and tutorial work.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Davide La Vecchia

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor David Harris

Synopsis

This unit provides a formal treatment of the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis, with particular focus given to likelihood-based inference. Topics covered include the likelihood principle and maximum likelihood estimation; minimum variance unbiased estimation; maximum likelihood asymptotic distribution theory; likelihood-based hypothesis testing; and quasi-maximum likelihood inference. The theoretical developments are supplemented by numerical results produced using computer simulation. Consideration is also given to the numerical optimisation techniques used to implement likelihood-based procedures in practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. consolidate the core principles underlying econometric and statistical analysis
  2. understand and implement the technique of maximum likelihood estimation and develop an appreciation of the associated asymptotic distribution theory
  3. understand and implement likelihood-based hypothesis testing and quasi-maximum
likelihood inference
  1. develop the skills needed to demonstrate and explore theoretical sampling properties using computer simulation.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor David Harris

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC2400, ECC2410, ETC2410 or ETC3440 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

ETC4340


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr John Stapleton

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables
  3. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations
  4. conduct statistical inference on data that has both a time series and a cross section dimension.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit. ECC2410, ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC3440

Prohibitions

ECC3410, ETC4341, ETW3410


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Synopsis

To provide a further grounding in mathematical and statistical techniques of particular relevance to insurance and financial work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the concepts of decision theory and apply them
  2. calculate probabilities and moments of loss distributions both with and without limits and risk-sharing arrangements
  3. construct risk models involving frequency and severity distributions and calculate the moment generating function and the moments for the risk models both with and without simple reinsurance arrangements
  4. explain the concept of ruin for a risk model
  5. explain the fundamental concepts of Bayesian statistics and use these concepts to calculate Bayesian estimators
  6. describe the fundamental concepts of risk rating and apply them to simple experience rating systems
  7. describe and apply techniques for analysing a delay (or run-off) triangle and projecting the ultimate position
  8. explain the fundamental concepts of a generalised linear model (GLM), and describe how a GLM may apply
  9. define and apply the main concepts underlying the analysis of time series models
  10. explain the concepts of 'Monte Carlo' simulation using a series of pseudo-random numbers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC2520


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Brett Inder, Dr Kathryn Cornwell, Mr Jason Ng

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Katy Cornwell

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000

Prohibitions

ETC2400, ETC2410, ETW2410, ECC2410


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr John Stapleton

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to modern time series methods. The topics covered include a review of stationary, univariate ARMA models, stochastic and deterministic trends, testing for unit roots, vector auto regressions, multivariate cointegration and error correction models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. model and forecast stationary autoregressive and moving average time series
  2. test for unit roots in univariate time series
  3. analyse the relationships between multiple, stationary time series
  4. test for, estimate and interpret the long run relationships between non-stationary time series.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr John Stapleton

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed either ETC2410 or ECC2410 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

ETC4345


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Keith McLaren and Associate Professor Paul Lajbcygier

Synopsis

The specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models, including the capital asset pricing model and extensions; the statistical characteristics of financial data emphasising skewness, kurtosis and volatility aspects; volatility models such as ARCH models of financial time series, with applications to stock prices, derivatives, and exchange rates including the forecast performance of these models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the time series and distributional features of financial data
  2. explain appropriate specification, estimation and testing of asset pricing models
  3. evaluate the need for volatility models for financial returns
  4. describe the specification and estimation of conditional volatility models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Keith McLaren & Associate Professor Paul Lajbcygier

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following units: AFC1100, AFC2000, AFC2100, AFC2140 and also one from the following: ECC2410, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETC4344, ETX9344 or be granted permission, before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ETC4346, ETF3300, ETF9300


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Lee Gordon-Brown, Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Synopsis

Simulation in a business environment including applications to production and inventory control, finance, investment and sales forecasting; discrete time simulation with Microsoft Excel; queuing theory and discrete event simulation with a special purpose computer package; principles of random number generation and statistical validation methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide insights into the potential role of simulation methods in supporting business decision making under risk and uncertainty
  2. develop an understanding of the principles of simulation methods
  3. inculcate an appreciation of the advantages and disadvantages of various simulation methods
  4. develop the ability to recognise business problem types that can be approached using simulation
  5. foster skills needed to build simulation models using computers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lee Gordon-Brown

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC2470 or ETC2480

Prohibitions

ETC2490


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Neil Diamond and Professor Felix Mavondo

Synopsis

Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and models to analyse the discrete choice behaviour of individuals. Topics include multivariate analysis of variance, principal components analysis, factor analysis, correspondence analysis and models of discrete choice behaviour. Statistical software and case studies will be utilised during this subject and students will apply the techniques to a variety of practical problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine exploratory factor analysis and structural equation modelling
  2. explain how multiple regression and multivariate analysis of covariance can be used to analyse survey data
  3. examine the use and importance of logistic regression in discrete-choice modelling studies
  4. critically analyse the role of cluster analysis and multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis in understanding multivariate data
  5. apply a statistical package (SPSS) to a range of data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Neil Diamond

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ECC2410, ETC2410, ETC2500, ETC3440 or MKC2500 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MKC3500, ETF3500, MKF3500, ETC4350


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Fima Klebaner and Professor Don Poskitt

Synopsis

Mathematical definition of options and other financial derivatives; probability models; mathematical models of random processes; applications; numerical methods; Monte Carlo methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the modern approach to evaluation of uncertain future payoffs
  2. develop an understanding of the concepts of arbitrage and fair games and their relevance to finance and insurance
  3. develop an understanding of concept of conditional expectation and martingales and their relation to pricing of financial derivatives
  4. develop an understanding of the random processes such as Random Walk, Brownian Motion and Diffusions and be able to apply them for modelling real life processes and risk models
  5. obtain skills to use Ito's formula
  6. develop the skills to price options by using the Binomial and Black-Scholes models
  7. ability to simulate the price process and obtain prices by simulation
  8. ability to formulate discrete time Risk Model in Insurance and use it for control of probabilities of ruin.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%.

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Fima Klebaner

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC2440. It is also highly recommended that students complete ETC2520 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ETC5351, MTH3251


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Andrew Leung

Synopsis

The modelling and valuation of cash flows dependent on death, survival, or other uncertain risks.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. actuarial mathematics and techniques developed in ETC2430 in relation to simple assurance and annuity contracts are developed further allowing for multiple decrement situations, and those involving competing risks. Practical issues arising in the actuarial management of life insurance and superannuation are addressed
  2. the calculation, using ultimate or select mortality, of net premiums and net premium reserves for increasing and decreasing benefits and annuities
  3. techniques are developed for the valuation of annuity and assurance products involving two lives, and the use of actuarial functions in that situation
  4. methods are developed which can be used to model cash flows contingent upon competing risks
  5. the technique of discounted emerging costs as used in profit tests, pricing assessments and reserving calculations for various insurance and pension products
  6. practical issues are addressed such as guarantees and options, risk classification and the effects of the pricing and reserving basis on the emergence of profit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrew Leung

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

AFC2340 or ETC2430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Simon Angus and Dr Brett Parris

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to enable students to understand some of the complexities of interdisciplinary policy problems, particularly in the areas of sustainable development, and to enable them to design and undertake integrated modelling exercises for themselves. A complex systems science perspective will be adopted, introducing Agent-Based Modelling (ABM) as a flexible and powerful tool for exploring solutions to complex real-world problems. The ABM approach will be demonstrated and critically assessed through several interdisciplinary, integrated economy/sustainability models. Additionally, a flexible ABM modelling platform (NetLogo) will be introduced and demonstrated.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are for students to:

  1. understand some of the complexities of interdisciplinary policy problems, particularly in the areas of sustainable development
  2. comprehend and critically assess the complex systems perspective
  3. critically evaluate agent-based models and their outputs
  4. develop and analyse an agent-based model of an integrated modelling problem
  5. undertake verification, validation, evaluation and assessment of integrated modelling outputs
  6. apply integrated modelling approaches to real-world interdisciplinary economic problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Simon Angus (First semester)
Dr Brett Parris (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed ETC1000 before undertaking this unit

Co-requisites

It is recommended that students study ECC2800 Prosperity, poverty and sustainability in a globalised world


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Giovanni Forchini

Synopsis

A unit of study in a special field of econometrics in which no formal unit is available. The supervisor will prescribe a list of references, consult frequently with the student and set whatever written work and examinations are deemed appropriate.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop an understanding of the key academic literature in a particular area of econometrics or statistical research
  2. learn how to undertake original research, either theoretical or applied

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students have completed at least three third year econometrics units.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Don Poskitt

Synopsis

The objective of this unit is to outline the general principles that underlie what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM). The discussion is motivated by reference to econometric and statistical techniques, and simple practical examples with which students should be familiar. It is shown that GMM finds application in many areas of econometrics and business statistics, and that GMM may be viewed as a methodology that encompasses many econometric and statistical techniques. Broad topic headings are: Classical Method of Moments and Regression (OLS and IV), GMM, Identification, Asymptotic Distribution Theory for GMM, GMM and Optimal Inference.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. build upon existing concepts developed in previous courses and to outline the basic principles under-lying what has become known as the Generalized Method of Moments (GMM)
  2. outline the classical Method of Moments and relationship of Regression to the Method of Moments
  3. discuss Identification and Asymptotic Distribution Theory in the context of the GMM
  4. examine GMM in relation to minimum variance unbiased estimation, and GMM based inference
  5. consider special cases of single equation and simultaneous equations GMM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Don Poskitt

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC3400


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Keith McLaren and Associate Professor Xueyan Zhao

Synopsis

This unit involves a critical review of recent empirical work in econometrics. The topics to be covered include: the specification and estimation of systems of consumer demand equations and producer demand and supply equations, extensions of these methods to other areas, practical applications. On completion of this unit students should be familiar with recent developments in these fields and have developed the skills to undertake empirical work. Further, students should be able to critically evaluate empirical work and related policy implications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. specify the structure of consumer demand systems
  2. use duality theory to generalise these specifications
  3. understand the use of appropriate specific estimation techniques
  4. extend these ideas to producer demand and supply models
  5. consider a number of empirical applications, and derive policy implications
  6. become competent in handling demand and production data using econometric software.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Xueyan Zhao

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit. ECC3410, ETC3400, ETC3410


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Xueyan Zhao, Dr Preety Srivastava

Synopsis

This unit covers specification, estimation and evaluation of a range of statistical models used to analyse (predominantly) micro data in economics, finance and marketing. These include models of discrete data on individual choice behaviour, censored and truncated data. A hands-on approach is taken, such that the models are illustrated with real-life applications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. know in which situations the linear regression model is not an appropriate way to model the behaviour of interest
  2. apply a range of alternative models in situations when the linear regression model is not appropriate
  3. model data as recorded in either surveys or panels
  4. use appropriate models to predict the probability that an individual will choose a particular: labour market state; mode of transport; consumption level of alcohol; number of cigarettes to smoke per week; and so on.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Xueyan Zhao,

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following before undertaking this unit. ECC3410, ETC3400 or ETC3410


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor John Madden

Synopsis

This unit covers the theoretical structure and application of computable general equilibrium (CGE) models. Topics include:

  • the derivation of the model's non-linear equation system
  • evaluation of coefficients and parameters, model closure, specification of economic shocks, solution techniques and interpretation of results.
During hands-on computing sessions, students will undertake simulations of a series of economic policy questions and analyse results.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire an understanding of the main elements of the theoretical structure of a computable general equilibrium (CGE) model
  2. acquire an understanding of how a CGE model is calibrated and implemented on computer
  3. develop the ability to conduct basic simulations with a comparative-static CGE model
  4. acquire skills in the analysis of the more readily interpretable model results in terms of model theory, data base, closure and shocks
  5. develop an elementary understanding of the key features of dynamic CGE models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor John Madden

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Heather Anderson

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to a range of advanced, current techniques used in analysing financial data. Topics covered include the analysis of the time series and distributional features of financial data; the use of stochastic volatility and realised volatility models to capture time-varying volatility, including long memory in volatility; the use of econometric methods to estimate Value at Risk; the modelling of transactions data using trade duration models and transaction-based volatility models; continuous time processes and the application of econometric techniques to option pricing; and the use of generalised method of moments in financial models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate alternative methods of modelling asset return volatility
  2. explain the role of volatility modelling in the measurement of risk and in the pricing of financial derivatives
  3. describe the role of continuous time stochastic processes in the pricing of financial derivatives
  4. evaluate econometric models for high frequency data
  5. evaluate the use of generalized method of moments in financial models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Heather Anderson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ETC3460 or ETC4346 and at least one of: ECC3410, ETC3400, ETC3410, ETC3450, before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Lee Gordon-Brown and Associate Professor Ralph Snyder

Synopsis

This subject is directed to students with an interest in business analysis and business modelling. It covers tools such as Solver in Microsoft Excel for optimising business decisions. Modelling skills are enhanced from a study of the logic of optimisation and its application to common business problems. Methods covered include linear programming, network programming, integer linear programming, non-linear programming and dynamic programming.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide an understanding of the theory and techniques of mathematical programming
  2. enhance business modelling skills for decision making
  3. make effective use of the mathematical programming tools provided by modern spreadsheet packages, Solvers and matrix generators
  4. enhance analytical skills and the capacity to attack large business problems and non-standard business problems
  5. provide sufficient knowledge to be able to read and understand scholarly published work in management science and operations research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lee Gordon-Brown

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC2480 or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Gael Martin, Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Synopsis

This unit covers methodological developments at the forefront of econometric research. Topics may include Bayesian econometrics, simulation techniques, latent variable models, non-Gaussian time series models, distribution theory, non-parametric inference and panel data models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine methodological developments at the forefront of econometric research
  2. explain the importance of probabilistic and statistical techniques in econometric research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

One from ETC4400, ETC4410, ETC4420 or permission

Prohibitions

ETC5410


12 points, SCA Band 3, 0.250 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Full year 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester to First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Heather Anderson

Synopsis

Topics for seminar presentation are selected in consultation with the coordinator. A list of possible topics will be distributed but students are encouraged to propose subjects of interest to them, based in their own discipline. Students present one paper, act as formal discussant on another, and are expected to engage in discussion of others.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop the skills to present an area of research in the discipline of econometrics or statistics in a non-technical manner, both written and oral
  2. grow in ability to ask and address critical questions about research.

Assessment

Within semester assessment : 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Heather Anderson

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor George Athanasopoulos

Synopsis

Econometrics is a set of research tools employed not only in economics but also in business disciplines. This unit covers the basic tools for estimation in the context of simple and multiple linear regression, the sampling properties of the least squares estimator, statistical inference and hypothesis testing. It also covers regression with dummy variables, model specification issues and estimation problems when least squares assumptions are violated. EViews is used as the software package.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply econometric tools to modelling, estimation, inference, and forecasting in the context of real world economic and business problems
  2. formulate and test hypotheses about the relationships between variables
  3. understand the nature and consequences of violation of the classical assumptions and know how to test for violations
  4. apply the skills and knowledge from the unit to real situations in business and economics
  5. demonstrate the ability to generate and analyse EViews computer output for business and economic applications.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination (2 hours): 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have completed ETX1100 or equivalent before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

ETC2410, ETC3440, ECC2410


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tissa Galagedera

Synopsis

This is a software-oriented subject intended to provide a working knowledge of decision-making tools and techniques applicable in a business environment. Various optimisation techniques used in managerial decision-making will be introduced. Topics include business modelling with spreadsheets, linear programming models, transportation and assignment models, network models, project planning and scheduling models. Applications in management, marketing, accounting, finance and related fields are emphasised.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the relevance of quantitative analytical techniques in solving business decision problems
  2. formulate business decision problems as mathematical models and lay out as spreadsheet models
  3. apply tools available in Microsoft Excel and algorithms to generate solutions and interpret the results
  4. appraise the solutions through the use of sensitivity analysis
  5. communicate the analysis and results of business decision problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETX1100

Prohibitions

BUS2020, ETC2480, ETW2480


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Bruce Stephens

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: The Linear model, Linear Simultaneous Equations, Non-linear functions, Financial mathematics, Derivatives and Partial Differentiation, Optimisation (constrained and non-constrained), Matrix Algebra and Difference Equations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. acquire skills in solving equations and applying them to problems arising in business
  2. understand the features of linear and nonlinear models and their applications in economics, finance and business
  3. solve two and three dimensional simultaneous equations, with applications in areas including operations management
  4. work with arithmetic and geometric sequences and series and use them in financial applications
  5. develop skills to perform differentiation, optimisation (constrained and unconstrained) and basic matrix operations and apply them to understand and solve problems in business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETX1100 or equivalent

Prohibitions

ECC2440, ETC2440


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in applied econometrics. The topics covered are linear regression models with random regressors, method of moments and instrumental variables estimations; simultaneous equations models; models for time-series data; introduction to maximum likelihood estimation; models for discrete dependent variables and models for panel data. EViews computer software is used to carry out data analysis and estimation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in linear regression models with random regressors using the method of moments and the instrumental variables estimators
  2. conduct statistical inference for simultaneous equations models
  3. understand the statistical properties of nonstationary macroeconomic time series data and how to model the long-run relationships among co-integrated time series
  4. conduct statistical inference in models with discrete dependent variables
  5. conduct statistical inference in panel data models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination (2 hours): 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Anastasios Panagiotelis

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETF2100

Prohibitions

ETC3410


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Hsein Kew

Synopsis

This unit covers statistics and econometric tools to assess the time series properties and distributional properties of financial series, and teaches how to model and estimate risk return relationship of assets; estimate and test capital asset pricing models and anomalies; and use various statistical procedures to test the efficient market hypothesis. This unit also introduces the recent literature on modelling, estimating and forecasting financial markets' volatility. Parametric, nonparametric and simulation method will be used to estimate the value at risk. EVIEWS computer software will be used to carry out financial data analysis and applied research projects.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the time series and distributional properties of financial data
  2. evaluate the risk return relationship of financial assets
  3. estimate the long run relationship among financial time series
  4. analyse and model the volatility of financial returns
  5. conduct the risk management analysis.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Hsein Kew

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETF2100 or ETX2111 or ETX2121 or equivalent.

Prohibitions

ETC3460, ETC4346


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tissa Galagedera

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop quantitative problem solving skills. The emphasis is on recognising and identifying decision problems, modelling them and generating solutions to them. Various optimisation techniques used in the business decision-making process will be introduced. Topics include benchmarking with data envelopment analysis, integer programming, inventory control models, decision making under uncertainty, queuing models and simulation modelling. Applications in business, particularly in management, marketing, banking and finance will be used in the demonstration.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the complementary nature of the rational and behavioural approaches to decision making
  2. select and apply quantitative modelling concepts to problems arising from business
  3. formulate an appropriate model to analyse various business decision problems
  4. apply tools available in Microsoft Excel and algorithms to generate solutions and appraise the solutions through the use of sensitivity analysis
  5. communicate the analysis and results of business decision problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tissa Galagedera

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETF2480 or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Neil Diamond

Synopsis

This unit adopts a very practical approach to introducing multivariate statistical techniques that are currently popular in the analysis of business survey data. The main topics to be covered are: a review of statistical tools, factor analysis, structural equation modelling, cluster analysis, discriminant analysis, correspondence analysis and multivariate analysis of variance. SPSS software will be used for problem solving. The emphasis will be on understanding, interpreting and reporting results of the analysis and on the proper use of techniques. Case studies drawn from business will be discussed.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the role that multivariate statistical techniques such as factor analysis, structural equation modelling, logistic regression, categorical data analysis, cluster analysis, multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis, play in uncovering relationships and patterns in survey data
  2. appraise the strengths and limitations of these techniques
  3. apply tools in SPSS to generate solutions for the appropriate statistical techniques
  4. demonstrate skills in using the appropriate statistical techniques from a user and provider perspective
  5. demonstrate skills in communicating the results of the analysis so that decision making can be implemented.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Neil Diamond

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETF2100 or ETX2111 or ETX2121 or MKF2121

Prohibitions

ETC3500, MKC3500 and MKF3500


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich

Synopsis

The topics covered in this unit include: review of regression analysis, binomial dependent variables, unordered multinomial dependent variables, ordered multinomial dependent variables, duration dependent variables. Computer software EVIEWS will be used to apply these techniques to real world problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a solid understanding of regression analysis including relationships with dependent variables that can be binary, in unordered categories, in ordered categories and duration variables
  2. analyse these relationships using a software package
  3. analyse, interpret and communicate the business value of results.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination (2 hours): 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Duangkamon Chotikapanich

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETF2100


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Simone Grose (Peninsula)

Synopsis

Introduction to spreadsheeting. Descriptive statistics. Elementary probability. Discrete and continuous probability distributions. Statistical inference. Simple linear regression and correlation. Forecasting and time series. Index numbers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and applying inference methods to single population means
  4. evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concepts of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply time series techniques of indexing, deflating, and forecasting to business and financial series, and interpreting the results.
  6. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Final Examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Jo-Ann Larkins

Prohibitions

BMS11, BUS1100, PMM2020, ETC1000, ETW1000, ETX1100, SCI1020, STA1010, ETW1102


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Robert Brooks

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and their applications to problems in accounting, economics, finance, management, marketing and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate (written and verbal) the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics (graphical and numerical measures) for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty and risk; probability distributions to model business behaviour; estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for business decision making; simple tools for forecasting time series. Excel is used extensively.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, to aid in the solution of business problems
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single population means to aid in the solution of business problems
  4. evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply time series techniques of forecasting to business and financial series and interpret the results to aid in the solution of business problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Robert Brooks

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BMS11, BUS1100, ETC1000, ETW1102, ETX1100, PMM2020, SCI1020


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Malaysia: Dr Soo Siew Choo, Mr Thiagu.

Synopsis

An introduction to descriptive statistics -- the collection, organisation, presentation and analysis of grouped and ungrouped data using measures of location and dispersion; the construction of index numbers, with application to share price indices and the CPI; analysis of relationships between variables using simple and multiple regression, with applications to forecasting; main ideas of probability theory as a foundation for statistical inference; concept of sampling as a way of capturing uncertainty about data; estimators and their properties; constructing and interpreting confidence intervals, testing a hypothesis, including analysis of variance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business and economic data using descriptive statistics techniques
  2. construct and interpret index numbers
  3. describe the concept of a sampling distribution, estimators and their properties
  4. use P values to make inference on single population means for business and economic decision-making
  5. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business and economic decision-making using simple linear regression
  6. apply the main ideas of probability theory, discrete and continuous probability distributions to business and economic decision-making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Brett Inder

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prohibitions

ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1102, ETX1100, ETX9000, FIT1006, STA1010, SCI1020


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Malaysia: Dr Elsa Phong, Dr Santha Vaithilingam

Synopsis

Introduction to principles and techniques for modelling business and economic data.
Modelling in business and finance using computers -- spreadsheet modelling of business problems, organising and accessing data efficiently. Modelling in economics and finance -- multiple regression as a tool for modelling macroeconomic and microeconomic decisions, elasticities and statistical evaluation of policy, time series modelling with application to finance. Introduction to actuarial studies as an approach to building quantitative models of risk.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply principles and techniques of data management with computers and spreadsheet modelling to business and economic decision-making problems, including profit models, breakeven analysis, sensitivity analysis, simulation, optimisation under uncertainty and network models
  2. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business and economic decision-making using multiple linear regression, including dummy variables, functional form, trends and seasonality in time series as well as inference, confidence intervals and prediction
  3. apply statistical techniques for making decisions with quantitative and categorical data in business and economics, including testing hypotheses about population mean(s), population proportion(s), one- and two-way analysis of variance, and difference between proportions in contingency tables.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lee Gordon-Brown

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW1000

Prohibitions

ETC1010, ETC9010, ETW1031, ETW2111, ETW2010


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Harmindar Nath (Berwick); Mrs Jo-Ann Larkins (Gippsland); Mr Thangarajah Thiagu (Malaysia); Mr Hugh O'Reilly (Peninsula); Mr Rakesh Bhurtun (South Africa)

Synopsis

Introduction to spreadsheeting. Descriptive statistics. Elementary probability. Discrete and continuous probability distributions. Statistical inference. Simple linear regression and correlation. Forecasting and time series. Index numbers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and applying inference methods to single population means
  4. evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply time series techniques of indexing, deflating, and forecasting to business and financial series, and interpreting the results.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Final examination (3 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Thangarajah Thiagu

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prohibitions

BMS11, BUS1100, PMM2020, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1000, ETX1100, SCI1020, STA1010


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dr Harmindar Nath (Berwick); Dr Soo Siew Choo (Malaysia); Mr Rakesh Bhurtun (South Africa)

Synopsis

Sampling designs and inference; confidence limits and tests on means, proportion, differences. Cross tabulation, with chi square. Simple and multiple linear regression: regression with non-linear terms; regression with dummy variables. Introduction to analysis of variance. Uses Excel.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. choose and apply an appropriate sampling design
  2. understand and interpret confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for means, proportions and variances, and be able to identify significant differences
  3. understand and conduct regression analyses to interpret and communicate the business value of the results
  4. understand and conduct one way analysis of variance in business problems
  5. understand the concept and application of Chi-square test for independence between business variables

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 35%
Examination (2 hours): 65%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Harmindar Nath

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ETG1102, ETW1102 or ETW1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ETW1010 and ETW1031


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Brett Inder; Malaysia: Dr Santha Vaithilingam

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the empirical analysis of relationships between economic variables. The approach is based on linear regression theory, and emphasises 'hands on' data analysis. Topics studied will include properties of least squares estimators, hypothesis testing, the choice of appropriate functional form, the use of dummy variables, issues around modelling survey data and the problems of serial correlation, heteroscedasticity and multicollinearity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and derive the properties of ordinary least squares in summation and matrix notation
  2. interpret, evaluate and apply inferential methods to multiple linear regression
  3. understand the use and implications of data scaling, functional form and dummy variables in regression modelling
  4. identify the presence of heteroscedasticity, adjust OLS standard errors and perform feasible GLS in regression models
  5. understand issues related to modelling with time-series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Katy Cornwell

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW1000 or ETW2111

Prohibitions

ECC2410, ETC2410, ETC3440


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Malaysia: Dr Mak Kok Sun

Synopsis

Introduction to sample survey methods, quality management and statistical techniques for survey data used in business, industry and the public sector. Topics covered include the planning and execution of a survey, sampling methods, quality management and sampling, the design of experiments, analysis of variance and analysis of 'ranked data'.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand how to conduct a survey, including planning, execution and cost-benefit analysis
  2. apply concepts of probability and probability distribution to problems associated to survey data
  3. describe the role of statistical inference for survey data and applying inference methods to population mean, variance (bound), proportion, and totals
  4. use statistical inference methods to determine the optimal sample size for a survey;
  5. analyse survey data using experimental design techniques and analysis of variance methods (both for unranked and ranked data)
  6. apply statistical quality control methods and survey techniques for data used in business, industry and the public sector, including Six Sigma methodologies
  7. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task (final exam).

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jason Ng Wei Jian

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW1010 or ETW2111


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Malaysia: Dr Soo Siew Choo, Dr Leow

Synopsis

Topics include business modelling with spreadsheets; the methodology of business modelling; linear programming; transportation and assignment problems; network models and project scheduling problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describing business models using concept diagrams and mathematical programming formulations
  2. formulating, solving and interpreting business problems with linear programming using graphical methods, Excel Solver, duality, sensitivity, and Simplex method
  3. formulating, solving and interpreting business problems with integer programming using branch and bound and Excel Solver
  4. analysing simple problems using transportation simplex, assignment method, project management networks, and network flow techniques.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Soo Siew Choo

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW1000 or ETW2111

Prohibitions

BUS2020


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Rob Brooks

Synopsis

The unit presents the basic statistical and econometric methodology in model building and model evaluation in general, and the treatment of autocorrelation, lagged relationship, qualitative variables, multicollinearity and heteroscedasticity, in particular it covers estimation and evaluation of multiple regression models, and testing for the validity of various theories in the areas of business. It also introduces the recent literature on unit root and cointegration in business data analysis. EViews computer software will be used to carry out data analysis and applied research projects.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. conduct linear regression analysis for business and economic applications
  2. conduct the diagnostic tests for regression
  3. evaluate the time series properties of business and economic time series
  4. estimate the long run relationship among time series in business and economics
  5. test for the causality among business and economic time series.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jill Wright

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW2111 or ETX2121

Prohibitions

ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC3440, ETC4344


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Harmindar Nath

Synopsis

The unit aims to introduce the art of forecasting via a modelling approach. It will cover the nature and essentials of forecasting, residual analysis, the moving averages and exponential smoothing forecasting techniques, decomposition methods of forecasting, regression and ARIMA forecasting models. Applications will include areas of accounting, economics, banking, finance, marketing and management. Excel and SPSS will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the basics of the art of forecasting, recognise limitations of forecasting models and describe the importance of following a pragmatic approach
  2. discuss the importance of the role of graphs, forecast errors and statistics in building a forecast model, and the use of prediction intervals
  3. apply acquired skills and knowledge to forecast economic, business and financial time series using smoothing, decomposition, Regression and ARIMA forecasting techniques with the help of Excel and or SPSS
  4. evaluate competing forecasting models
  5. apply acquired skills in interpreting computer output and report writing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%.

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Harmindar Nath

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: ETG1102, ETW1102, ETX1100 or ETW1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

ETX3231, ETC2450, MAT3257


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Malaysia: Dr Mahendhiran Nair

Synopsis

This unit presents econometric models and techniques that are widely used in modern applied econometrics. Emphasis is placed on models that address the special problems that arise when analysing microeconomic data, that is, data at the level of individual consumers, households and firms. The topics covered include modelling discrete dependent variables, modelling data sets that have both a cross-section and a time-series dimension and conducting inference in models in which the dependent variable is jointly determined with one or more of the regressors. The models taught in this unit are widely used in empirical work in economics, finance and marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associate with this unit are to:

  1. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a binary dependent variable (LOGIT and PROBIT models);
  2. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with a limited dependent variable (TOBIT and Censored Regression models);
  3. conduct statistical inference in statistical models with one or more endogenous explanatory variables;
  4. conduct statistical inference in a system of simultaneous equations;
  5. conduct statistical inference on data that has a time series dimension.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mahendhiran Nair

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW2410


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Santha Vaithilingam

Synopsis

Topics include fundamentals of forecasting, univariate and multivariate forecasting tools. The univariate forecasting tools include moving averages, exponential smoothing forecasting, seasonal decomposition, review of basic time series analysis and Box-Jenkins (ARIMA) models. Econometric approaches to multivariate forecasting include regression models, modelling and forecasting with ARIMA processes and evaluation of forecasts. Introduction to qualitative forecasting methods including technological forecasting methods. Excel, SPSS and EViews will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise typical forecasting problems in business and economics
  2. understand and appreciate statistical underpinning and foundation of forecasting techniques
  3. be familiar with the various tools used in forecasting and to be able to apply these techniques appropriately and recognise the strengths and weaknesses of the techniques used
  4. have an appreciation of forecasting in practice
  5. develop quantitative research skills and ability in interpreting computer output and to be able to write and present reports effectively.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Santha Vaithilingam

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW2410

Prohibitions

ETC2450, ETX3231, ETW3232


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Malaysia: Dr Mak Kok Sun

Synopsis

This subject covers computer models of business operations, how they are built, and the way they are used in decision-making. The principles of decision-making under risk and the Monte Carlo simulation method are introduced and applied, together with other quantitative methods, to a range of problems in supply chain management. A training in more advanced aspects of Microsoft Excel is provided with a particular emphasis on the use of Visual Basic for Applications to customise spreadsheet models.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. expand the understanding of quantitative methods in business
  2. enhance analytical skills for problem solving
  3. increase computing skills for business modelling with spreadsheets
  4. provide a better understanding of common problems in business and the impact of risk.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mak Kok Sun

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETW2410, ETW2420 or ETW2480

Prohibitions

BUS2020


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jill Wright (Berwick); Dr Phillip Edwards (Caulfield)

Synopsis

Students will learn to use basic statistical techniques and apply them to problems in accounting, finance, management, marketing and business in general. Students should also be able to effectively communicate the results of their analyses. This unit covers descriptive statistics for revealing the information contained in data; probability as a tool for dealing with uncertainty; probability distributions to model business behaviour; confidence interval estimation and hypothesis testing techniques for single populations; analysis of relationships between variables using simple linear regression; and simple tools for forecasting time series data. Excel software will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. interpret business data using descriptive statistics techniques, including the use of Excel spreadsheet functions
  2. apply simple concepts of probability and probability distributions to problems in business decision-making
  3. describe the role of statistical inference and apply inference methods to single populations
  4. interpret and evaluate relationships between variables for business decision-making, using the concept of correlation and simple linear regression
  5. apply suitable statistical techniques for describing and forecasting time series data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jill Wright

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is highly recommended that students have done Year 12 Mathematics (any).

Prohibitions

BMS11,BUS1100, ETC1000, ETG1102, ETW1000, ETW1102, PMM2020, SCI1020


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Bruce Stephens

Synopsis

This unit presents the basis techniques of quantitative risk analysis. Risk identification and measurement techniques most commonly used in industry are discussed, including descriptive statistics. The basic rules of probability are presented in practical contexts and as the foundation for the study of probability distributions - themselves the foundations of risk analysis models. Finally, spreadsheet models of practical situations are developed and evaluated, using simulation methods.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse risk statistically by summarising and interpreting data using techniques of descriptive statistics including the use of associated spreadsheet functions
  2. analyse and evaluate risk by applying concepts of probability and of probability decisions
  3. analyse and evaluate risk via Monte Carlo simulation, using @Risk software
  4. evaluate decision-making strategies, including use of PrecisionTree software
  5. describe and analyse the quality of production in an industrial process, using statistical control charts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination (2 hours): 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Bruce Stephens

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETX1100

Prohibitions

ETX9520, ETX3011, BUS3800, BUS5800


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Synopsis

Further develops statistical concepts from ETX1100 and their application to business sectors such as finance and accounting. Sources of data and sampling techniques. Confidence intervals and hypothesis testing both for single populations and between populations to identify significant findings with applications to accounting and finance, risk modelling. Commonly used modelling methods in industry -- simple and multiple regression, analysis of time series in financial markets. Excel software will be used. Emphasis throughout is on interpretation of results that provides insight and value to management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of different sampling techniques and their role in business
  2. demonstrate an understanding of the role of statistical inference and its role when applied in business
  3. interpret and analyse the results of a regression analysis and their value when applied in business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Final examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Elizabeth Maharaj (First semester)
Mr Bruce Stephens (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETX1100 or a credit grade in ETW1102

Prohibitions

ETX2111, ETC1010


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Synopsis

Basic forecasting tools. Review of basic time series analysis techniques. Moving averages and exponential smoothing forecasting methods. Box-Jenkins method of forecasting. Comparison of forecasting techniques. Introduction to time series regression and dynamic models. Applications to time series from the accounting, economics, banking, finance and management areas. Excel and SPSS will be used.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the basic tools of forecasting and define the basic time series analysis techniques
  2. describe the decomposition techniques, exponential smoothing forecasting techniques and Box-Jenkins method of forecasting
  3. compare the forecasts of real economic, business and financial time series by decomposition techniques and exponential smoothing techniques using Excel and Box Jenkins method using SPSS
  4. differentiate between decomposition methods, exponential smoothing methods and autoregressive methods of forecasting
  5. analyse time series in the business environment using the appropriate methods and interpret computer output.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Ann Maharaj

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETX2111, ETX2121, ETF2100 or ETC1010

Prohibitions

ETC2450


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tui McKeownDr Loretta Inglis (Semester two)

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should have an understanding of: the nature of managerial work in organisations; theories of management and their historical development; contemporary issues and practices relating to managing people and organisations; key factors in the organisation's environment that impact on how managers and the organisations work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define management and summarise the evolution of management ideas on how managers may influence people, organisations and their contexts to achieve organisational goals;
  2. identify and discuss contextual factors in the organisation's environment that impact of how people, managers and organisations interact;
  3. identify factors that influence individual and group behaviour in organisational settings and illustrate how managers can make use of these factors;
  4. describe how decision-making, planning, leading, organising and controlling can be managed in organisations;
  5. examine the impact on individuals and organisations of contemporary issues in management including, stakeholder interests, ethics and social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tui McKeown (Semester one)
Dr Loretta Inglis (Semester two)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGF1010, MGG1010, MGP1010, MGW1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glennis Hanley

Synopsis

This unit examines how organisations operate, the context in which they operate, and the factors which determine how managers can operate more effectively. The main topics include: the management function in an organisational context; the impact of external and internal environments; the planning, organising and controlling of organisations; future management trends and business planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the historical development of management theory
  2. evaluate factors in the internal and external environment that have an impact on what managers do and how organisations work
  3. explain what is meant by business planning
  4. identify the process of and the analytical tools used in strategic management
  5. identify how organisations are designed and structured
  6. define the nature of operations management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination 2 hours: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glennis Hanley

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Alex Newman

Synopsis

This unit will provide an introduction for students to the broad context in which international business operates, and will address the general theory and management issues related to doing business internationally. Topics include a brief history of management of international business; managing the environment and international relations; understanding of the nature of multinational, transnational and small businesses as multinational enterprises; comparisons of business systems in a variety of developing and developed countries; the management of ethical and social responsibility issues; and future challenges in managing international business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of international business from a multi-disciplinary perspective
  2. assess the impact of the various environmental factors on the internationalisation process of a business organisation
  3. describe the strategy and structure of international business operations in an increasingly competitive global environment
  4. explain the role of foreign market entry modes in the firm internationalisation process
  5. critically evaluate the operation of an international business and analyse an event or an issue relevant to international business using appropriate theories and other resources including books, academic journals, business periodicals and newspapers.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Alex Newman

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGC1010

Prohibitions

MGW3351, MGF2351, MGG2351, MGW2351


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy Smith

Synopsis

Management systems in Asia through a focus on paradigms, such as Japanese management; the implications for management of union cultures in various national contexts; cross-cultural management issues in multinationals; the transfer of management systems at the level of the corporation and the state; an understanding of how people are managed in Asia through the study of how local ethnic, gender, religious and kinship factors affect employees and managers in their work ethics, career strategies, leadership and decision-making styles. National contexts include Japan, Korea, Taiwan, China (including Hong Kong), Vietnam, Philippines, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand and Singapore.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the management of organisations in Asia from both managers' and workers' perspectives
  2. explain the major theories of Asian management and illustrate them with case material
  3. analyse how factors from the external environment, such as gender, religion, ethnic diversity, union cultures, affect Asian management processes and compare how these vary between Asian nations
  4. conduct an individual research exercise by applying one aspect of Asian management theory to a chosen Asian country context
  5. develop oral and written communication skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wendy Smith

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGC1010 before undertaking this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Margaret Lindorff

Synopsis

This unit provides a framework for understanding the behaviour of people at work. Its fields of analysis include the individual, the group, and the total organisation. The unit provides information on human factors that influence individual and organisational effectiveness such as differences in perception, personality, motivation, leadership styles and others. The study of organisational behaviour is based upon social science methods and links with other studies in behavioural sciences such as management, human resource management, sociology and psychology.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the nature and purpose of the field of organisational behaviour
  2. distinguish the major theories used to explain the behaviour of people in organisations
  3. identify the major factors influencing individual and group behaviour in organisations
  4. read and critically evaluate published research in the field of organisational behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Margaret Lindorff

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGC1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGF2111, MGG2230, MGW2230


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ramanie Samaratunge

Synopsis

This unit examines the theory and practice of modern public management with a special focus on three key themes: accountability, efficiency and effectiveness. Topics include the political and social context of public management; the differences between public and private management; the impact of the Constitution and federalism; the role of the minister and cabinet; reforms to the traditional model of public management; corporatisation and privatisation; budgetary reforms; the new administrative law; and the new federalism.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the significant changes in public management theory and practice
  2. identify and explain the major theories underlying public management concepts
  3. identify and explain the practical significance of controversies in public management
  4. describe and analyse management practice in the public sector
  5. analyse arguments and assess evidence on the effectiveness of different approaches to public management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ramanie Samaratunge

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Professor Christopher Nyland

Synopsis

This unit examines the relationship between government and business with a focus on contemporary issues. Key topics include: international paradigms in business/government relations; regulation; and the management of the employment relationship.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and compare the range and variety of interactions between governments and businesses
  2. identify and analyse institutions and processes that support markets and regulate business activity
  3. explain the significance of the blurring of the boundaries between private, public and community sectors clarify the means by which the employment relationship is regulated in contemporary Australia.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Christopher Nyland

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Amanda Pyman

Synopsis

This unit provides a foundation for the study and practice of industrial and employee relations. Topics include the development of the Australian industrial relations system, management and union objectives and strategies, employer associations, the role of government, causes and resolution of industrial conflict, enterprise bargaining, the legal framework for industrial relations and human resource management practice, and contemporary issues such as freedom of association and union avoidance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop knowledge and skills applicable to working in the fields of industrial relations and human resource management
  2. analyse the relationship between industrial relations and the wider socio-economic system
  3. describe the interaction between the major parties and industrial relations processes in Australia
  4. critically analyse the impacts of the regulatory reforms on industrial relations practices in Australia.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Amanda Pyman

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glennis Hanley

Synopsis

The subject focuses on the changing nature of work and the implications of this for labour and management at the workplace. Topics include new technology and team working; employee financial participation; training and skill formation; equal opportunity and managing diversity; and occupational health and safety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the changing nature of work and employment
  2. describe the process of labour market deregulation and analyse the consequences for employees, managers and society
  3. identify and explain labour process theories and their application to post-industrial societies
  4. identify critical issues which confront employee relations and human resource managers in a dynamic environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (2 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glennis Hanley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGF2341, MGG2323, MGW2323


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy Smith

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the factors involved in the effective utilisation of people within organisations. Topics include analysis of the global context for human resource management (HRM); the strategic role of HRM; human resource planning; job analysis; staffing; performance management; training and development; remuneration; and legal issues in HRM, including EEO and occupational health and safety.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate the role of Human Resource Management in achieving organisational objectives
  2. critically evaluate some of the key theoretical models of Human Resource Management
  3. critically evaluate some of the key technical, legal and ethical issues in Human Resource Management
  4. analyse the policies, practices and procedures associated with the effective management of people in organisations
  5. explain the impact of the social, political and economic environment on the theory and practice of Human Resource Management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wendy Smith

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGC1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGF2661, MGG2430, MGW2430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Rod Sarah

Synopsis

This unit integrates 'systems thinking' with policy analysis to help students and managers understand and deal with policy design within complex systems such as modern organisations or the global climate system. Operating as an experiential learning environment, students will engage in policy modelling and analysis of the sustainability impacts of policy directions. A variety of public policy issues including issues and problems at a global level including climate and population challenges, urban dynamics involved in sustainable cities, dynamics of the health system as a wellness system, including medical workforce dynamics and patient care, and environmental dynamics surrounding issues such as water management and species maintenance such as fish-stocks and regulatory dynamics. Embracing contemporary systems mapping, modelling, simulation and analysis techniques, students will be able to conduct their own policy formulation and evaluation experiments to anticipate their viability and sustainability outcomes in complex dynamic systems, identify leverage points for improving policy outcomes.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe Systems Thinking as a generic set of 'new' skills for reframing and understanding complex policy issues spanning social, organisational and natural systems
  2. develop competence in a range of the essential principles, tools and methods of systems thinking as applied to policy for sustainability outcomes
  3. apply the systems thinking tools and methods in a structured methodology including systems mapping, modelling and simulation to generate insights and understanding of the implications of policy decisions as applied to contemporary societal challenges from a sustainability perspective.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Richard Cooney (First semester)
Professor Amrik Sohal (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGX1400


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Quamrul Alam

Synopsis

This unit considers the practical applications of strategic management concepts and theories. Students are required to apply critical thinking and research skills to strategic problem solving in contemporary Australian cases. The emphasis is on analysis and judgement to identify strategic issues, evaluate options and recommend action.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the practical implications of different perspectives on strategic management
  2. select and apply a framework and techniques to analyse particular cases
  3. research and select information to analyse particular cases
  4. identify and evaluate strategic issues and recommend actions in particular cases
  5. integrate and effectively communicate analysis in presentations and reports.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Quamrul Alam

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGC2110

Prohibitions

MGF3401, MGG3401, MGW3401


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Wendy Smith

Synopsis

This unit highlights the challenges of managing the global activities of international companies; examines the environmental foundations and cultural contexts for international management; discusses the impact of national cultures on management, negotiation and communication; and provides an overview of strategic, operational and human resource management issues in the dynamic international economy.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply management theory within the wide range of national contexts in the global economy
  2. summarise the contemporary risks, opportunities and ethical considerations of the international business environment from a managerial perspective
  3. explain the role of culture in cross-cultural management, communication, negotiation and decision-making
  4. assess the complex challenges of managing the multinational enterprise in terms of coordinating international strategy and organisational structure
  5. compare ways in which specific overseas environments affect the management functions of leading, motivating, controlling and staffing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Wendy Smith

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGC1010

Prohibitions

MGF3681, MGG3681, MGW3681


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Belinda Allen

Synopsis

This unit examines the process of organisation change within the theoretical frameworks of organisation culture, power and leadership. It examines the major schools of thought concerning the management of change, and analyses change processes used in organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discuss the major conceptual models underlying the OD change process and the role of the OD practitioner and his/her relationship with the client system
  2. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of diagnostic techniques and its importance for the success of the planned change program
  3. discuss the main features of different interventions for the individual, work, group and organisational levels
  4. explain current trends in OD and speculate on how OD is likely to change in the near future
  5. demonstrate skills to analyse case studies of change situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Belinda Allen

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGC1010

Prohibitions

MGF3621, MGW3130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glennis Hanley

Synopsis

This unit examines the role and nature of small firms in industrial economies, including types of ownership and structures and the types of people who own and manage them. It also examines entrepreneurs and entrepreneurial behaviour, family firms and the trend for women to leave large firms to start up their own business. Issues of managerial planning and skills are also discussed, particularly as they relate to the management of people at work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role of small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs) in the Australian economic context
  2. identify and explain the contemporary public policy framework in which SMEs operate
  3. describe and explain the different forms of SME ownership structures and the issues associated with each type
  4. identify and explain the practical implications of business planning and the managerial skills needed to successfully operate a SME.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glennis Hanley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGC1010 before undertaking this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glennis Hanley

Synopsis

This unit examines the strategic roles of human resource development in organisations: training; management and career development; and organisational development. Theories and factors affecting training outcomes; and economic, ethical, legal and financial considerations are considered also.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the strategic importance of human resource development (HRD) in the success of organisations and within the context of environmental pressures and government policy
  2. evaluate the nature and importance of theories of learning in the development of HRD programs
  3. develop skills in identifying HRD needs, the development of objectives, the design of programs to meet objectives and the evaluation of programs
  4. explain and apply models of career management and other emerging HRD themes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glennis Hanley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGC2430

Prohibitions

MGF3420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Cherrie Zhu

Synopsis

Topics include an introduction to the major differences between domestic and international HRM; cultural, social and ethical issues for IHRM; the possible linkages between IHRM and business strategy; IHRM planning, policies and procedures; international relations and evaluation of host country environments; recruitment and selection; strategic compensation and reward systems; training and development of employee capabilities; maintaining the employment relationship within international operations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand and define the purposes and scope of international human resource management (IHRM)
  2. describe and explain the differences between domestic and international HRM
  3. assess the impact of cultural differences on the management of people in multinational organisations and to examine the impact of global conditions on the strategic management of human resources in the context of overseas subsidiaries, acquisitions and joint ventures
  4. identify the possible linkages between IHRM and business strategy, and critically analyse IHRM functions and process in various international settings
  5. define and explain the theories which guide the policies, processes and procedures of IHRM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Cherrie Zhu

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGC2430

Prohibitions

MGF3430, MGG3430, MGW3430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sandra Cockfield

Synopsis

The focus of the unit is on developing the knowledge and skills to manage conflict in a range of business and professional contexts. Students study a variety of theories and processes that will enhance their skills in avoiding and resolving disputes within and between organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and interpret the implications of the characteristics of conflict in society and in relationships
  2. apply ethically communication, counselling, negotiation and mediation techniques to a variety of conflict situations
  3. examine the influence and implications of power in conflict
  4. evaluate the main alternative dispute resolution techniques and assess the applicability of dispute resolution techniques to specific situations
  5. assess and develop dispute resolution systems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGF3450


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Loretta Inglis

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should have an understanding of: the nature of managerial work in organisations; theories of management and their historical development; contemporary issues and practices relating to managing people and organisation's; key factors in the organisation's environment that impact on how managers and the organisations work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define management and summarise the evolution of management ideas on how managers may influence, people, organisations and their contexts to achieve organisational goals
  2. identify and discuss contextual factors in the organisations environment that impact of how people, managers and organisations interact
  3. identify factors that influence individual and group behaviour in organisational settings and illustrate how managers can make use of these factors
  4. describe how decision-making, planning, leading, organising and controlling can be managed in organisations
  5. examine the impact on individuals and organisations of contemporary issues in management including, stakeholder interests, ethics and social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours) : 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Loretta Inglis

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC1010, MGG1010, MGP1010, MGW1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Vivienne Interrigi

Synopsis

Communication theory emphasising written and oral communication in relation to organisational, intrapersonal, interpersonal and group communication. Importance of relationships in the work context, language, listening and nonverbal behaviour. Interpersonal contexts include negotiation, interviewing, feedback, coaching and counselling. Group communication --roles, leadership and facilitation, problem-solving, decision making and group creativity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and discuss contemporary theories and concepts in interpersonal communication
  2. examine the role of communication in management, particularly in leadership, decision making, conflict resolution, creativity and problem-solving
  3. extend personal communication skills by identifying opportunities for growth and strategies for development
  4. demonstrate competence and professionalism in structuring and delivering persuasive messages
  5. critically analyse communication style.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mary Anderson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGF2100, MGG1100, MGW1100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Belinda Allen

Synopsis

The unit takes a positive and appreciative approach, presenting supportable practices and interventions to help understand and develop more positive and productive individual, team and organisational behaviours and outcomes. A range of relevant issues will be addressed at the organisational, environmental, team and individual levels including: the employment relationship, reward systems, positive organisational behaviours, learning, leadership, teamwork, technology, emotions, culture and diversity.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and discuss the major theories and concepts that pertain to understanding behaviour in organisations
  2. describe and discuss contemporary perspectives in Organisational Behaviour, including the Positive Organisational Behaviour approach to this field
  3. engage with the relevant research literature, and draw on that literature to make plausible, evidence-based predictions about how environmental factors may influence organisational behaviour
  4. examine the role of Organisational Behaviour theory in enhancing both individual and organisational effectiveness.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Belinda Allen

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGF1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC2230, MGG2230, MGW2230


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Synopsis

Management of the employment relationship and workplace issues is central to the unit. Roles of parties to the employment relationship -- management, employees, trade unions, employer groups, government, and tribunals -- are analysed. Management and employee roles in conflict resolution, negotiation and bargaining, conciliation and arbitration, and maintaining control of the employment relationship are covered. External and internal environments are considered regarding legislation, labour market reform, and decentralisation of the Australian industrial relations system to an enterprise focus.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. differentiate between employee relations issues and industrial relations issues
  2. describe the main institutional features and key developments in the Australian industrial relations system as they impact upon employee relations
  3. identify management strategies for dealing with employee relations in Australian workplaces and other countries
  4. participate in individual and team based analysis of workplace case studies and class activities
  5. develop basic skills in managing communication, negotiation, and bargaining at the workplace.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Marjorie Jerrard

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC2410, MGG2323, MGW2323


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Lakmal Abeysekera

Synopsis

The international environment including international trade and investment, and the legal, political, cultural and technological contexts faced by internationalising organisations; forms of operations available to the internationalising organisation; the impact of the multinational enterprise; international strategic planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. classify the key features and issues in the global environment in which international business takes place
  2. explain the impact that the environment has on the internationalisation process of a business organisation
  3. demonstrate an understanding of the role of entry mode choice and other strategic issues in order to succeed in international business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%.

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Lakmal Abeysekera

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGF1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC2120, MGG2351, MGW2351


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Cooney

Synopsis

The unit provides an introduction to contemporary quality management practice with a focus on customers, business partners and people working within organisational systems. The unit covers quality management theory, quality control systems, continuous improvement, product and process innovation, the management of knowledge for innovation, teamwork systems and organisational restructuring for innovation and quality management

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define quality in terms of its historical perspective and its role in organisations today
  2. identify core principles of quality management and comment critically on their implications
  3. explain the significance of innovation for improving the competitive position of businesses and industries
  4. examine the role of process improvement as part of a continuous improvement culture
  5. describe and critically assess alternative approaches to implementation of quality management principles and practices in organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Richard Cooney

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC2250, MGW2511


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Susan Mayson (Semester 1); Ms Ruby Ranjan & Ms Vivienne Interrigi (Semester 2)

Synopsis

This unit concentrates on the management of human resources in the external and internal organisation context. It focuses on the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage via an analysis of HR planning, job design, staffing, reward systems, staff development, and HRM auditing. The relationship between the legal, ethical and industrial relations issues and HRM is also explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the scope and purpose of HRM as an academic discipline and functions associated with HRM as a management practice
  2. identify major changes in the business environment of business organisations and the HR function
  3. understand the links between organisational objectives and HRM strategy and business performance
  4. critically evaluate competing models of HRM that underpin best practice in HRM
  5. develop knowledge about key HR functions and the challenges they pose
  6. enhance students' capabilities to work individually and also in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Susan Mayson (Semester 1)
Dr Marjorie Jerrard (Semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGF1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC2430, MGG2430, MGW2430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Barbara Heilemann

Synopsis

The interface between establishing a continuous learning environment, coaching and performance appraisal systems, training and development practices and the implementation of reward systems. The unit focus is on: personal and organisational skills and procedures through setting performance standards and objectives; performance review methods; giving effective feedback; links with rewards and compensation; determining training and development needs and objectives; coaching and feedback skills, planning, conducting and evaluating the training and development of staff.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed awareness, knowledge and application of current theory in establishing continuous learning environments within organisations
  2. examine the issues related to staff appraisal, training and development and reward systems within a continuous learning environment
  3. demonstrate a high level of personal skill the provision of employee growth and learning within organisations through dialogue, coaching, mentoring and training skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Susan Mayson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGF2661


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter O'Neill

Synopsis

The components of IT; characteristics of hardware, software and telecommunications; types of information systems; networking and the worldwide web; managing 'information' workers; using IT to promote business objectives and gain competitive advantage; systems development methodology; IT-enabled transformation to create adaptive, flexible organisations; social and system issues associated with IT; managerial problems posed by IT. Computer laboratory exposure to a variety of applications software including electronic mail, project management, graphics, and other decision support software.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate knowledge of computers, networks, and software, and networks so as to analyse the implications for individuals, organisations, governments, and society
  2. analyse the implications, especially outsourcing and off-shoring, of widespread information networks, such as the internet for organisations
  3. integrate managerial theory and knowledge of Information and Communications Technologies (ICT) to explain ICT's possible effects on aspects of organisations such as structure, culture, staffing, strategy, required skills, and systems
  4. analyse and evaluate the design and implementation of information systems that advance organisational goals and the concomitant ethical and legal constraints
  5. be able to design and implement a simple set of web pages.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter O'Neill

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC3510


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Quamrul Alam

Synopsis

Business environments including markets, critical success factors, and strategies employed to gain a competitive advantage; the nature of strategic management; the analysis and interpretation of business environments; the nature of competition, relative position of firms, individual strategies and their relationship to critical success factors; strengths and weaknesses related to production, logistics, finance, R and D, marketing, administration etc.; the role of structure, controls, rewards, culture and leadership in implementation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and explain the core concept of strategic management
  2. explain and analyse the relationships between strategy formulation, strategy implementation and strategy evaluation
  3. summarise the main differences between corporate, business and functional strategies
  4. apply the strategy concepts and tools in analysing the factors affecting strategy implementation and evaluation
  5. critically analyse the usefulness of e-business strategy, corporate social responsibility, and strategy in the public sector organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Quamrul Alam

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGF1010

Prohibitions

MGC3110, MGG3401, MGW3401


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glennis Hanley

Synopsis

This unit examines the strategic roles of human resource development in organisations: training; management and career development; and organisational development. Theories and factors affecting training outcomes; and economic, ethical, legal and financial considerations are considered also.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the strategic importance of human resource development (HRD) in the success of organisations and within the context of environmental pressures and government policy
  2. evaluate the nature and importance of theories of learning in the development of HRD programs
  3. develop skills in identifying HRD needs, the development of objectives, the design of programs to meet objectives and the evaluation
  4. explain and apply models of career management and other emerging HRD themes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glennis Hanley

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGF2661

Prohibitions

MGC3420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Audra Mockaitis

Synopsis

Introduction to the major differences between domestic and IHRM; cultural, social and ethical issues for IHRM; IHRM planning, policies and procedures; international relations and evaluation of host country environments; recruitment and selection; remuneration; training and compensating expatriates; maintaining the employment relationship within international operations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and analyse the differences between national (domestic) and international human resource management (IHRM)
  2. critically analyse the issues related to managing people in multinational enterprises
  3. assess the external factors that influence the management of people in multinational enterprises
  4. critically analyse the relationships between IHRM and individual and organizational elements
  5. integrate theoretical and empirical knowledge with practical examples of IHRM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Audra Mockaitis

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGC2430, MGF2661 or permission

Prohibitions

MGC3430, MGG3430, MGW3430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sandra Cockfield

Synopsis

The focus of the unit is on developing the knowledge and skills to manage conflict in a range of business and professional contexts. Students study a variety of theories and processes that will enhance their skills in avoiding and resolving disputes within and between organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and interpret the implications of the characteristics of conflict in society and in relationships
  2. apply ethically communication, counselling, negotiation and mediation techniques to a variety of conflict situations
  3. examine the influence and implications of power in conflict
  4. evaluate the main alternative dispute resolution techniques and assess the applicability of dispute resolution techniques to specific situations
  5. assess and develop dispute resolution systems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sandra Cockfield

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC3450


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Donohue

Synopsis

Theory of organisation change and development, OD and metaphor, the client-consultant relationship, diagnosis, interventions, organisational learning, resistance to change, managing resistance to change, evaluation and institutionalisation of change, transformation and cultural change, future directions, revision.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify strategies and actions for planned organisational change
  2. critically evaluate different frameworks and philosophies for change management in organisations
  3. integrate and synthesise previous knowledge of organisational change processes
  4. analyse change processes that exist at an individual level, group level and across the organisation as a whole
  5. examine management practices which directly influence the success or otherwise of implementing a planned change process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGF1010

Prohibitions

MGC3130, MGG3130, MGW3130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Mary Anderson

Synopsis

Management theory related to varying cultures. The multinational business enterprise and the significance of cross-cultural variables in the business environment. Topics covered include ethics and social responsibilities; strategic mindsets, control and conflict; industrial relations, new forms of international work and organisation and their management implications.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. assess the application of management theory to various global cultures
  2. explain the complex challenges of the multinational business enterprise at the interpersonal and operational levels
  3. compare a range of cross-cultural variables in the business environment
  4. apply theory to cross cultural scenarios
  5. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of national culture assessment tools.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Mary Anderson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGF1010

Prohibitions

MGC3120, MGG3681, MGW3681


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tui McKeown

Synopsis

A range of major issues impacting on human resource management in organisations including demographic and social change, ethics in HRM, managing diversity, assessment centre techniques, the impact of Government legislation on HRM, the contribution of HRM to improving productivity, managing outsourcing, career development and mentoring.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the major challenges, complexities and issues currently impacting on human resource management in Australian and global organisations
  2. analyse the strategic link between human resource management policies and practices and effective organisation management
  3. identify and recommend human resource management strategies by which managers can maximise organisational effectiveness.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGF2661


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mrs Candida White

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should have an understanding of: the nature of managerial work in organisations; theories of management and their historical development; contemporary issues and practices relating to managing people and organisation's; key factors in the organisation's environment that impact on how managers and the organisations work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define management and summarise the evolution of management ideas on how managers may influence, people, organisations and their contexts to achieve organisational goals. This includes an awareness of the cultural contexts of the original source, development and contemporary application of management theory and practice
  2. identify and discuss contextual factors in the organisation's environment that impact on how people, managers and organisations interact
  3. describe how decision-making, planning, leading, organising and controlling can be managed in organisations
  4. examine the impact on individuals and organisations of contemporary issues in management including, stakeholder interests, ethics and social responsibility
  5. apply the skills of academic writing, research, questioning and analysis required of the management discipline.
  6. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in MGG1010.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mrs Candida White

Prohibitions

MCG1010, MGF1010, MGW1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Christine Lee

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students' awareness of communication issues within organisational settings and their own capacity as professionals to communicate effectively. The unit emphasises the importance of effective communication both oral and written, introduces models of communication and focuses on communication as process and transaction. Overall the unit is designed to allow students the opportunity to explore the ways in which intrapersonal, interpersonal, group and organisational communication are experienced within organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the major theories underpinning managerial communication
  2. examine the relationships between different managerial communication theories and concepts
  3. discuss managerial communication in the context of organisational examples
  4. compare and contrast verbal and nonverbal messages and examine their impact on interpersonal communication
  5. extend skills in written and oral expression as relevant to the unit assessment tasks.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%+ Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Christine Lee

Prohibitions

MGF1100, MGF2111, MGW1100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

This unit comprises part of the Bachelor of Sports Promotion and Event Management. It is designed to provide students with an understanding of, and ability to manage, the diverse array of activities necessary to effectively manage sporting events. This includes the financial components of event management, the ability to plan, implement and present sporting events, and the ability to effectively integrate and satisfy the needs of external stakeholders such as sponsors, media, community, and guests.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop and apply objectives and strategies for sporting events
  2. describe and demonstrate the planning process for sporting events
  3. identify cost and revenue streams for sporting events
  4. demonstrate how to manage relationships with host cities, venues, sponsors, the media, the community and guests
  5. explain and demonstrate how to manage unexpected situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGW2150


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

This unit provides strategic insight into how to manage sport facilities. Many people mistakenly believe that the adage build it and they will come accurately describes the task of managing sporting facilities. Concerns about rising construction costs, aging facilities and the constraint on market growth imposed by small stadiums, together with a shift in focus from the common spectator to the corporate client, are just some of the many reasons why a strategic approach to managing sport facilities is so important to anyone looking to enter the arena of sports marketing. This unit covers the planning, development and operations required from a facility manager to effectively respond to the ever-changing environment of sport marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the nature of sport facility management, including its planning process and key success factors
  2. identify and describe the key components of developing new facilities
  3. identify and describe the key components in operating sport facilities
  4. describe how managers attract events and customers to their sport facilities
  5. identify and explain the risks in operating a sporting facility, and strategies for minimizing the threat they pose
  6. understand how facility managers measure and evaluate the performance of a sport facility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of MKW1120 or MKG1120 and one of MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGW2160


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Soma Pillay

Synopsis

Students gain an understanding of factors affecting the behaviour of people in work settings. The unit focuses on individual, group, and total organisational human factors influencing the effectiveness of organisations, including: the nature of organisations in the global context; individual behaviour including perception, attitudes, values and personality, motivation and performance; group behaviour in organisations -- the properties and management of groups, leaders and leadership, organisational power, influence, communication, conflict and decision making; organisational structure; organisational culture; change; the formal and informal organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine theories of organisational behaviour (OB) to develop fundamental knowledge of OB as an area of management
  2. analyse OB issues from multiple workplace perspectives
  3. examine how managers can use knowledge of OB to manage individual employees and teams
  4. apply theoretical OB concepts to organisational situations using the case study method
  5. demonstrate skills in evaluation and analysis of OB concepts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Soma Pillay

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC2230, MCF2111, MGW2230


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Vivienne Interrigi

Synopsis

This unit will critically analyse the role and function of recruitment, selection and placement processes in human resource management including: pre-recruitment needs, attracting the right person to the vacancy, short-listing applicants, selection methods and measurement, contracts of employment and induction. Contextual factors within the internal and external environment, such as legal and ethical requirements, will be explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explore and critically analyse the current practices and theories of recruitment, selection and placement, including the identification of recommendations to improve current practices
  2. critically analyse the role and function of recruitment and selection in relation to the
organisation's strategic business and HRM objectives within an Australian context
  1. examine the ethical and legal requirements of the recruitment and selection process and illustrate how these impact on the process
  2. understand the role of internal and external consultants and analyse the relationships
between the employer, consultant and candidate
  1. explore the role of recruitment and selection in different contexts and identify future issues and trends in the profession.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Vivienne Interrigi

Prohibitions

MGW2322


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sijun Shao

Synopsis

This unit focuses on employment relations issues, mainly in the Australian context. It includes an overview of the economic, legal and social elements of the employment relationship and the management of commitment and discontent in the workplace; the role of the parties: workers, employers, their collective organisations and the state; the processes of regulation: conciliation and arbitration, individual contracts, enterprise bargaining, negotiation; employment practises: pay, employment, work organisation and skill formation; international influences on employment relations; equity and justice in the workplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply ideas, concepts and theories to analyse employment relations in Australia
  2. utilise international perspectives on significant employment relations issues for evaluating employment relations in Australia
  3. identify and examine the relevant actors, institutions and processes and assess how they shape relations between management and workers a the workplace
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in employment relations and assess how they influence the strategies and policies of the various parties
  5. critically evaluate contemporary developments in employment relations at the international, national, industry and workplace levels.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sijun Shao

Prohibitions

MGC2410, MGF2341, MGW2323


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Christine Lee

Synopsis

The international environment including international trade and investment, and the legal, political, cultural and technological contexts faced by internationalising organisations; forms of operations available to the internationalising organisation; the impact of the multinational enterprise; international strategic planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the impact the international environment has on the internationalisation process of an organisation
  2. evaluate the role and influence of government and international funding and trade organisations
  3. identify the strategic issues impacting on internationalising organisations
  4. analyse how entry mode choice and the functional areas of management impact on the internationalisation of a firm.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Christine Lee

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC2120, MGF2351, MGW2351


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter Townsend

Synopsis

Analysis of the strategic role of HRM in organisations, human resource planning, job design, staffing, performance management, training and development, reward systems, legal issues in employment, HR information systems, and the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the organisational role and context of HRM
  2. describe how HRM can contribute to the achievement of strategic and operational organisational objectives
  3. identify and describe the influence of an organisation's external environment on HRM
  4. identify the range of HR activities and techniques and explain how they can determine, acquire, develop, motivate and reward employees
  5. describe contemporary issues in managing human resources and discuss their influence on HRM.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Townsend

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGF2661, MGC2430, MGW2430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Damian Morgan

Synopsis

Project management for small to medium enterprises introduces the essential concepts, tools and techniques relevant to project management. The unit content covers the broad perspectives of managerial skills and knowledge required to initiate, implement, and evaluate successful projects. These perspectives include strategic planning, financial control, human resource management, and project evaluation. Throughout the unit, the application of relevant information technology and the pursuit of quality outcomes underpin and reinforce these perspectives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the key concepts in project initiation including selection, feasibility, and planning
  2. identify and demonstrate, with examples, the implementation tasks including the preparation of cost estimates, tasks scheduling and project team leadership and coordination
  3. demonstrate methods to control projects and determine the criteria to evaluate projects
  4. describe the project completion process
  5. apply tools and principles to project management through use of information technology, setting quality standards, risk analysis, and identifying obstacles to project success.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Damian Morgan

Prohibitions

MGW2700


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Anura Amarasena

Synopsis

This unit will concentrate on the nature and need for international strategy; the internationalisation process; the context of international strategy; regional strategy; the dynamics of international competition; role of culture in international strategy; corporate control of global corporations and strategic forms of multinational corporations (MNCs); international strategy in services; modes and patterns of international expansion and the management of international strategic cooperation; international strategy and learning; MNCs political strategies; international strategy process and success of international strategies; managing supply chain in the international arena.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use basic tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. identify strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations to operate in a global setting
  3. analyse the opportunities and risks involved in international strategic management and evaluate the impact different modes of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation
  4. describe the influence of various stakeholders on the internationalising firm
  5. identify how internal operations impact on the internationalisation process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ian McLoughlin

Prohibitions

MGW3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Julie Rayner

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to various concepts of organisational change and development. It covers topics including: theories of organisational development, organisational change and organisational transformation; the role of the organisational change practitioner; development of change interventions; employee responses to change; and challenges of change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce students to organisational change and development theories and develop fundamental knowledge of organisational change as an area of management;
  2. explore various models and analytical tools used by organisational change practitioners
  3. identify and critically evaluate a variety of organisational change interventions
  4. develop an understanding of the challenges that both managers and employees face when experiencing change
  5. develop critical thinking and analytical skills in applying organisational change theory to various workplace situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Julie Rayner

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3130, MGF3621, MGW3130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gareth Evans

Synopsis

An introduction to the service concept, service operations management and the role of operations in business strategy. Management processes and systems are introduced to cover structuring the service enterprise (the service delivery system, facility location and layout), and managing service operations (quality and productivity, queuing, facilitating goods, capacity and demand).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role of service operations and its relationship with other organisational functions
  2. provide the necessary skills to be able to examine the various approaches to service operations management
  3. develop an understanding of service operations productivity, its measurement and relationship with other operational functions
  4. demonstrate the importance and interrelatedness of the relationship between service and manufacturing operations management
  5. relate management theory with practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Gareth Evans

Prohibitions

MGW3352


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Gippsland Summer semester A 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sijun Shao

Synopsis

Business environments including markets, critical success factors, and strategies employed to gain a competitive advantage; the nature of strategic management; the analysis and interpretation of business environments; the nature of competition, relative position of firms, individual strategies and their relationship to critical success factors; strengths and weaknesses related to production, logistics, finance, R and D, marketing, administration etc.; the role of structure, controls, rewards, culture and leadership in implementation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify factors that help companies to survive and prosper
  2. compare various models and the actual processes of managing strategies
  3. evaluate various techniques of analysing situation that require a strategic response
  4. debate the factors that lead to strategy success and failure
  5. apply strategic management concepts in such areas as e-business and public and non-profit sectors.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Christine Lee

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC3110, MGF3401, MGW3401


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter Townsend

Synopsis

Introduction to the major differences between domestic and IHRM; cultural, social and ethical issues for IHRM; IHRM planning, policies and procedures; international relations and evaluation of host country environments; recruitment and selection; remuneration; training and compensating expatriates; maintaining the employment relationship within international operations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the environment and context of International Human Resource Management(IHRM)
  2. identify and analyse country/regional characteristics and organisational factors that are of importance for managing human resources internationally
  3. identify and develop key components of IHR strategy and IHR practice for an international firm
  4. assess the impact of IHRM strategy and practice on an international firm's concerns, goals and structures
  5. evaluate strategies for the establishment and maintenance of ethical and sound employment relationships within international organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%+ Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Townsend

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW2430 or MGG2430 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3430, MGF3430, MGW3430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Christine Lee

Synopsis

A study of management theory related to varying cultures, the multinational business enterprise and the significance of cross-cultural variables in the business environment. Topics include ethics and social responsibilities; communication; leadership; motivation, control and conflict; human resource management and industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. relate management theory to various and different cultures
  2. appreciate the complex challenges of the multinational business enterprise at the interpersonal and operational levels
  3. compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Townsend

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW1010 or MGG1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3120, MGF3681, MGW3681


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Maxwell Coulthard

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should have an understanding of: the nature of managerial work in organisations; theories of management and their historical development; contemporary issues and practices relating to managing people and organisations; key factors in the organisation's environment that impact on how managers and the organisations work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define management and summarise the evolution of management ideas on how managers may influence people, organisations and their contexts to achieve organisational goals
  2. identify and discuss contextual factors in the organisations' environments that impact on how people, managers and organisations interact
  3. identify factors that influence individual and group behaviour in organisational settings and illustrate how managers can make use of these factors
  4. describe how decision-making, planning, leading, organising and controlling can be managed in organisations
  5. examine the impact on individuals and organisations of contemporary issues in management including stakeholder interests, ethics and social responsibility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Max Coulthard

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week.

Prohibitions

MGC1010, MGF1010, MGW1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Max Coulthard

Synopsis

This unit combines a broad introduction to the field of 'systems thinking' with a range of systems tools and methods to help students and managers understand and deal with complex systems such as modern organisations or the global climate system. Focusing on a 'new' way of thinking about complex system problems, systems thinking is widely considered essential in understanding and effectively managing contemporary complex organisations as well as complex social and natural system problems such as poverty, environmental degradation, or climate change. The unit is presented both as a set of thinking skills and practical skills that enable policy makers, business managers and public servants to act more effectively and responsibly within their organisations and a complex world.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and contrast Systems Thinking with more traditional approaches, as a generic set of 'new' thinking skills for understanding and dealing with a range of complex systems from modern organisations to the global social and economic system
  2. develop awareness and understanding of a range of the essential principles, tools and methods of systems thinking
  3. apply the systems thinking tools and methods to generate insights and solutions to complex organizational and social/natural systems
  4. communicate systemic insights using the tools and methods of systems thinking.

Assessment

Within Semester Assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Max Coulthard

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week.

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3806, Bachelor of Business at Peninsula campus to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

MGX1400


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Judith Mair

Synopsis

This unit considers festivals and events as important and growing sectors of the tourism industry. Major topics include the nature, scale and scope of festivals and events, their economic impact and the importance of research and planning for their successful operation. Consideration is given to their social and environmental impacts and strategies for minimising any negative effects

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the conceptualisation of an event
  2. identify the different meanings and impacts of events
  3. distinguish the role of stakeholders in event planning and management
  4. analyse operational issues in the planning of an event.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Judith Mair

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prerequisites

NIL

Co-requisites

NIL

Prohibitions

MGW2200, MGW3100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Jamisan Hurley

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine and describe the concepts, techniques and decision tools available to project managers
  2. demonstrate the importance of strategy and prioritising for effective resource allocation and balancing a portfolio of projects
  3. assess and synthesise diverse information for an integrative project management
  4. create and critically evaluate innovative ideas and strategies within ambiguous and uncertain business environments
  5. further enhance communication, inter-personal, problem solving and critical thinking capabilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Max Coulthard

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Off-campus attendance requirements

Not applicable only offered to on campus students

Prerequisites

MGP1010, MKP1120

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3806, Bachelor of Business at Peninsula campus to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

NIL


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Chan Cheah

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the concept of culture and describe its major determinants
  2. examine the links between culture, economic processes and organisations
  3. identify and discuss the impact of culture on communication processes in organisations
  4. critically analyse the influence of culture on business and management practices in different cultural settings
  5. apply knowledge of cross-cultural issues to improve management and team performance.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Max Coulthard

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prerequisites

MGP1010

Co-requisites

Students must be enrolled in course 3806, Bachelor of Business at Peninsula campus to undertake this unit.

Prohibitions

NIL


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glen Croy

Synopsis

This unit is identified and presented as a general introduction to the inherently international and multifaceted behaviour, practice and industry that is tourism. Through our individual and collective experiences, this unit will develop an understanding of tourism that will enable new interpretations of this now fundamental activity. This unit provides an introduction to tourism studies. The main areas covered include the tourist, including motivations and types of tourists, the key components of the tourism industry system, tourism destination development, and the social, economic and environmental impacts of tourism.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe, define and interpret tourism through a range of perspectives and lenses
  2. identify and distinguish components of the tourist experience and the holistic tourist experience
  3. identify and distinguish components of the tourism system and the holistic tourist system
  4. recognise and comprehend the tourism destination and its development
  5. identify and interpret the impacts of, and responses to, tourism.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glen Croy

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prohibitions

MGW1501, MGW2501, MGX2501


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jennifer Laing

Synopsis

This unit introduces and develops an understanding of the role of communication in the tourism experience, including pre-visit, on-site and post-visit communication. The impacts of image and the media on tourism and the tourist experiences are examined. A major focus of this unit is the contribution of communication theory to cross-cultural communication and visitor interpretation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. outline and analyse the importance of image and the role of the media in tourism
  2. analyse tourist communication theory including interpretation
  3. deconstruct cross-cultural considerations to tourist communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jennifer Laing

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prerequisites

MGP2501 or MGX2501

Co-requisites

NIL

Prohibitions

MGW2520, MGW2522


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Glen Croy

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the tourism planning process, approaches to tourism planning, and planning analysis. Through our individual and collective experiences, this unit will develop an understanding of tourism planning that will enable new interpretations of how tourism can be prepared for at national, local and business levels. The main areas covered include success and failure, resource and protected area planning, macro to micro planning contexts, business planning components, and climate change planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply resource management techniques to tourism planning
  2. analyse the macro to micro contexts of tourism planning
  3. comprehend tourism systems and industry
  4. deconstruct internal tourism business planning
  5. demonstrate tourism planning strategies and responses to climate change.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prerequisites

MGP2501 or MGX2501

Prohibitions

MGW2601, MGW3601


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012

6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Dr Glen Croy

Synopsis

This unit provides an expansion and application to the tourism policy and planning process, approaches, decisions and implications. Through our individual and collective experiences, this unit will develop an understanding of tourism policy and planning that will enable new interpretations of how tourism can be prepared for at national, local and organisational levels. The main areas covered include tourism policy inclusion, climate change policy and planning, tourism protected resource policy and planning, and macro to micro tourism planning contexts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and synthesise tourism policy inclusion processes
  2. demonstrate tourism policy and planning strategies for climate change
  3. apply and assess tourism protected resource policy and planning.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glen Croy

Contact hours

6.5 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGP2501 or MGX2501

Prohibitions

MGW3502, MGW2601


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Loretta Inglis (Berwick)

Synopsis

On completion of this unit students should have an understanding of: the nature of managerial work in organisations; theories of management and their historical development; contemporary issues and practices relating to managing people and organisation's; key factors in the organisation's environment that impact on how managers and the organisations work.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define management and summarise the evolution of management ideas on how managers may influence, people, organisations and their contexts to achieve organisational goals. This includes an awareness of the cultural contexts of the original source, development and contemporary application of management theory and practice
  2. identify and discuss contextual factors in the organisation's environment that impact on how people, managers and organisations interact
  3. describe how decision-making, planning, leading, organising and controlling can be managed in organisations
  4. examine the impact on individuals and organisations of contemporary issues in management including, stakeholder interests, ethics and social responsibility
  5. apply the skills of academic writing, research, questioning and analysis required of the management discipline.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Esther Yit Sean Chong

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC1010, MGF1010, MGG1010, MGP1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Adlina Ahmad

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students' awareness of communication issues within organisational settings and their own capacity as professionals to communicate effectively. The unit emphasises the importance of effective communication both oral and written, introduces models of communication and focuses on communication as process and transaction. Overall the unit is designed to allow students the opportunity to explore the ways in which intrapersonal, interpersonal, group and organisational communication are experienced within organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the major theories underpinning managerial communication
  2. examine the relationships between different managerial communication theories and concepts
  3. discuss managerial communication in the context of organisational examples
  4. compare and contrast verbal and nonverbal messages and examine their impact on interpersonal communication
  5. extend skills in written and oral expression as relevant to the unit assessment tasks.

Assessment

On-campus: Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%
Off-campus: Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours) 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Adlina Ahmad

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGF1100, MGG1100, MGF2111


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

This unit comprises part of the Bachelor of Sports Promotion and Event Management. It is designed to provide students with an understanding of, and ability to manage, the diverse array of activities necessary to effectively manage sporting events. This includes the financial components of event management, the ability to plan, implement and present sporting events, and the ability to effectively integrate and satisfy the needs of external stakeholders such as sponsors, media, community, and guests.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop and apply objectives and strategies for sporting events
  2. describe and demonstrate the planning process for sporting events
  3. identify cost and revenue streams for sporting events
  4. demonstrate how to manage relationships with host cities, venues, sponsors, the media, the community and guests
  5. explain and demonstrate how to manage unexpected situations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGG2150


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

This unit provides strategic insight into how to manage sport facilities. Many people mistakenly believe that the adage build it and they will come accurately describes the task of managing sporting facilities. Concerns about rising construction costs, aging facilities and the constraint on market growth imposed by small stadiums, together with a shift in focus from the common spectator to the corporate client, are just some of the many reasons why a strategic approach to managing sport facilities is so important to anyone looking to enter the arena of sports marketing. This unit covers the planning, development and operations required from a facility manager to effectively respond to the ever-changing environment of sport marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the nature of sport facility management, including its planning process and key success factors
  2. identify and describe the key components of developing new facilities
  3. identify and describe the key components in operating sport facilities
  4. describe how managers attract events and customers to their sport facilities
  5. identify and explain the risks in operating a sporting facility, and strategies for minimizing the threat they pose
  6. understand how facility managers measure and evaluate the performance of a sport facility.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (2 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 and MGG1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGG2160


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Judith Mair

Synopsis

This unit considers festivals and events as important and growing sectors of the tourism industry. Major topics include the nature, scale and scope of festivals and events, their economic impact and the importance of research and planning for their successful operation. Consideration is given to their social and environmental impacts and strategies for minimising any negative effects

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the conceptualisation of an event
  2. identify the different meanings and impacts of events
  3. distinguish the role of stakeholders in event planning and management
  4. analyse operational issues in the planning of an event.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Judith Mair

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGW3100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Chantal Beukes (South Africa)

Synopsis

Students gain an understanding of factors affecting the behaviour of people in work settings. The unit focuses on individual, group, and total organisational human factors influencing the effectiveness of organisations, including: the nature of organisations in the global context; individual behaviour including perception, attitudes, values and personality, motivation and performance; group behaviour in organisations -- the properties and management of groups, leaders and leadership, organisational power, influence, communication, conflict and decision making; organisational structure; organisational culture; change; the formal and informal organisation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine theories of organisational behaviour (OB) to develop fundamental knowledge of OB as an area of management
  2. analyse OB issues from multiple workplace perspectives
  3. examine how managers can use knowledge of OB to manage individual employees and teams
  4. apply theoretical OB concepts to organisational situations using the case study method
  5. demonstrate skills in evaluation and analysis of OB concepts.

Assessment

On-campus: Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%
Off-campus: Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Chantal Beukes

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGW1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC2230, MGF2111, MGG2230


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Andrea North-Samardzic (Peninsula)

Synopsis

This unit will critically analyse the role and function of recruitment, selection and placement processes in human resource management including: pre-recruitment needs, attracting the right person to the vacancy, short-listing applicants, selection methods and measurement, contracts of employment and induction. Contextual factors within the internal and external environment, such as legal and ethical requirements, will be explored.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explore and critically analyse the current practices and theories of recruitment, selection and placement, including the identification of recommendations to improve current practices
  2. critically analyse the role and function of recruitment and selection in relation to the organisation's strategic business and HRM objectives within an Australian context
  3. examine the ethical and legal requirements of the recruitment and selection process and illustrate how these impact on the process
  4. understand the role of internal and external consultants and analyse the relationships between the employer, consultant and candidate
  5. explore the role of recruitment and selection in different contexts and identify future issues and trends in the profession.
  6. demonstrate in individual summative assessment tasks the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Julie Rayner (First semester)
Dr Andrea North-Samardzic (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGG2322


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sijun Shao (Gippsland); Mr Gareth Evans (Berwick)

Synopsis

This unit focuses on employment relations issues, mainly in the Australian context. It includes an overview of the economic, legal and social elements of the employment relationship and the management of commitment and discontent in the workplace; the role of the parties: workers, employers, their collective organisations and the state; the processes of regulation: conciliation and arbitration, individual contracts, enterprise bargaining, negotiation; employment practises: pay, employment, work organisation and skill formation; international influences on employment relations; equity and justice in the workplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply ideas, concepts and theories to analyse employment relations in Australia
  2. utilise international perspectives on significant employment relations issues for evaluating employment relations in Australia
  3. identify and examine the relevant actors, institutions and processes and assess how they shape relations between management and workers a the workplace
  4. identify and examine different perspectives and value systems in employment relations and assess how they influence the strategies and policies of the various parties
  5. critically evaluate contemporary developments in employment relations at the international, national, industry and workplace levels
  6. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task the acquisition of a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in this unit.

Assessment

On-campus: Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%
Off-campus: Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sijun Shao (Semester 1)
Dr Sandra Cockfield (Semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC2410, MGF2341, MGG2323


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Maxwell Coulthard

Synopsis

The international environment including international trade and investment, and the legal, political, cultural and technological contexts faced by internationalising organisations; forms of operations available to the internationalising organisation; the impact of the multinational enterprise; international strategic planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the impact the international environment has on the internationalisation process of an organisation
  2. evaluate the role and influence of government and international funding and trade organisations
  3. identify the strategic issues impacting on internationalising organisations
  4. analyse how entry mode choice and the functional areas of management impact on the internationalisation of a firm.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Max Coulthard

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGW1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGC2120, MGF2351, MGG2351


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gordon Thomson (Berwick); Soma Pillay (Gippsland)

Synopsis

Analysis of the strategic role of HRM in organisations, human resource planning, job design, staffing, performance management, training and development, reward systems, legal issues in employment, HR information systems, and the contribution of HRM to competitive advantage.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the organisational role and context of HRM
  2. describe how HRM can contribute to the achievement of strategic and operational organisational objectives
  3. identify and describe the influence of an organisation's external environment on HRM
  4. identify the range of HR activities and techniques and explain how they can determine, acquire, develop, motivate and reward employees
  5. describe contemporary issues in managing human resources and discuss their influence on HRM.
  6. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Townsend (First semester)
Ms Elaine Yin Teng Chew (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGW1010 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGF2661, MGC2430, MGG2430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Richard Cooney

Synopsis

The unit provides and introduction to contemporary quality management practice with a focus on customers, business partners and people working within organisational systems. The unit covers quality management theory, quality control systems, continuous improvement, product and process innovation, the management of knowledge for innovation, teamwork systems and organisational restructuring for innovation and quality management.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define quality in terms of its historical perspective and its role in organisations today
  2. identify core principles of quality management and comment critically on their implications
  3. explain the significance of innovation for improving the competitive position of businesses and industries
  4. examine the role of process improvement as part of a continuous improvement culture
  5. describe and critically assess alternative approaches to implementation of quality management principles and practices in organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Richard Cooney

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGF2511, MGC2250


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jennifer Laing

Synopsis

This unit introduces and develops an understanding of the role of communication in the tourism experience, including pre-visit, on-site and post-visit communication. The impacts of image and the media on tourism and the tourist experiences are examined. A major focus of this unit is the contribution of communication theory to cross-cultural communication and visitor interpretation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. outline and analyse the importance of image and the role of the media in tourism
  2. analyse tourist communication theory including interpretation
  3. deconstruct cross-cultural considerations to tourist communication.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jennifer Laing

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGW2520


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glen Croy

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the tourism planning process, approaches to tourism planning, and planning analysis. Through our individual and collective experiences, this unit will develop an understanding of tourism planning that will enable new interpretations of how tourism can be prepared for at national, local and business levels. The main areas covered include success and failure, resource and protected area planning, macro to micro planning contexts, business planning components, and climate change planning.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. apply resource management techniques to tourism planning
  2. analyse the macro to micro contexts of tourism planning
  3. comprehends tourism systems and industry
  4. deconstruct internal tourism business planning
  5. demonstrate tourism planning strategies and responses to climate change.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glen Croy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW1501, MGX2501 or MGP2501 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGW3601, MGP2601


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Damian Morgan

Synopsis

Project management for small to medium enterprises introduces the essential concepts, tools and techniques relevant to project management. The unit content covers the broad perspectives of managerial skills and knowledge required to initiate, implement, and evaluate successful projects. These perspectives include strategic planning, financial control, human resource management, and project evaluation. Throughout the unit, the application of relevant information technology and the pursuit of quality outcomes underpin and reinforce these perspectives.

Outcomes

The learning goals associate with this unit are to:

  1. explain the key concepts in project initiation including selection, feasibility, and planning
  2. identify and demonstrate, with examples, the implementation tasks including the preparation of cost estimates, tasks scheduling and project team leadership and coordination
  3. demonstrate methods to control projects and determine the criteria to evaluate projects
  4. describe the project completion process
  5. apply tools and principles to project management through use of information technology, setting quality standards, risk analysis, and identifying obstacles to project success.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours) 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Damian Morgan

Contact hours

Equivalent to 36 contact hours per semester.

Prohibitions

MGG2700


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Max Coulthard

Synopsis

This unit will concentrate on the nature and need for international strategy; the internationalisation process; the context of international strategy; regional strategy; the dynamics of international competition; role of culture in international strategy; corporate control of global corporations and strategic forms of multinational corporations (MNCs); international strategy in services; modes and patterns of international expansion and the management of international strategic cooperation; international strategy and learning; MNCs political strategies; international strategy process and success of international strategies; managing supply chain in the international arena.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the concepts and use basic tools for competitive analysis and strategic planning in the international environment
  2. identify strategies for SMEs and multinational organisations to operate in a global setting
  3. analyse the opportunities and risks involved in international strategic management and evaluate the impact different modes of foreign operations have on the internationalising organisation
  4. describe the influence of various stakeholders on the internationalising firm
  5. identify how internal operations impact on the internationalisation process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Max Coulthard

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGG3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Nell Kimberley (First semester)

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to various concepts of organisational change and development. It covers topics including: theories of organisational development, organisational change and organisational transformation; the role of the organisational change practitioner; development of change interventions; employee responses to change; and challenges of change.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. introduce students to organisational change and development theories and develop fundamental knowledge of organisational change as an area of management;
  2. explore various models and analytical tools used by organisational change practitioners
  3. identify and critically evaluate a variety of organisational change interventions
  4. develop an understanding of the challenges that both managers and employees face when experiencing change
  5. develop critical thinking and analytical skills in applying organisational change theory to various workplace situations
  6. demonstrate in the individual summative assessment task a comprehensive understanding of the topics covered in the unit. This is demonstrated by the requirement that the student must attain a mark of at least 40% in the final summative assessment task.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Nell Kimberley (Frist semester)
Associate Professor Hannelize Jacobs (Second semester)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGG1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3130, MGF3621, MGG3130


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Karthyeni Purushothaman

Synopsis

This unit is designed to develop students' awareness of current theoretical perspectives on and of empirical evaluations of organisational initiatives designed to foster wellbeing at both the individual and organisational level. The unit will provide a macro-level framework for examining an organisation's social, ethical and environmental responsibility, followed by an examination of organisational level approaches to wellness including work/life initiatives and OH&S initiatives. At the micro-level the unit will address strategies the individual employees may use to manage their own state of wellness.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. appreciate the relationship between the changing face of organisations into today's business environment and the need for managers to attend to organisational wellness
  2. identify predictors and consequences of 'wellness' and 'toxicity' in the organisational context
  3. describe and evaluate current organisational wellness initiatives
  4. analyse and evaluate current theoretical frameworks of 'wellness' in order to understand and devise 'healthy' organisation initiatives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Andrea Kirk-Brown

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGG1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gareth Evans

Synopsis

An introduction to the service concept, service operations management and the role of operations in business strategy. Management processes and systems are introduced to cover structuring the service enterprise (the service delivery system, facility location and layout), and managing service operations (quality and productivity, queuing, facilitating goods, capacity and demand).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the role of service operations and its relationship with other organisational functions
  2. provide the necessary skills to be able to examine the various approaches to service operations management
  3. develop an understanding of service operations productivity, its measurement and relationship with other operational functions
  4. demonstrate the importance and interrelatedness of the relationship between service and manufacturing operations management
  5. relate management theory with practice.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination (3 hours): 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Ian McLoughlin

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGG3352


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Teh Pei Lee

Synopsis

The components of IT; characteristics of hardware, software and telecommunications; types of information systems; networking and the worldwide web; managing 'information' workers; using IT to promote business objectives and gain competitive advantage; systems development methodology; IT-enabled transformation to create adaptive, flexible organisations; social and system issues associated with IT; managerial problems posed by IT. Computer laboratory exposure to a variety of applications software including electronic mail, project management, graphics, and other decision support software.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define MIS in terms of its historical perspective and its role in organisations today
  2. list core principles of MIS and comment critically on their implications in improving the competitive position of businesses
  3. apply principles of management thought and practice in a simulated, competitive business environment
  4. define components of competitive intelligence and practice competitor analysis
  5. develop critical thinking skills and experience business decision-making from a long-term, senior manager's perspective and improve team skills.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Teh Pei Lee

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGF3381


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gordon Thomson

Synopsis

Business environments including markets, critical success factors, and strategies employed to gain a competitive advantage; the nature of strategic management; the analysis and interpretation of business environments; the nature of competition, relative position of firms, individual strategies and their relationship to critical success factors; strengths and weaknesses related to production, finance, research and development, marketing, administration; the role of structure, controls, rewards, culture and leadership in implementation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify factors that help companies to survive and prosper
  2. compare various business models and the actual processes of managing strategies
  3. evaluate various techniques of analysing situations that require a strategic response
  4. debate the factors that lead to strategy success and failure
  5. apply strategic management concepts in particular cases.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Suzaan Hughes

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGG1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3110, MGF3401, MGG3401


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter Townsend

Synopsis

Introduction to the major differences between domestic and IHRM; cultural, social and ethical issues for IHRM; IHRM planning, policies and procedures; international relations and evaluation of host country environments; recruitment and selection; remuneration; training and compensating expatriates; maintaining the employment relationship within international operations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the environment and context of International Human Resource Management(IHRM)
  2. identify and analyse country/regional characteristics and organisational factors that are of importance for managing human resources internationally
  3. identify and develop key components of IHR strategy and IHR practice for an international firm
  4. assess the impact of IHRM strategy and practice on an international firm's concerns, goals and structures
  5. evaluate strategies for the establishment and maintenance of ethical and sound employment relationships within international organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours) 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Townsend

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGG2430 or MGW2430 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3430, MGF3430, MGG3430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Gary Lacey (Berwick)

Synopsis

This unit provides an introduction to the tourism policy, process, approaches and implications. The unit considers how and why governments develop policies that affect the tourism industry, related sectors, and the community. Through our individual and collective experiences, this unit will develop an understanding of tourism policy that will enable new interpretations of how tourism can be prepared for at national, local and business levels. The main areas covered include the roles of international to local level government and organisations in tourism policy, the inclusion of partners and stakeholders in tourism policy and implementation, and contemporary tourism policy issues.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role of tourism policy
  2. explain and evaluate government policy processes
  3. analyse tourism policy consultation and engagement with communities and other stakeholders
  4. examine key contemporary tourism policy issues and government responses to these.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glen Croy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW2501 or MGX2501 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGW1502, MGW2502


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jennifer Laing

Synopsis

This unit is focused on theories and models tourist behaviour including consumer behaviour, tourist decision-making and on-site behaviour. It explores the concept of the tourist experience. Issues, theories and debates around topics such as authenticity, tourist motivation and tourist satisfaction are also examined.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to explain and analyse theories of authenticity and dissonance
  2. to distinguish and analyse models and theories of tourist motivation
  3. to analyse tourist expectations and drivers of satisfaction
  4. to explain and critique tourist decision-making, experience and on-site behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jennifer Laing

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW2501 or MGX2501 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGW2521


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glen Croy

Synopsis

This unit is identified and presented as the capstone unit for the tourism major in the Bachelor of Business and Commerce and as such draws together the learning and experiences gained from previous tourism units, other units and general life experiences. It includes consideration of key issues around the general theme of sustainable destinations. It provides an opportunity to apply sustainability principles and ethics to managing tourism destination development and its impacts.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. distinguish a destination's tourism attractions
  2. explain destination sustainable tourism issues
  3. outline tourism ethics and its relevance to sustainability
  4. evaluate sustainability, destination development and impacts.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glen Croy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW2501 or MGX2501 before undertaking this unit

Prohibitions

MGW3541


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Peter Townsend

Synopsis

A study of management theory related to varying cultures, the multinational business enterprise and the significance of cross-cultural variables in the business environment. Topics include ethics and social responsibilities; communication; leadership; motivation, control and conflict; human resource management and industrial relations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. relate management theory to various and different cultures
  2. appreciate the complex challenges of the multinational business enterprise at the interpersonal and operational levels
  3. compare and contrast a range of cross-cultural variables in the business environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Peter Townsend

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGG1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3120, MGF3681, MGG3681


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Mr Rod Sarah

Synopsis

This unit combines a broad introduction to the field of 'systems thinking' with a range of systems tools and methods to help students and managers understand and deal with complex systems such as modern organisations or the global climate system. Focusing on a 'new' way of thinking about complex system problems, systems thinking is widely considered essential in understanding and effectively managing contemporary complex organisations as well as complex social and natural system problems such as poverty, environmental degradation, or climate change. The unit is presented both as a set of thinking skills and practical skills that enable policy makers, business managers and public servants to act more effectively and responsibly within their organisations and a complex world.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe and contrast Systems Thinking with more traditional approaches, as a generic set of 'new' thinking skills for understanding and dealing with a range of complex systems from modern organisations to the global climate system
  2. develop awareness and understanding of a range of the essential principles, tools and methods of systems thinking
  3. apply the systems thinking tools and methods to generate insights and learning about complex organisations and social/natural systems
  4. communicate systemic insights using the tools and methods of systems thinking.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (2 hours, open-book): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Jeff McLean

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGC2950


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glen Croy

Synopsis

This unit is identified and presented as a general introduction to the inherently international and multifaceted behaviour, practice and industry that is tourism. Through our individual and collective experiences, this unit will develop an understanding of tourism that will enable new interpretations of this now fundamental activity. This unit provides an introduction to tourism studies. The main areas covered include the tourist, including motivations and types of tourists, the key components of the tourism industry system, tourism destination development, and the social, economic and environmental impacts of tourism.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe, define and interpret tourism through a range of perspectives and lenses
  2. identify and distinguish components of the tourist experience and the holistic tourist experience
  3. identify and distinguish components of the tourism system and the holistic tourist system
  4. recognise and comprehend the tourism destination and its development
  5. identify and interpret the impacts of, and responses to, tourism.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination (3 hours): 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Glen Croy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MGW1501, MGW2501, MGP2501


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Prato Winter semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Elizabeth Prior Jonson

Synopsis

Do corporations have any responsibilities beyond profit maximisation? To what extent should business activities be left to the operation of the free market and to what extent should they be regulated through internal and external mechanisms? This unit examines the theoretical foundations of the different answers that have been given to these two fundamental questions. More specifically it examines the topics of ethical issues in marketing and advertising, climate change and environmental protection regulation and corporate governance, human resource management and social accounting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify important ethical issues that arise in various business contexts
  2. explain the implications of adopting different approaches to Corporate Social Responsibility
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of the different approaches to Corporate Social Responsibility
  4. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of different mechanisms for regulating business behaviour
  5. apply different approaches to Corporate Social Responsibility and different approaches to regulation to issues specific to marketing, HRM, environment and social accounting.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Elizabeth Prior Jonson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Completion of 12 units (72 points) of study


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Tui McKeown

Synopsis

Identifies and develops the thinking skills that enable the formulation of innovative HR strategies that advance business needs and objectives. Topics include: the external and global environment for HRM, strategic staffing, strategic employee and career development, strategic performance management and reward, strategic design of work processes and systems, the strategic relationship between technology and HR, and characteristics of innovative and value-adding HR systems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically assess the various areas of HRM strategy
  2. judge the role and importance of SHRM in enhancing organisational performance
  3. discriminate the differences in the key models of SHRM
  4. summarise how HRM can be used as a strategic tool for gaining competitive advantage
  5. recommend how to implement strategic HRM procedures into organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Tui McKeown

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGF2661 or MGC2430


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Suzaan Hughes

Synopsis

This unit, as a final semester unit, integrates the business management knowledge, skills and attitudes students acquired throughout their bachelor study. The unit teaches students all the essential elements of running a business including strategic planning, leadership, teamwork, cause and effect relationships between functional areas (research and development, marketing, production and finance), satisfying customer demands, and competitive analysis in a simulated learning environment. More specifically students will learn to:

  • understand the value of 'focusing' in the strategic implementation process
  • understand how decisions in one part of the business impacts other parts of the business
  • practice decision-making as a team across all key areas of a business
  • use the information from balance sheets, income statements and cash flow statements to improve business decision making
  • analyse competitors' performance and market positioning
  • build core competencies within the business to take a differentiation or low cost position in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the elements of strategic business planning
  2. study and understand the external factors that affect business
  3. study and apply business terminology
  4. identify and analyse the internal functional areas of business
  5. study and understand the basic principles of business finance
  6. understand and conduct analysis of competitors
  7. experience the effects of business decision making through simulation
  8. develop skills to work effectively in teams.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Suzaan Hughes

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MGW3401 and AFW1000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSouth Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Norman Chiliya

Synopsis

The unit provides an overall introduction to entrepreneurship, from a theoretical to a process application of its principles. Topics include: definitions of entrepreneurship, nature and importance of entrepreneurs, the advantages and disadvantages of being an entrepreneur, types of entrepreneurs, the new venture creation process, developing a business plan, legal issues for entrepreneurs, sources of capital, legal forms of ownership, the role of government in developing and enabling the small business environment, and sources of information, funding, advices, business tools and other aids for entrepreneurs. The unit also applies this knowledge to the emerging markets of developing countries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to

  1. understand the fundamentals, concepts and processes of entrepreneurship
  2. appreciate and understand the entrepreneurial perspective
  3. gain an understanding of the role of entrepreneurs and small business in the South African economy and describe the benefits and potential drawbacks of owning a small business
  4. understand the role of government in developing and enabling the small business environment
  5. identify and validate business ideas
  6. research and develop a business plan
  7. understand the funding and finance implications
  8. evaluate the different forms of small business ownership
  9. explore and understand the contemporary challenges for entrepreneurship
  10. demonstrate an understanding of the role played by entrepreneurs and small businesses in regional economic development and in developing nations
  11. understand the major differences between the African and western model of entrepreneurship
  12. demonstrate a knowledge of how these differences are manifested and how they may be managed successfully.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Norman Chiliya

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MGW1010 or MGC1010 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MGC3250


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Daniel Prajogo

Synopsis

Unit covers the major activities within the operations function of businesses, both manufacturing and service. The essential role of operations is to deliver value to customers by providing the right products, at the right quality standard, in the right quantities, at the right times, and doing so at the right cost (efficiently). The key operations activities included in this unit starts from pre-production tasks (designing products and processes), resource and capacity planning, sequencing and scheduling of the operations, supply chain and inventory management, quality control, and improvement methods whereby the system and its procedures are modified in the light of learning process.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and describe the components of the operations management function in different types of organisations
  2. explain operations process planning and control including capacity, scheduling, inventory and materials requirements planning
  3. examine the concepts of managing people and processes as part of a manufacturing system
  4. analyse decision problems in operations and the relationship of operations decisions to other business decisions
  5. communicate in writing the results of analysis of operations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Daniel Prajogo

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

12 units (72 points)


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sen Sendjaya

Synopsis

This interactive unit examines principles and practices of leadership which are vital for aspiring leaders of the future. Through a personal portfolio of leadership concepts, character, and competencies, students develop their potential for growth as strategic leaders of the 21st century organisations. Inspiring stories of leadership successes and failures from exemplary leaders in the past and present will guide students' leadership journey to find their own authentic voice. A plethora of cutting-edge leadership materials (research articles, movies and videos, case studies, role-plays, games, self-assessments) will also be featured weekly to enhance students' learning experience.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of major theories of organisational leadership
  2. formulate a framework of leadership that would help students make sense of their current and future leadership experiences and discern critical lessons drawn
  3. develop a higher self awareness of students' own personality, values, attitudes, and styles as well as strengths and weaknesses pertinent to their leadership aspirations
  4. construct a personal leadership philosophy outlining students' convictions on ethical and compassionate leadership and its impacts on in real-world organisational contexts
  5. analyse and synthesise crucial roles and positive impacts that managers and leaders can make to organisations and their stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sen Sendjaya

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

It is recommended that students complete MGC1010, MGF1010 or MGW1010 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Donohue

Synopsis

Basic introduction to research design in management; types of research designs; qualitative and quantitative data collection and measurement techniques; coding data; reliability and validity; qualitative and quantitative methods of analysis; interpreting and discussing results; structuring and writing the research report; integrating individual research into overall management literature.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse and interpret basic research designs in the management discipline
  2. construct research questions grounded in a theoretical and conceptual framework
  3. assess the appropriateness, types, and use of qualitative and quantitative data collection and analysis techniques as a means of investigating and answering research questions in the management discipline
  4. identify, search for, and locate secondary data and knowledge relevant to management research, as well as understanding the process of generating or collecting primary data
  5. develop academic writing skills appropriate to the discipline for reporting on business management research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BEW4000, MGX5000


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Elizabeth Prior Jonson

Synopsis

This unit analyses different ways in which management has been represented in management theory, and how these have affected judgements about the rationality and legitimacy of management practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the different perspectives from which a particular event or process may be viewed
  2. demonstrate a sound understanding of a selection of paradigms that are relevant for solving contemporary management problems
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of competing paradigms
  4. select a particular area of interest and appropriate paradigms for paradigm comparison.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Elizabeth Prior Jonson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in the following courses: 0026, 0171, 0181, 0508 to undertake this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Donohue

Synopsis

Graphical and multivariate data analysis techniques to communicate information derived from large scale survey data. Desktop and mainframe information technology is integrated to analyse data from various surveys. Teaching strategies include weekly workshop sessions dealing with the principles of data analysis; practical computer laboratory sessions; individual and team-based exercises.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. select and conduct preliminary analyses of data in order to assess their suitability for further analysis
  2. demonstrate proficiency in the use of data analytic software such as SPSS
  3. analyse data using qualitative techniques (eg: content, thematic analysis) in order to answer research questions and/or test hypotheses
  4. analyse data using quantitative techniques (univariate, bivariate, multivariate) in order to answer research questions and/or test hypotheses
  5. interpret and report the results/findings obtained from qualitative and quantitative data analytic techniques.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0508 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

BEW4010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Giles Hirst

Synopsis

Topics selected for emphasis will alter as contemporary issues change. The study of great ideas in management on motivation, job design, human resource management, ethics, social responsibility, leadership, production/operations management, business policy, strategy, and the management process are explored through the study of the works of major management scholars.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and critically examine a range of Contemporary Issues in Management from a variety of theoretical and practical perspectives
  2. demonstrate a range of relevant scholarship/research skills in acquiring, integrating, interpreting, synthesising, utilising and communicating information about the contemporary issues examined
  3. summarise the major implications of the issues examined as they relate to 1) their own lives and their careers in organisations, 2) the theory and practice of managers and management, and 3) the broader societal and environmental implications of the issues, both now and into the future
  4. demonstrate skills in written and inter-personal communication including creating effective learning environments for themselves and others.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Giles Hirst

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0508 to undertake this unit


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2012 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester to First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ross Donohue

Synopsis

Students work under the guidance of a supervisor to carry out research that addresses: a classic or contemporary disciplinary debate; a current policy issue; or a generic issue within management practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:
1. design and execute an independent research project over the course of two semesters, under the guidance of a staff supervisor. Projects may be based in qualitative or quantitative methodologies, or may include a mixed methods approach For example, a quantitative project based on surveys will typically require: elucidation of the research question, conduct of a critical review of the relevant literature in relation to the chosen topic area, deriving hypotheses, identifying a target population, gaining ethics approval, designing a questionnaire, gathering the data, analysing the data using appropriate techniques, drawing conclusions and producing a major analytical thesis of up to 20,000 words on the project.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Ross Donohue

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0181 or 0508 to undertake this unit

Prohibitions

BEW4100


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Rowan Kennedy

Synopsis

This unit introduces students to the broad discipline of marketing. It encompasses marketing's role in a dynamic business environment and introduces students to the concepts and strategies employed by marketers in facing the challenges presented by the ever-changing world of business. The aim of the unit is to provide students with the conceptual skills necessary to identify and solve marketing problems. The unit provides a foundation for those students seeking to pursue further study in marketing; however it covers the broad scope of marketing for those students undertaking only one marketing unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key concepts upon which the practice of marketing is based
  2. recognise these concepts in the marketplace and in everyday life
  3. discuss the role and influence of marketing in the organisational environment
  4. discuss how key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Rowan Kennedy

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MKF1120, MKG1120, MKW1120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Thompson

Synopsis

A study of the factors that influence, explain and help predict consumption behaviour in both individuals and organisations. How concepts and theories developed in the social sciences provide the theoretical background to understand individual, cultural and group influences on the behaviour of consumers. Examines the use marketers make of this information in developing marketing strategies, predicting behaviour and influencing consumers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the theoretical foundations of human behaviour that are relevant to the practice of marketing
  2. demonstrate an ability, using academic journals, to effectively research the theoretical bases of consumer behaviour
  3. evaluate the main theories and concepts from the behavioural sciences relevant to marketing and discuss how they provide a basis for understanding individual, group and cultural influences on consumer behaviour
  4. illustrate the application of these concepts, theories and models in the influence, explanation and prediction of consumption behaviour
  5. demonstrate an appreciation of how marketers use behavioural information in the design and development of marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Thompson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKC1200

Prohibitions

MKF2111, MKG2402, MKW2111, MKW2402


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Satheesh Seenivasan

Synopsis

Decision support systems in marketing, characterising marketing environments, new product diffusion, repeat purchase models, market share analysis, generalised response models (for the univariate and the multivariate market mix), dynamic advertising response, advertising allocation (geographic and temporal) and decision theory applied to competitor response.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a capability for applying marketing models to a range of marketing phenomena
  2. equip students with the ability to interpret output and develop management recommendations
  3. appreciate the assumptions and limitations of marketing models

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Satheesh Seenivasan

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKC1200 and ETC1000 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKF2131, MKW2131


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Nicolas Pontes

Synopsis

This subject builds on the concepts and issues covered in MKC1200 Principles of marketing. It emphasises the role of marketing management in contemporary organisations, with particular focus on the marketing planning role and the formulation of marketing strategies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the scope of the marketing management function and its role within organisations
  2. analyse the external and internal environments of an organisation
  3. devise appropriate marketing strategies within the marketing planning process
  4. convince a manager to adopt a proposed marketing plan based on written and oral submissions

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Nicolas Pontes

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

A minimum of 48 credit points, including MKC1200 and one other marketing unit.

Prohibitions

MKF3121, MKG3121, MKW3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Neil Diamond and Dr Stanislav Stakhovych

Synopsis

This unit introduces sample survey methods, statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and also introduces qualitative research techniques. It provides students with the knowledge and skills required to understand the role research methods play in problem identification, decision making, strategy development, marketing planning and the evaluation of marketing performance.

Outcomes

The learning objectives of this unit are to:

  1. describe the steps in planning and implementing marketing research projects
  2. demonstrate the skills and competencies required to conduct both qualitative and quantitative marketing research
  3. demonstrate the skills required to analyse and interpret sample data
  4. understand the role and importance of marketing research within organisations
  5. communicate the results of marketing research projects.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Neil Diamond

Contact hours

4 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETC1000 and MKC1200

Prohibitions

ETC2500, MKF2121, MKG2420, MKW2420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Scholem

Synopsis

Introduction to the recent literature relating to implementation, evaluation and control of marketing strategies. Current concepts, theories and applications are addressed in the areas of market orientation, internal marketing, customer service and loyalty issues in marketing, brand equity, relationship marketing, marketing productivity analysis, marketing financial performance analysis, marketing organisation, database marketing, the use of technology information processes and marketing performance assessment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide students with a first hand appreciation of the current role of marketing in organisations; and provide them with the skills to apply the academic knowledge gained at university
  2. critically evaluate and appreciate the change in marketing emphasis away from a functional approach (eg four Ps) towards a more market-oriented and market-driven approach
  3. identify, analyse and apply appropriate measurement criteria to assess the implementation and effectiveness of the marketing strategies
  4. distinguish between the strategic (soft) and operational (hard) aspects of implementation

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Peter Scholem

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKC2210 and MKC3130 before undertaking this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Munyaradzi Nyadzayo

Synopsis

This subject integrates the conceptual knowledge and skills developed in earlier marketing subjects and sharpens students' abilities to analyse, evaluate and implement marketing strategies. The subject emphasises strategic analysis and the process of decision making in a marketing management context.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and functional aspects of marketing (and other business disciplines) into a practical problem-solving framework
  2. analyse a marketing problem based on supplied information
  3. design and recommend marketing strategies within a given context
  4. source and select relevant marketing theories to support analysis and recommendations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Munyaradzi Nyadzayo

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKC2210

Prohibitions

MKF3131, MKG3440, MKW3131, MKW3440


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yongfu He

Synopsis

In a largely deregulated economy companies which retain a domestic focus have found themselves facing increasing international competition and declining market opportunities. Thus, no market can exist without acknowledging international forces, trends and pressures. International trade, investment and service markets have been the fastest growing sectors of the world economy since the end of WWII. The dynamic growth of international markets and global marketing has evolved in a context of fundamental underlying forces and concepts. Electronic marketing; globalisation; standardisation; customisation; and horizontal management structures are some of those influences.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate how a range of international marketing criteria (culture and so on) impact on a chosen and specific foreign market
  2. develop, analyse, justify and evaluate market entry and longer term foreign marketing plans for a specific market
  3. understand how current issues, trends and research in international marketing impact on designated foreign market segments
  4. identify and evaluate how a range of specialised, localised and specific issues might impact upon business activity within a designated foreign market segment
  5. utilise independent critical thinking and applied learning skills to develop an international marketing orientation in terms of a chosen market context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKC1200

Prohibitions

MKF3531, MKF3761, MKG3444, MKW3444


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Mark Bender

Synopsis

The legal framework which operates in relation to marketing decisions and practice. The impact of common law, legislation and self-regulating codes of practice in the market place. Particular topics include intellectual property rights, product development and promotion, product safety and quality, the regulation of unfair and anti-competitive conduct, franchising and electronic marketing and the law.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:
1. be able to apply the main principles of law affecting the development of new products, the promotion of products, the pricing of products and the distribution process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 30%
Examination: 70%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Mark Bender

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

BTC1110 and MKC1200

Prohibitions

BTC3300, BTF3181, BTW3281


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Thompson

Synopsis

This unit builds on MKC1200 by extending the issues relating to communication. Conceptual framework for the planning, integration and control of the communication process; determining the communication options available to organisations; developing realistic communication objectives for different types of marketing communication; budgeting and allocating resources to the communication elements within the budget. Evaluating the effectiveness of the marketing communication plan and the strategic use of the techniques of advertising, sales promotion, publicity/PR and personal selling, sponsorship, direct marketing and the use of communication in electronic commerce.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically evaluate the role of Integrated Marketing Communication in building brand equity
  2. employ a conceptual framework for the planning, integrating and control of the marketing communication process
  3. demonstrate the strategic use of each of the communication elements -- advertising, direct marketing, sales promotion and PR/publicity
  4. formulate relevant ideas on campaign message and creative strategies and discuss them
  5. recommend appropriate ways to evaluate a marketing communication campaign.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Thompson

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKC2110

Prohibitions

MKG2460, MKF3461, MKW3461, MKW2460, MKW2211


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Gary Deng / Marketing

Synopsis

Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and models to analyse the discrete choice behaviour of individuals. Topics include multivariate analysis of variance, principal components analysis, factor analysis, correspondence analysis and models of discrete choice behaviour. Statistical software and case studies will be utilised during this subject and students will apply the techniques to a variety of practical problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine exploratory factor analysis and structural equation modelling
  2. explain how multiple regression and multivariate analysis of covariance can be used to analyse survey data
  3. examine the use and importance of logistic regression in discrete-choice modelling studies
  4. critically analyse the role of cluster analysis and multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis in understanding multivariate data
  5. apply a statistical package (SPSS) to a range of data.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Catherine Forbes

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

At least one of ETC2400, ETC2410, ETC2430, ETC2450, ETC2500/MKC2500

Prohibitions

ETC3500, ETC4350, ETF3500, MKF3500


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Wagstaff (First Semester);Dr Erica Brady (Second Semester)

Synopsis

Introduction to marketing activities undertaken by a wide range of organisations (business, government, profit, non profit); examines marketing theory, the marketing concept and its evolution from a strategic and applied perspective. The development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation and marketing's role, value-exchange processes, buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis, the marketing environment, the use of marketing decision making tools; product concepts, strategies and development; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key concepts upon which the practice of marketing is based
  2. recognise these concepts in the marketplace and in everyday life
  3. discuss the role and influence of marketing in the organisational environment
  4. discuss how key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Peter Wagstaff (semester 1)
Dr Erica Brady (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MKC1200, MKG1120, MKP1120, MKW1120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Gerri Spassova (First Semester); Dr Mauricio Palmeira (Second Semester)

Synopsis

A study of the factors that influence, explain and help predict consumption behaviour for both individuals and organisations. How concepts and theories developed in the social sciences provide the theoretical background to understand individual, cultural and group influences on the behaviour of consumers. The use marketers make of this information in developing marketing strategies, predicting behaviour and influencing consumers.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the basic concepts of consumer behaviour describe how this knowledge can be used by marketers
  2. demonstrate ability to segment markets using consumer behaviour concepts/constructs
  3. identify and illustrate how these concepts can be used to explain the decisions buyers make in the marketplace
  4. analyse the behaviour profiles of specific market segments and understand the basic aspects of strategy development as it applies to specific target groups
  5. explain and apply marketing communication in relation to consumer behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Gerri Spassova (semester 1)
Dr Mauricio Palmeira (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKW1120

Prohibitions

MKG2402


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Dominic Thomas (First Semester);Dr Stanislav Stakhovych (Second Semester)

Synopsis

The process of marketing research. Role of research in the marketing decision process. Developing key outputs -- brief, proposal, report. Planning and managing a research project. Qualitative and quantitative research techniques. Statistical analysis, marketing interpretation and reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide a working knowledge of key concepts and methods used in marketing research
  2. develop a capability in formulating a theoretical framework for a marketing problem/opportunity
  3. provide an understanding of how to formulate a research design
  4. develop an ability to apply SPSS statistical software
  5. develop an ability to interpret statistical output from a marketing perspective.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Dominic Thomas (semester 1)
Dr Stanislav Stakhovych (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETX1100 or PSY1022 and MKF1120

Co-requisites

MKF2111 or MKW2111

Prohibitions

MKW2420, MKC2500, MKG2420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Satheesh Seenivasan

Synopsis

Quantitative analysis for marketing, response models, segmentation and targeting, positioning analysis, decision analysis, conjoint analysis; advertising decision models, pricing decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop a capability for applying marketing models to a range of marketing phenomena
  2. equip students with the ability to interpret output and develop management recommendations
  3. appreciate the assumptions and limitations of marketing models.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Satheesh Seenivasan

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF2121

Prohibitions

MKC2130, MKW2131


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Narelle Pittard

Synopsis

This unit is run jointly between the Department of Design and the Department of Marketing. The unit reviews the history of packaging, and the dual use of package in today's environment, specifically focusing on both the legal and social requirement of packages, alongside the branding implications. This unit features a studio component in which students are encouraged to design and create their own packages.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify the importance of packaging as an element of product design
  2. describe the legislative requirements and production requirements associated with packaging
  3. appreciate some of the problems and opportunities facing marketers and designers, as part of the product design process
  4. implement packaging strategies
  5. appreciate the relationship between packaging and branding.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or equivalent


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Erica Brady (First Semester and Second Semester);Dr Sean Sands (Summer Semester)

Synopsis

Proposals to undertake a special studies subject should be prepared before the start of the semester, in order for the student to arrange a supervisor and finalise a viable study program (with a written contract detailing performance requirements and assessment methods).

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. design an individual project to meet specific needs
  2. formulate a number of questions to be answered by the project
  3. identify and critically analyse data relevant to the project
  4. recommend an outcome based on the project findings.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady (First semester and Second semester)
Dr Sean Sands (Summer semester)

Contact hours

Customised study program by permission

Prerequisites

Permission required


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Erica Brady

Synopsis

The development of corporate marketing strategies; marketing planning procedure; evaluation and control in marketing planning; Australian case studies in corporate marketing planning and strategy. Concepts of product management; designing a product strategy; monitoring planning/marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the relationship between corporate planning and marketing planning in a business environment
  2. demonstrate the relationship between corporate objective setting and marketing objective setting
  3. construct or prepare a marketing plan, which incorporates the specific elements of the marketing mix to achieve specific marketing objectives
  4. develop and enhance appropriate written and oral communications and analytical skills required for the effective presentation of a marketing plan
  5. understand how a marketing plan is implemented in practice

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed the following two units: MKF2111 and MKF2121

Prohibitions

MKG3121, MKW3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Junzhao Ma (First Semester); Dr Mauricio Palmeira (Second Semester)

Synopsis

Using the case study method this unit provides an analytical framework from which students can explore how marketing strategy is applied throughout a variety of industries. Students will be taught how to analyse, evaluate and implement marketing strategy. A theoretical grounding in introductory marketing, marketing research, buyer behaviour and communications is essential to students undertaking this unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and functional aspects of marketing (and other business disciplines) into a practical problem-solving framework
  2. analyse information supplied from a case and identify the core marketing problem
  3. design, evaluate and recommend marketing strategies that solve the identified core marketing problem
  4. source and select relevant marketing theories and marketing tools to support analysis and recommendations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 75%
Examination: 25%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Junzhao Ma (semester 1)
Dr Mauricio Palmeira (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed the following three units: MKF2111, MKF2121 and MKF3121

Prohibitions

MKC3130, MKG3440, MKW3131, MKW3440


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jane Carroll

Synopsis

The unit is designed to sensitise students to the issues which affect a firm's ability to compete effectively, and from which competitive advantage is derived.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and interpret the trends and challenges created by an increasingly competitive and dynamic business/organisational environment
  2. analyse an organisation, taking account of its external environs and identify activities from which competitive advantage may originate
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of the main competitive advantage theoretical perspectives and make recommendations how an organisation may develop its competitive advantage
  4. create and design strategies for specific organisations to build sustainable competitive advantage using a range of current issues that take into account the dynamic external environment and the organisations skills and resources.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed AFF1000, BTF1010 and MKF1120 or must have passed MKF1120 and PMM1010


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2012 (On-campus block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Yelena Tsarenko

Synopsis

An in-depth analysis of the marketing techniques that apply to service organisations and industries including service design and delivery, customer service, service quality measurement and internal marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define a service and understand the implications of this on marketing research, buyer behaviour, classification of services and internationalising services
  2. design a service using blueprinting and the servuction model
  3. develop and implement promotional, pricing, product, distribution strategies for a service giving consideration to the demand management implications
  4. explain the importance of the measurement of service quality, giving consideration to relationship marketing theory.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Yelena Tsarenko

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKW1120 and 7 other first-year units

Prohibitions

MKC2300, MKW3301


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Irene Powell

Synopsis

The primary aim of this unit is to explore the use of marketing communication to build and sustain brands, based on knowledge of how communication works, the institutions which participate in the process and the practical business processes necessary to achieve and measure defined communication goals. In particular, students will be able to understand the integrated nature of communication and develop a full appreciation of advertising, sales promotion, public relations, publicity and direct marketing in a digital and contemporary environment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. use a conceptual framework for the planning, integrating, control and effectiveness evaluation of the marketing communication process for any brand
  2. construct realistic communication objectives and demonstrate the strategic use of individual and integrated communication elements to achieve these objectives
  3. set a marketing communication budget and allocate resources to the communication elements within this budget
  4. provide relevant input towards creative and media strategy
  5. formulate relevant ideas on communication issues, present and discuss them.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Irene Powell

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120

Prohibitions

MKC3460, MKG2460, MKW2211, MKW2460


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Kimble Montagu

Synopsis

Customer contact and relations. A broad overview of the sales area focusing on business to business and person to person activities. Issues include interpersonal persuasion and influence. In addition to these knowledge-based topics, the unit exposes students to practical interpersonal skills involving persuasive group presentations, negotiations and sales. It covers areas of management, which focus on buying-centre/selling team relationships. There is a focus on the relationship between the functions of marketing and sales within organisations and the effect on corporate performance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. evaluate different selling situations and select appropriate selling approaches to implement
  2. demonstrate an ability to communicate and negotiate persuasively and professionally in a sales setting
  3. apply the key elements of sales management, personal selling and negotiation theory, specific to business relationships
  4. recommend appropriate sales management strategies for recruitment, selection, development, supervision, motivation and evaluation of salespeople.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKW1120

Prohibitions

MKG3442


6 points, SCA Band 0 (NATIONAL PRIORITY), 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Professor Felix Mavondo

Synopsis

Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and models to analyse the discrete choice behaviour of individuals. Topics include multivariate analysis of variance, principal components analysis, factor analysis, correspondence analysis and models of discrete choice behaviour. Statistical software and case studies will be utilised during this unit and students will apply the techniques to a variety of practical problems.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate an understanding of the role that multivariate statistical techniques such as factor analysis, structural equation modelling, logistic regression, categorical data analysis, cluster analysis, multidimensional scaling and correspondence analysis, play in uncovering relationships and patterns in survey data
  2. appraise the strengths and limitations of these techniques
  3. apply tools in SPSS to generate solutions for the appropriate statistical techniques
  4. demonstrate skills in using the appropriate statistical techniques from a user and provider perspective
  5. demonstrate skills in communicating the results of the analysis so that decision making can be implemented.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Felix Mavondo

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

ETX2111, ETX2121 or MKF2121

Prohibitions

ETC3500, ETF3500, MKC3500


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Mr Kimble Montagu

Synopsis

Contemporary issues in international trade and their potential to impact on the marketing initiative of companies; the economic, political, geographic, demographic and cultural issues which influence national business environments; the conduct and outcome of market research in other countries.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the issues facing the global marketplace and their influence on strategic marketing decision-making especially in the functional areas of marketing
  2. critically analyse the volatile and changeable nature of international markets and be able to apply marketing theories and knowledge accordingly
  3. evaluate the issues associated with market entry and the impact on long term survival in a target international market
  4. critically assess alternative market entry strategies and their relative value in different markets
  5. formulate marketing plans for international operations especially in the Asia-Pacific region.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKW1120

Prohibitions

MKC3220, MKW3444, MKG3444


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Peter Wagstaff

Synopsis

Traditional business disciplines are starting to appreciate the fundamental challenges presented by the application of technology to their knowledge base. In marketing the most visible agent of change has been www and online transacting which has already revolutionised a number of sectors of the world economy. This subject takes marketing and traditional views of marketing and exposes them to critical analysis in the light of technological change. It explores how marketers can utilise different ways of understanding, creating, communicating and delivering customer value in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. illustrate insight into how traditional marketing structures and concepts, techniques and activities translate into the electronic marketing medium
  2. demonstrate an integrated perspective of how electronic marketing contributes to value creation for all stakeholders
  3. illustrate an ability to analyse the market and to create and develop innovative electronic solutions to fulfil identifiable needs
  4. combine theory with the pragmatism required to effectively traverse the divide between marketing and delivering an electronic solution to market needs.

Assessment

Students will choose an assessment regime from the following:
a) Examination (3 hours): 100%;
b) Within semester assessment: 50% and Examination (2 hours): 50%;
c) Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Peter Wagstaff

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Griffiths, Ms Maxine Bradshaw (student contact at Gippsland)

Synopsis

Introduction to marketing activities undertaken by business, government, profit, non profit organisations. Marketing theory, the marketing concept and its evolution from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation and marketing's role, value-exchange processes, buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis, the marketing environment, the use of marketing decision making tools; product concepts, strategies and development; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key concepts upon which the practice of marketing is based
  2. recognise these concepts in the marketplace and in everyday life
  3. discuss the role and influence of marketing in the organisational environment
  4. discuss how key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prohibitions

MKC1200, MKF1120, MKW1120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Fiona Newton, Ms Maxine Bradshaw (Student contact in Gippsland)

Synopsis

Behavioural concepts and theories relating to consumer behaviour and consumer decision making process. Study of consumer behaviour influenced by individuals' socio-cultural factors such as family, social groups and group processes, social class, culture and subculture and consumers' individual factors such as motivation and needs, perception, learning, personality and lifestyle attitudes. Overview of organisational buying.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the basic concepts of consumer behaviour
  2. describe how this knowledge can be used by marketers
  3. demonstrate ability to segment markets using consumer behaviour concepts/constructs
  4. identify and illustrate how these concepts can be used to explain the decisions buyers make in the marketplace
  5. analyse the behaviour profiles of specific market segments and understand the basic aspects of strategy development as it applies to specific target groups
  6. explain and apply marketing communication in relation to consumer behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKW1120 or MKG1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW2111, MKC2110, MKW2402


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stephen Saunders, Ms Angela Higgins (student contact at Gippsland)

Synopsis

The process of marketing research. Role of research in the marketing decision process. Developing key outputs -- brief, proposal, report. Planning and managing a research project. Qualitative and quantitative research techniques. Statistical analysis, marketing interpretation and reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of marketing research methods
  2. illustrate the processes and techniques on quantitative and qualitative research
  3. demonstrate skills on writing a research proposal and the conduct of a research study by applying appropriate research design
  4. develop competencies to analyse and interpret data by applying basic statistical tools
  5. critically assess the relevance of information for marketing decision making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Saunders

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Co-requisites

MKW2402, MKG2402 or MKW2111

Prohibitions

ETC2500, MKC2500, MKF2121, MKW2420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedNot offered in 2012
Coordinator(s)Maxine Bradshaw

Synopsis

Topics include the nature and environment of business marketing, buying process in business marketing, marketing intelligence and business market targeting, networking and relationship, planning a business marketing mix strategy, ethical issues in business marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and explain the dynamic nature of business marketing
  2. illustrate the organisational buying decision process and the role of buying centre in buying decisions
  3. develop competencies in business marketing strategy components
  4. demonstrate application of marketing theories and concepts in the management of business marketing functions
  5. critically evaluate the techniques that can be used to assess market opportunities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKW1120 or MKG1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW2431


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Cornes Meintjes, Ms Angela Higgins (Gippsland)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with a theoretical and practical appreciation of the central role marketing communication plays in the general business environment. The unit provides a framework for examining, analysing and evaluation various aspects of the marketing communications process and the relevant marketing communications tools most commonly used. It is further designed to assist business managers to make choices regarding which marketing tools to use under a variety of dynamic environments. Topics covered include: advertising, PR, personal selling, direct selling, Internet marketing, sponsorship, sales promotion, emerging technologies and their potential.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the marketing communication strategies used to build brands
  2. understand and apply marketing communication functions
  3. analyse and apply the marketing communication processes as they apply to specific targets
  4. analyse the social, legal, and ethical issues associated with marketing communication from both a national and international perspective
  5. determine and apply the processes associated with evaluating the effectiveness of marketing communications across a range of media vehicles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Cornes Meintjes

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of MKW1120 or MKG1120 and one of MKW2402 or MKG2402 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3460, MKF3461, MKW2211, MKW2460


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jasmine Rushdi, Angela Higgins (Gippsland)

Synopsis

The development of corporate marketing strategies; marketing planning procedure; evaluation and control in marketing planning; international case studies in corporate marketing planning and strategy; concepts of product management; designing a product strategy; monitoring planning/marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the relationship between corporate planning and marketing planning in a business environment
  2. demonstrate the relationship between corporate objective setting and marketing objective setting
  3. construct or prepare a marketing plan, which incorporates the specific elements of the marketing mix to achieve specific marketing objectives
  4. develop and enhance appropriate written and oral communications and analytical skills required for the effective presentation of a marketing plan
  5. understand how a marketing plan is implemented in practice

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jasmine Rushdi

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of MKW2402 or MKG2402 and MKW2420 or MKG2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

The unit introduces the omnipresence of sport in Australian society, the interconnectedness of sport and business, particularly marketing, and those factors that differentiate sport marketing from mainstream marketing. The unit will draw on the rapidly expanding body of literature on sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will also be introduced to the most current marketing concepts and their relevance to sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will develop an appreciation of sport sponsorship as a co-marketing alliance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discriminate between the marketing of sport properties, and the marketing through sport properties in the form of sponsorship and the implications for strategy development
  2. critically assess the relevance of the contingency marketing planning framework for sport marketing
  3. develop a fan profile based on level of team identification as an indication of fan loyalty
  4. determine the role of sponsorship in marketing and in particular in marketing communication and branding strategy
  5. critically analyse effective methods for evaluating sponsorship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKF1120, MKW1120, MKC1120 or MCG1120 and one of MKW2402 or MKG2402 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKX3200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

This unit provides strategic insight into the specific field of sports event marketing. The unit begins by detailing the commercial and social role of sports events. In order to successfully fulfill these roles, an event manager must strive to satisfy their markets' needs, and so the unit explores the specific methods used to understand these needs. Having determined the needs of their customers, the event organiser then sets about satisfying them using the sports marketing mix. And because the way in which this mix is applied is influenced by external factors, the unit concludes by examining the market forces shaping the future of sports event marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the commercial and social nature of sport events;
  2. explain how event managers go about understanding the needs of their markets;
  3. describe and apply the sports marketing mix;
  4. identify and describe the trends relating to the globalisation of sport and their impact on the future of sports event marketing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKW1120 or MKG1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW3210


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Margaret Matanda, Maxine Bradshaw (Gippsland)

Synopsis

Corporate strategy and marketing strategy, strategic perspectives on buyer behaviour, strategic use of marketing mix variables such as communication, pricing, distribution, product, external and internal decision environments, market position and analysis, corporate and marketing strategic direction, managing marketing strategy -- planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the effectiveness of marketing strategy at different levels of the organisation using case studies
  2. apply marketing theories and model to analysing and formulating marketing strategy analysis and formulation processes
  3. assess the role of segmentation, targeting and positioning strategy and the marketing mix elements in the strategy making process
  4. formulate and recommend strategic solutions that add measurable value to the organisations used in case studies
  5. examine the feasibility of implementing and controlling chosen marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Margaret Matanda

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKW2420 or MKG2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3130, MKF3131, MKW3440


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Mr Manir Zaman

Synopsis

The scope of sales management, personal selling in the marketing mix, deployment and account coverage, sales force size/sales forecasting, personal selling, field sales management, compensation, evaluation and motivation, organising, recruitment and selection, training.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the effectiveness of marketing examine communication, relationship building and negotiation alternatives in a selling and organisational context
  2. analyse the theoretical basis of an effective sales and planning organisation evaluate the practical importance of setting goals and objectives suitable to a modern sales environment
  3. critically analyse strategies that might be used for the recruiting, selection, training and on-going development of sales staff
  4. compare the theoretical and practical requirements for leading, controlling and evaluating a sales team
  5. critically evaluate the importance of the ethical behaviour of a sales manager.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKW2402 or MKG2402 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW3442


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Off-campus)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yunus Ali, Ms Maxine Bradshaw (student contact at Gippsland)

Synopsis

The unit covers environmental factors affecting international marketing, the field of international business, international marketing research and marketing decisions, entry strategies, marketing planning, controlling and strategy for international business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate how a range of international marketing criteria (culture and so on) impact on a chosen and specific foreign market
  2. develop, analyse, justify and evaluate market entry and longer term foreign marketing plans for a specific market
  3. understand how current issues, trends and research in international marketing impact on designated foreign market segments
  4. identify and evaluate how a range of specialised, localised and specific issues might impact upon business activity within a designated foreign market segment
  5. utilise independent critical thinking and applied learning skills to develop an international marketing orientation in terms of a chosen market context.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yunus Ali

Contact hours

OCL students are expected to undertake 10 hours of guided study time per week, including asynchronous online discussion board activities

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKW1120 or MKG1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW3444


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Griffiths

Synopsis

Introduction to marketing activities undertaken by a wide range of organisations (business, government, profit, non profit); examines marketing theory, the marketing concept and its evolution from a strategic and applied perspective. The development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation and marketing's role, value-exchange processes, buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis, the marketing environment, the use of marketing decision making tools; product concepts, strategies and development; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key concepts upon which the practice of marketing is based
  2. recognise these concepts in the marketplace and in everyday life
  3. recognise the role and influence of marketing in the organisational environment
  4. Demonstrate how key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems and applying solutions to those problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffths

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prohibitions

MKC1200, MKF1120, MKW1120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Griffiths

Synopsis

An in-depth analysis of the marketing techniques that can be applied to the tourism sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the importance of marketing to the tourism sector
  2. identify the marketing methods employed by the tourism sector
  3. distinguish between marketing a service and a physical good
  4. analyse the marketing strategies, including segmentation, employed by the tourism sector.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week

Prerequisites

MKP1120

Co-requisites

NIL

Prohibitions

MKW2600


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Fiona Newton

Synopsis

This unit is designed to enable students to understand how to define an organisation's stakeholders and then explore how the motivation, needs, perception, and attitudes of different stakeholders can influence the way in which businesses configure their services/ products and communicate value to their stakeholders. The issues of group influences on stakeholder behaviour and the importance of market segmentation are also examined, along with an overview of how decision making units operate in B2B and B2C environments. These core issues are consistently related back to the ways in which businesses position, price, promote and place their products/services in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. effectively recognise, define, describe, and analyse the different needs, motivations, perceptions, and attitudes of stakeholders
  2. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the ways in which different types of groups can influence stakeholder behaviour
  3. develop an understanding of how decision making units can operate in B2B and B2C environments
  4. be able to identify and describe 'market segments' and develop marketing strategies to address the needs of the various stakeholders identified.
  5. explore the importance of communication in relationship building and in developing brand loyalty
  6. understand and critically evaluate how different types of stakeholder behaviour can influence the ways in marketing communications are formulated and transmitted.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Contact hours

One 6.5 hour problem based workshop per week.

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKP1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW2402, MKF2111, MKC2110


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Sunway Trimester 3 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Griffiths (First Semester and Second Semester);Dr Ting Ding Hooi, (Summer Semester);Ms Nadia Ghafoorzada (T3-58 Semester)

Synopsis

Introduction to marketing activities undertaken by business, government, profit, non profit organisations. Marketing theory, the marketing concept and its evolution from a strategic and applied perspective; development of corporate and marketing strategic plans; analysis of an organisation and marketing's role, value-exchange processes, buyer behaviour, marketing research and market analysis, the marketing environment, the use of marketing decision making tools; product concepts, strategies and development; distribution, pricing and communication mix strategies; services marketing; marketing management, implementation and control processes and procedures.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe the key concepts upon which the practice of marketing is based
  2. recognise these concepts in the marketplace and in everyday life
  3. discuss the role and influence of marketing in the organisational environment
  4. discuss how key marketing concepts can be used in analysing a range of marketing problems.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths (First semester and Second semester)
Dr Ting Ding Hooi (Summer semester)
Ms Nadia Ghafoorzada (Trimester 3)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120, MKP1120


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Ting Ding Hooi

Synopsis

Introduction to e-business and its enabling technologies including email, EDI, EFT, bar-coding, electronic catalogues, smart cards and CALS. Associated electronic processes and systems including on-line business, the Internet and World Wide Web (WWW). Other issues include international standards, ethics, privacy, accounting, legal and security issues; the impact on the workplace; corporate, national and global information infrastructures; aligning information technology to business strategy; electronic marketing worldwide; internationalisation, government policies, strategies and leadership.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purpose and scope of e-Business
  2. identify the technology that underpins e-Business environment
  3. examine the impact of marketing and strategy development in this environment
  4. examine the impact of policy and the future of e-Business.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Uchenna Cyril Eze

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prohibitions

BEW1601


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Fiona Newton; Ms Ghazala Khan (Malaysia)

Synopsis

Behavioural concepts and theories relating to consumer behaviour and consumer decision making process. Study of consumer behaviour influenced by individuals' socio-cultural factors such as family, social groups and group processes, social class, culture and subculture and consumers' individual factors such as motivation and needs, perception, learning, personality and lifestyle attitudes. Overview of organisational buying.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the basic concepts of consumer behaviour describe how this knowledge can be used by marketers
  2. demonstrate ability to segment markets using consumer behaviour concepts/constructs
  3. identify and illustrate how these concepts can be used to explain the decisions buyers make in the marketplace
  4. analyse the behaviour profiles of specific market segments and understand the basic aspects of strategy development as it applies to specific target groups
  5. explain and apply marketing communication in relation to consumer behaviour.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKW1120

Co-requisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKW2111, MKC2110, MKG2402


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Stephen Saunders

Synopsis

The process of marketing research. Role of research in the marketing decision process. Developing key outputs -- brief, proposal, report. Planning and managing a research project. Qualitative and quantitative research techniques. Statistical analysis, marketing interpretation and reporting.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the purposes and scope of marketing research methods
  2. illustrate the processes and techniques on quantitative and qualitative research
  3. demonstrate skills on writing a research proposal and the conduct of a research study by applying appropriate research design
  4. develop competencies to analyse and interpret data by applying basic statistical tools
  5. critically assess the relevance of information for marketing decision making.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Saunders

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Co-requisites

MKW2402 or MKW2111

Prohibitions

ETC2500, MKC2500, MKF2121, MKG2420


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Manir Zaman

Synopsis

Topics include the nature and environment of business marketing, buying process in business marketing, marketing intelligence and business market targeting, networking and relationship, planning a business marketing mix strategy, ethical issues in business marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define and explain the dynamic nature of business marketing
  2. illustrate the organisational buying decision process and the role of buying centre in buying decisions
  3. develop competencies in business marketing strategy components
  4. demonstrate application of marketing theories and concepts in the management of business marketing functions
  5. critically evaluate the techniques that can be used to assess market opportunities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKG2431


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Fiona Newton (First Semester); Ms Cornes Meintjes (Second Semester)

Synopsis

This unit is designed to provide students with a theoretical and practical appreciation of the central role marketing communication plays in the general business environment. The unit provides a framework for examining, analysing and evaluation various aspects of the marketing communications process and the relevant marketing communications tools most commonly used. It is further designed to assist business managers to make choices regarding which marketing tools to use under a variety of dynamic environments. Topics covered include: advertising, PR, personal selling, direct selling, Internet marketing, sponsorship, sales promotion, emerging technologies and their potential.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. demonstrate a detailed understanding of the marketing communication strategies used to build brands
  2. understand and apply marketing communication functions
  3. analyse and apply the marketing communication processes as they apply to specific targets
  4. analyse the social, legal, and ethical issues associated with marketing communication from both a national and international perspective
  5. determine and apply the processes associated with evaluating the effectiveness of marketing communications across a range of media vehicles.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Fiona Newton (semester 1)
Ms Corne Meintjes (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: MKG1120 or MKW1120 and MKG2402 or MKW2402 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3460, MKF3461, MKW2211, MKG2460


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Maureen Griffiths

Synopsis

An in-depth analysis of the marketing techniques that can be applied to the tourism sector.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the importance of marketing to the tourism sector
  2. identify the marketing methods employed by the tourism sector
  3. distinguish between marketing a service and a physical good
  4. analyse the marketing strategies, including segmentation, employed by the tourism sector.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Maureen Griffiths

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKF1120, MKG1120, MKP1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKP2600


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Synopsis

Includes concepts of analysing an e-business for viability using logical value chain assessment. Examines an e-business' value creation capacity, value delivery likelihood, and value capturing ability. Analysis of e-businesses in Australasia and around the world. Dissection of application of e-business principles, and specifically e-business models through an examination of how e-businesses are designed and interact with business partners, channel members and suppliers. Also covered are customer profitability analysis, cost of sales, customer valuation, online behaviour and purchase propensity assessment and use. Lecture and partially case discussion based.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. comprehend, explain and analyse e-business models in the various parts of value chain including downstream (retailing), internal (intrabusiness) and upstream (supply chain and B2B e-procurement)
  2. comprehend, explain and analyse the applications of e-business models in other areas including electronic government, mobile computing and pervasive technology, dynamic trading (e-auctions) and web 2.0 environment (social networks)
  3. comprehend and explain the justifications of e-business investments and the use of e-business performance measures and metrics
  4. comprehend and explain the development of e-business applications and infrastructure.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed the following four units: MGG1010 or MGW1010 and MKG1120 or MKW1120 and AFG1000 or AFW1000 and MKW1601

Prohibitions

BEW2621


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jasmine Rushdi

Synopsis

The development of corporate marketing strategies; marketing planning procedure; evaluation and control in marketing planning; international case studies in corporate marketing planning and strategy; concepts of product management; designing a product strategy; monitoring planning/marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. define the relationship between corporate planning and marketing planning in a business environment
  2. demonstrate the relationship between corporate objective setting and marketing objective setting
  3. construct or prepare a marketing plan, which incorporates the specific elements of the marketing mix to achieve specific marketing objectives
  4. develop and enhance appropriate written and oral communications and analytical skills required for the effective presentation of a marketing plan
  5. understand how a marketing plan is implemented in practice

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Mustabshira Rushdi

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed two units from the following: MKG2402 or MKW2402 and MKG2420 or MKW2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKF3121, MKG3121


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedPeninsula Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Kimble Montagu

Synopsis

This unit is designed to sensitise students to the issues that affect a firm's ability to compete effectively, and from which competitive advantage is derived.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify and interpret the trends and challenges created by an increasingly competitive and dynamic business/organisational environment
  2. analyse an organisation, taking account of its external environs and identify activities from which competitive advantage may originate
  3. critically assess the strengths and weaknesses of the main competitive advantage theoretical perspectives and make recommendations how an organisation may develop its competitive advantage
  4. create and design strategies for specific organisations to build sustainable competitive advantage using a range of current issues that take into account the dynamic external environment and the organisations skills and resources.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Stephen Saunders

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

This unit provides strategic insight into the specific field of sports event marketing. The unit begins by detailing the commercial and social role of sports events. In order to successfully fulfill these roles, an event manager must strive to satisfy their markets' needs, and so the unit explores the specific methods used to understand these needs. Having determined the needs of their customers, the event organiser then sets about satisfying them using the sports marketing mix. And because the way in which this mix is applied is influenced by external factors, the unit concludes by examining the market forces shaping the future of sports event marketing.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the commercial and social nature of sport events;
  2. explain how event managers go about understanding the needs of their markets;
  3. describe and apply the sports marketing mix;
  4. identify and describe the trends relating to the globalisation of sport and their impact on the future of sports event marketing.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKG3210


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Sumesh Nair (First Semester);Dr Margaret Matanda (Second Semester)

Synopsis

Corporate strategy and marketing strategy, strategic perspectives on buyer behaviour, strategic use of marketing mix variables such as communication, pricing, distribution, product, external and internal decision environments, market position and analysis, corporate and marketing strategic direction, managing marketing strategy -- planning and control.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the effectiveness of marketing strategy at different levels of the organisation using case studies
  2. apply marketing theories and model to analysing and formulating marketing strategy analysis and formulation processes
  3. assess the role of segmentation, targeting and positioning strategy and the marketing mix elements in the strategy making process
  4. formulate and recommend strategic solutions that add measurable value to the organisations used in case studies
  5. examine the feasibility of implementing and controlling chosen marketing strategies.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Sumesh Nair (semester 1)
Dr Margaret Matanda (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG2420 or MKW2420 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3130, MKF3131, MKG3440


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Manir Zaman

Synopsis

The scope of sales management, personal selling in the marketing mix, deployment and account coverage, sales force size/sales forecasting, personal selling, field sales management, compensation, evaluation and motivation, organising, recruitment and selection, training.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine communication, relationship building and negotiation alternatives in a selling and organisational context
  2. analyse the theoretical basis of an effective sales and planning organisation evaluate the practical importance of setting goals and objectives suitable to a modern sales environment
  3. critically analyse strategies that might be used for the recruiting, selection, training and on-going development of sales staff
  4. compare the theoretical and practical requirements for leading, controlling and evaluating a sales team
  5. critically evaluate the importance of the ethical behaviour of a sales manager.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG2402 or MKW2402 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKG3442


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedGippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yunus Ali

Synopsis

The unit covers environmental factors affecting international marketing, the field of international business, international marketing research and marketing decisions, entry strategies, marketing planning, controlling and strategy for international business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse and evaluate how a range of international marketing criteria (culture and so on) impact on a chosen and specific foreign market
  2. develop, analyse, justify and evaluate market entry and longer term foreign marketing plans for a specific market
  3. understand how current issues, trends and research in international marketing impact on designated foreign market segments
  4. identify and evaluate how a range of specialised, localised and specific issues might impact upon business activity within a designated foreign market segment
  5. utilise independent critical thinking and applied learning skills to develop an international marketing orientation in terms of a chosen market context

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yunus Ali

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.

Prohibitions

MKC3220, MKC3224, MKF3531, MKG3444


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yunus Ali

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to extend students' knowledge and understanding of Muslim consumers, to analyse Islamic faith based consumption needs of the diverse Muslim communities across the globe, and to develop skills to apply this knowledge and understanding to practical and challenging marketing situations. In particular emphasis will be placed on critical analysis and insights gained from Islamic and marketing literature, case studies, project works to solve the strategic problems of targeting this emerging market.

Outcomes

The learning goals to be achieved in this unit are to:

  1. understand the complexity of Islamic consumer markets across the world
  2. identify the unique nature of the Islamic faith-based consumption needs and behaviour of the diverse Muslim markets
  3. investigate and evaluate the marketing challenges of targeting Muslim markets
  4. formulate and implement marketing strategies for domestic, regional and global Muslim markets
  5. build working knowledge and skills on dealing with Islamic business and marketing ethics and corporate social responsibilities.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yunus Ali

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKC1200, MKW1120, MKW2402


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedSunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Associate Professor Paul Yeow

Synopsis

This unit is about measure and metrics used in assessing whether an e-business is achieving its goals. The unit links online business models, business environment, and change to business performance to performance measures. It also links performance measures with strategy, value, and business environment. It provides alternative performance measures and metrics as feedback mechanisms in an online performance measurement environment and establishes benchmarks. These include performance measures for external and internal operations, transactions with customers and suppliers, e-business and e-commerce activities, e-business security, general business health, website activities, etc. Explicitly, it includes measurement principles, measurement interactions, and measurement impact on performance assessment.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. to develop a clear understanding of the concept of performance measurement in the e-business environment
  2. to provide students with theoretical knowledge and practical skills on how to develop appropriate e-business performance measures and metrics to monitor and control company's e-business and e-commerce initiatives.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Paul Yeow

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKW2841

Prohibitions

BEW2620


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Manir Zaman

Synopsis

Traditional business disciplines are starting to appreciate the fundamental challenges presented by the application of technology to their knowledge base. In marketing the most visible agent of change has been WWW and online transacting which has already revolutionised a number of sectors of the world economy. This subject takes marketing and traditional views of marketing and exposes them to critical analysis in the light of technological change. It explores how marketers can utilise different ways of understanding, creating, communication and delivering customer value in the marketplace.

Outcomes

The learning goals of this unit are to:

  1. illustrate insight into how traditional marketing structures and concepts, techniques and activities translate into the electronic marketing medium
  2. demonstrate an integrated perspective of how electronic marketing contributes to value creation for all stakeholders
  3. illustrate an ability to analyse the market and to create and develop innovative electronic solutions to fulfil identifiable needs
  4. combine theory with the pragmatism required to effectively traverse the divide between marketing and delivering an electronic solution to market needs.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Mr Manir Zaman

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Sunway First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Karen Lurati

Synopsis

An overview of retailing from a management perspective. The development of retailing; the Australian retail industry and its environment; merchandising planning, control and distribution; pricing merchandise; selling and sales promotion; store location, layout and presentation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide students with a broad appreciation of the business of retail now and in the future
  2. provide students with a working knowledge of retail processes and procedures
  3. develop in students an understanding of how the industry is structured
  4. equip students with the skills necessary to analyse a retail business
  5. provide students with an understanding of the various retail formats in Australia and internationally.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 55%
Examination:45%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Irene Powell

Synopsis

Media research methods in the world's major advertising regions -- US, Europe, Asia and Australia. The advantages and problems offered by media planning computer programs. Interpersonal and inter-organisational skills in negotiating between media and advertising agencies.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. analyse the media planning and buying function
  2. illustrate how research is used in the media planning and buying process
  3. formulate a media plan by setting media objectives, determining a media strategy as well as evaluating and selecting media categories/media vehicles
  4. evaluate media use decisions and campaign tracking options post analysis
  5. critically analyse media buying issues and the media evaluation process.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Irene Powell

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKW2211, MKG2460 or MKW2460 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Irene Powell

Synopsis

Communication theory applied to advertising copywriting primarily for television, radio and print media. Theory and practice of television and radio production. Students will be taught to work from well focused briefs to generate creative executions which produce targeted audience response, while working within ethical and legal frameworks.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. provide solid understanding of all aspects of creative strategy development and creative brief interpretation
  2. apply communication theory and models to solving specific advertising objectives
  3. critique creative executions according to contemporary creative philosophy
  4. provide understanding of the roles of all people involved in the creative process
  5. generate concepts and critique them.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Irene Powell

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKW2211, MKG2460 or MKW2460 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr David Toleman

Synopsis

The unit is designed to develop students understanding of the role of marketing in contemporary professional service organisations (including legal, medical and institutional services) and to introduce basic concepts in marketing management in these types of organisations. Students will be able to identify particular characteristics and skills relevant to marketing the professional services. Students will become aware of client studies and market research techniques currently in use within professional services environment. Case studies of successful marketing activities is critical, professional, and ethical debates, in relation to marketing professional services will be introduced.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the role and influences of marketing in the professional service firm and context
  2. explain the key concepts upon which the practice of professional service marketing is based
  3. apply key concepts in analysing a range of professional services marketing problems and issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Rowan Kennedy

Contact hours

3 hours class contact or equivalent per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Colin Campbell (First Semester); Associate Professor Colin Jevons (Second Semester)

Synopsis

A brand is much more than a logo, a symbol, a sign or device, or simply the result of clever advertising. It helps to communicate value and create and deliver that value. Branding is a promise of value for customers. It helps to attract and, if it is true and accurate, keep customers. It provides an extra element of understanding or meaning, for customers as they form opinions and make purchase decisions from a variety of competing offerings. There is strong industry demand for graduates with a thorough understanding of branding. While this unit is primarily for students undertaking a major in marketing it is offered to any student with a prerequisite of an introductory marketing unit.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the brand and the various functions of brand management
  2. describe the various components of a brand and how they interact
  3. analyse branding techniques and apply them to a variety of different issues
  4. generalise and hypothesise from branding theory into branding practice

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 40%
Examination: 60%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Colin Campbell (semester 1)
Associate Professor Colin Jevons (semester 2)

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKC1200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Itir Binay

Synopsis

This unit will introduce students to the unique features of Not for Profit Marketing. In this very diverse sector, commercially derived marketing concepts have played an important role, but also face some special challenges. The aim is to explore the similarities, differences and challenges for marketing in social and political marketing, government and education marketing, arts and culture marketing using examples from Australia and around the world.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the importance of marketing in the not for profit organisation
  2. compare and contrast marketing in not for profit and for profit organisations
  3. describe the adjustments marketing must address in not for profit organisations
  4. illustrate appropriate marketing from the not for profit sector
  5. practice communication skills for marketing in not for profit organisations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Bridget James

Synopsis

This unit prepares students to work in a business environment where the sustainability of marketing practices is a source of competitive advantage. It examines the 'green' consumer and provides students with a framework to develop a marketing strategy within a world that is increasingly concerned with the environmental impact of business decisions.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. understand the concept of green marketing and its origins
  2. analyse the factors that influence the decision making of the 'green' consumer
  3. evaluate the pressures on businesses to adopt more sustainable business practices and how these pressures impact on marketing activities
  4. have the ability to create a framework for a sustainable marketing approach.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination (Oral): 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKG1120, MKF1120, MKW1120 or MKC1200 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jan Brace-Govan

Synopsis

The purpose of this unit is to offer a broad appreciation of academic marketing research and to provide an understanding of the Honours year. The unit offers the opportunity to read widely in marketing theory with the intention of identifying a potential research project. The unit is taught through the seminar method and students will read from leading marketing journals and the business press. Seminars will be offered by staff members or visiting academics. The unit will introduce students to critical analysis of marketing theory with a view to assessing research topics and encourage/facilitate the development of independent research.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. develop and enhance appropriate research reading and analytical skills in marketing theory
  2. develop critical reading skills
  3. develop an understanding of the Honours year
  4. provide opportunity for highly able students to spend time with research active staff.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jan Brace-Govan

Contact hours

2 hours per fortnight plus 2 hours weekly directed reading

Prerequisites

Students of honours standard will be invited to enrol in this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Gippsland First semester 2012 (Day)
Peninsula First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Vaughan Reimers

Synopsis

The unit introduces the omnipresence of sport in Australian society, the interconnectedness of sport and business, particularly marketing, and those factors that differentiate sport marketing from mainstream marketing. The unit will draw on the rapidly expanding body of literature on sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will also be introduced to the most current marketing concepts and their relevance to sport marketing and sponsorship. Students will develop an appreciation of sport sponsorship as a co-marketing alliance.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. discriminate between the marketing of sport properties, and the marketing through sport properties in the form of sponsorship and the implications for strategy development
  2. critically assess the relevance of the contingency marketing planning framework for sport marketing
  3. develop a fan profile based on level of team identification as an indication of fan loyalty
  4. determine the role of sponsorship in marketing and in particular in marketing communication and branding strategy
  5. critically analyse effective methods for evaluating sponsorship.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Vaughan Reimers

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120, MKG1120, MKW1120 or MKC1200 and MKF2111, MKC2110, MKG2402 or MKW2402 or equivalent in undergraduate degree program

Prohibitions

MKG3200


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Yongfu He

Synopsis

This unit will explore the developments in the internationalisation of the retail industry by examining the characteristics of retailing globally. Insight will be provided on key trends and developments of international retailing. Students will explore key strategies for international expansion and the critical success factors for international retailing growth.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the nature and character of retailing around the world
  2. identify and explain the key trends and developments facing international retailing in the twenty first century
  3. evaluate the impact of technology on international retailing;
  4. critically analyse key strategies that retailers may want to use for international expansion
  5. analyse the critical success factors required for an international retailer to grow in the current environment.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Yongfu He

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF1120 or MKW1120, MKX1500


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Evening)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sophie Feng

Synopsis

The marketing task is not complete until customers receive their goods. Distribution is the process that makes that happen. The primary aim of this unit is the development and management of distribution channels in order to meet your marketing objectives. The unit is designed to help you systematically analyse the various channel functions and strategies. Mastering the principles that will be discussed in this unit will also help you in understanding Supply Chain issues. It is important to note however, that this unit is NOT about supply chain management but rather about the role of channels as a marketing strategic element. Some topics of supply chain management of course will be discussed from a marketing perspective. In order to better understand the theory in the context of the business world actual business cases are used throughout the lectures and tutorials.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. recognise the importance of marketing channels, as a strategic element of marketing
  2. understand the elements and work flows in marketing channels
  3. appreciate the issues involved in designing and coordinating marketing channels from a channel manager's perspective
  4. explain how effective marketing channels contribute to customer value and assess the performance of channel management.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 50%
Examination: 50%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Shanfei Feng

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKC1200, MKF1120, MKG1120 or MKW1120 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Colin Campbell

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Colin Campbell


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Summer semester A 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Sean Sands

Synopsis

This unit is offered to students who have completed eight six point units of which two must be from the field of Marketing. This unit comprises the coursework component of the International Study Program. The program is designed to expose students to the thinking of some of the world's leading marketers. Students are expected to understand the critical factors associated with marketing in an international arena such as culture, marketing communication, branding, sponsorship, globalisation, research, e-marketing, customer services and retailing. Students enrolling in this unit must meet the cost of their own travel.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine international marketing and the nature of the forces impacting marketing at an international level
  2. analyse basic theories and concepts relevant to international marketing and examine how these theories and concepts can provide insight into, and an understanding of marketing in an international context
  3. compare a number of senior marketing managers perspectives and marketing strategies
  4. critically analyse the impact of economic, geographic, demographic and social forces on international marketing
  5. evaluate the importance of cross cultural issues on marketing and their impact on international marketing strategy.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sean Sands

Contact hours

156 hours, 36 contact hours (5 day block), 117 private study, face to face contact, preparation and participation in company visits.

Prerequisites

Students must have passed 48 points including at least 12 points from the Department of Marketing.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryInternational Short Field Experience (Explore Program)
OfferedCaulfield Trimester 2 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jimmy Wong

Synopsis

The China study program in marketing is offered to students who are partway through their degree having studied at least two marketing units. The program is designed to expose students to the thinking of some of the leading marketers in China. Students are expected to understand the critical factors associated with marketing in an international arena such as culture, marketing, customer services and retailing. In addition to the standard subject fees payable for this unit, students are required to pay for airfares, transfer and accommodation.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. examine the forces impacting marketing at an international level in the context of China
  2. analyse basic theories and concepts relevant to international marketing and examine how these theories and concepts can provide insight into, and an understanding of marketing in the context of China
  3. compare a number of senior marketing managers perspectives and marketing
  4. evaluate the importance of cross cultural issues on marketing and their impact on international marketing strategy in China

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jimmy Wong

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students will require the permission before undertaking this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jiemiao Chen

Synopsis

This unit explores advertising management issues. Topics include: the structure and responsibilities of the advertising industry and its controls. Management of advertising within the agency and within the client and the relationship between these two parties. The issues faced by clients and their agencies in maximising the effectiveness of an advertising budget, including the choice of advertising research techniques, media developments, production and international advertising considerations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. explain the advertising management process within a client organisation, media group or an advertising agency
  2. formulate an appropriate approach for the selection, evaluation, briefing and remuneration of an advertising agency
  3. explain the various relationships within the agency/client/media roles
  4. critically evaluate creative concepts and executions
  5. critically assess ideas associated with advertising management issues.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Jiemiao Chen

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Students must have passed one of the following: MKF3461, MKW2211, MKG2460, MKW2460, MKW3461, or MKC3460 before undertaking this unit.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick First semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield First semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton First semester 2012 (Day)
Berwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Clayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
South Africa Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jane Carroll (Caulfield, Clayton); Ms Cornes Meintjes (South Africa)

Synopsis

This unit aims to give students first-hand experience of working in an industry in which they would like to be employed on graduation. Internships are designed to provide students with an opportunity to integrate marketing theory with business practice. Separate internship programs are drawn up for each student

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse a marketing activity
  2. evaluate the impact of a specific marketing theory within a business context
  3. evaluate the experience of working within an organisation
  4. communicate clearly and effectively with both business and academic stakeholders.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

Contact as specified by unit coordinator

Prerequisites

Approval to enrol in this unit will only be given after consultation with the unit leader. Normally students will be required to be in the final year of their degree, and preferably in their final semester.


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedBerwick Second semester 2012 (Day)
Caulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Mr Gary Tate

Synopsis

An integrative experience using the advertising theory and processes to which students have been exposed through their course. Students will further study and use campaign planning and management tools. They will create from briefs two major advertising campaigns.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. design and execute an integrated advertising campaign
  2. evaluate the effectiveness of integrated advertising campaigns
  3. integrate research information, media planning and creative resources to efficiently execute a finished campaign
  4. professionally present advertising campaign strategies to client/agency staff.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

MKF3621, MKW3621 or MKX3621


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Srinivas Sridharan

Synopsis

Some say marketing has 'borrowed' excessively from other disciplines (from both within and outside the social sciences). As a result, home-grown theories are less common in marketing as they are in management, economics, or sociology -- for example. Unlike the Academy of Management Review, marketing does not have a dedicated theory journal. Notwithstanding, there is ample opportunity for the marketing discipline to consolidate and then advance its theoretical boundaries and thereby grow in both stature and rigour. This unit will equip graduate students with the necessary skills to conduct scholarly research that will legitimately advance the boundaries of marketing knowledge.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. critically analyse the origins and history of marketing thought, including continuities and discontinuities with the past
  2. explain the major schools of thought in marketing
  3. compare a range of select theories from other disciplines and evaluate if these theories might be useful in a marketing context
  4. critically review a number of methods of inquiry and explanation utilised in the discovery and confirmation of knowledge
  5. compare explanatory philosophies within marketing and their relevance to changes in marketing
  6. explain critical thinking in marketing theory use apply and its use to interpret and integrate findings into a broader theoretical framework.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Srinivas Sridharan

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (On-campus block of classes)

Synopsis

Research in marketing is often taught as a highly theoretical process, with an assumption that once the problem or issue has been determined, it is then possible to undertake the research with little further consideration. In fact the design, execution and dissemination of research are of the utmost importance. Many will-founded research projects fail at the implementation stage and much valuable upon the requirements for undertaking applied marketing research. The unit is intended to provide a practical insight into marketing research through case studies, exercises and presentations.

Outcomes

The aim of this unit to provide students with knowledge regarding practical and professional issues surrounding the conduct of academic research in Marketing. This unit is designed to fill the gaps between theoretical knowledge and practice and provide for skills in identifying and formalizing research problems, preparing literature based arguments, understanding philosophical stances in marketing research, as well as issues surrounding data management, dissemination, project specification and ethics.
Upon successful completion of this unit students will:

  1. have an understanding of the different philosophies that inform approaches to marketing research appreciate their methodological imperatives
  2. be able to identify, specify and formalize research opportunities
  3. understand the requirements of generating a literature review and a theoretical frame of reference
  4. have an ability to record, track, analyse and manage literature sources
  5. appreciate the practical problems in undertaking fieldwork including data management, security and ethics
  6. be able to prepare a rigorous proposal for an academic research project in Marketing
  7. be able to address research to different target audiences, through writing style, argument structure and dissemination plans
  8. appreciate the processes involved in delivering different research outputs

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Sean Sands

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jan Brace-Govan

Synopsis

The aim of this unit is to introduce students with limited experience in qualitative research, to some of its methods for data gathering, data analysis and some means to ensure reliability and validity, with particular reference to marketing. Topics include field work, interviewing, and data analysis. It provides the opportunity to explore qualitative research and practice in the field of marketing with emphasis on scholarly practice.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. describe different qualitative methods, assess reported qualitative research results
  2. develop a research problem that would be best addressed through qualitative approaches
  3. gather and analyse qualitative data, present an argument based on qualitative methods that demonstrates validity and reliability
  4. explain ethical issues relevant to qualitative methods.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 70%
Examination: 30%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jan Brace-Govan

Contact hours

3 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield First semester 2012 (On-campus split block of classes)
Coordinator(s)Professor Harmen Oppewal

Synopsis

This unit introduces both multivariate statistical techniques for the analysis of survey data and models to analyse the discrete choice behaviour of individuals. These techniques enable the researcher to effectively analyse survey data and aid in the understanding of markets and of consumer behaviour. In this unit, we place emphasis on understanding the underlying assumptions required to conduct such analyses, appropriate interpretation and reporting of results and the use of these techniques in informing decision makers and academics.

Outcomes

The aim of this unit is to provide students with knowledge regarding multivariate data procedures in conduct of academic research in marketing. This unit is designed to fill the gaps in data analysis using sophisticated approaches and data collection methods. The aim is to provide knowledge of available data analysis techniques to address specific research questions, their strengths and weaknesses (limitations). The relevance to research design and sampling issues.
Upon successful completion of this unit students will:

  1. have an understanding of a range of data analysis procedures that may be appropriate when examining marketing issues.
  2. be able to identify, specify and run the various software programs.
  3. be able to interpret the output of these data analysis procedures.
  4. demonstrate an understanding of designing quantitative research and implications for sampling and sampling units.
  5. design research instruments to achieve validity and reliability and generalisability.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Harmen Oppewal

Contact hours

3 hours per week


24 points, SCA Band 3, 0.500 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate, Postgraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Full year 2012 (Day)
Clayton Full year 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Jan Brace-Govan

Synopsis

A major research project applying the procedures and techniques learned in MKF4030. Students prepare and write a report in such a way to pave the way for a higher academic degree in marketing or management or a career in business.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. identify a marketing or business issue in the research literature which has either not been adequately researched previously or which requires replication
  2. critically review relevant academic and business research which relates to this issue
  3. develop a model or conceptualisation of the proposed research and an appreciation of the relevance of such studies to the business community
  4. develop a set of hypotheses to be tested, propose research into these hypotheses, by means of a specific research proposal
  5. conduct, analyse and report findings of the research so that all main issues are identified, limitations of the research are identified and the research findings are linked back to earlier studies in the literature.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Dr Jan Brace-Govan

Prerequisites

Students must be enrolled in course 0508 to undertake this unit


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
Monash Passport categoryDepth (Enhance Program)
OfferedClayton Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Dr Glen Croy

Synopsis

This unit introduces the multifaceted concept of sustainability. Using multiple perspectives, informed by research, the unit will present a coherent, personalising and engaging introduction to the concept of sustainability. Broader sustainability concepts and implications will be explored through shared individual and collective experiences. Students will explore new interpretations, applications and evaluations of sustainability by actively researching relevant contemporary cases to students' immediate environments of home, work and play. From a better understanding of sustainability, students will have the opportunity to be active advocates for sustainability in and beyond their immediate environments.

Outcomes

The learning objectives associated with this unit are to:

  1. comprehend and explain principles of different perspectives of sustainability
  2. illustrate and apply sustainability skills, tools and strategies in students' immediate environments
  3. analyse process, governance and trans-disciplinary approaches to achieving sustainable outcomes.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 100%

Chief examiner(s)

Professor Geoff Rose

Contact hours

4 hours per week


6 points, SCA Band 3, 0.125 EFTSL

Refer to the specific census and withdrawal dates for the semester(s) in which this unit is offered, or view unit timetables.

LevelUndergraduate
FacultyFaculty of Business and Economics
OfferedCaulfield Second semester 2012 (Day)
Coordinator(s)Ms Jane Carroll

Synopsis

'Psychology, management and marketing' is the capstone subject in the Bachelor of Psychology and Management/Marketing degree. A major goal is to allow students to participate actively in discussion. Discussion will be focused around business cases that allow students to apply their knowledge of management, marketing and psychology. When planning for the future, students will be encouraged to consider not only profit margins, but also the psychological, legal, ethical and marketing issues of the stakeholders involved. The other major goal is to provide an opportunity for students to practice working in teams to integrate and apply the theories of psychology, management and marketing to practical problems in organisations.

Outcomes

The learning goals associated with this unit are to:

  1. integrate the theoretical and functional aspects of the psychology, management and marketing disciplines into a practical problem solving framework to critically assess the real life business situation facing a variety of organisations as outlined in case material
  2. apply appropriate tools to formulate strategic alternatives to address the situation facing the organisation
  3. assess and select the most viable strategy given the organisations objectives and strategies and capabilities
  4. demonstrate effective personal communication and presentation skills to argue and justify recommendations.

Assessment

Within semester assessment: 60%
Examination: 40%

Chief examiner(s)

Ms Erica Brady

Contact hours

3 hours per week

Prerequisites

Any two units in each of the three disciplines: psychology, managment and marketing (any two of the six units must be at second-year level or above, or by permission